Ford 2012 F 250 Owners Manual

Ford-2012-F-250-Owners-Manual-762280 ford-2012-f-250-owners-manual-762280

2015-10-23

: Ford Ford-2012-Ford-F-250-Owners-Manual-815450 ford-2012-ford-f-250-owners-manual-815450 ford pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 448 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Introduction 5
Instrument Cluster 14
Warning lights and chimes 14
Gauges 21
Message center 22
Entertainment Systems 60
AM/FM stereo 60
AM/FM stereo with CD 62
Auxiliary input jack 69
USB port 71
Satellite radio information 74
Navigation system 77
SYNC威77
Climate Controls 78
Manual heating and air conditioning 78
Dual electronic automatic temperature control 81
Rear window defroster 85
Lights 87
Headlamps 87
Turn signal control 91
Interior lamps 92
Bulb replacement 92
Driver Controls 98
Windshield wiper/washer control 98
Steering wheel adjustment 99
Power windows 103
Mirrors 105
Speed control 110
Upfitter controls 114
Table of Contents
1
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security 129
Keys 129
Locks 137
Anti-theft system 149
Seating and Safety Restraints 153
Seating 153
Rear seats 166
Safety restraints 168
Airbags 180
Child restraints 195
Tires, Wheels and Loading 216
Tire information 219
Tire inflation 221
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 237
Vehicle loading 244
Trailer towing 252
Trailer brake controller-integrated 256
Recreational towing 263
Driving 265
Starting 265
Brakes 271
Traction Control™ 274
AdvanceTrac威275
Hill descent control 281
Transmission operation 287
Reverse sensing system 296
Rear-view camera system 298
Table of Contents
2
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies 319
Getting roadside assistance 319
Hazard flasher control 320
Fuel pump shut-off 321
Fuses and relays 321
Changing tires 331
Wheel lug nut torque 347
Jump starting 348
Wrecker towing 351
Customer Assistance 353
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) 359
Reporting safety defects (Canada only) 360
Cleaning 361
Maintenance and Specifications 370
Engine compartment 371
Engine oil 375
Battery 377
Engine coolant 379
Engine coolant check 379
Fuel information 386
Air filter(s) 405
Part numbers 410
Maintenance product specifications and capacities 411
Engine data 415
Accessories 419
Ford Extended Service Plan 421
Table of Contents
3
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance 424
Normal scheduled maintenance and log 428
Index 442
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to
print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change
specifications, design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No
part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval
system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our
written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2012
Table of Contents
4
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get
well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more
you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
•In the United States: www.ford.com
•In Canada: www.ford.ca
•In Australia: www.ford.com.au
•In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on this Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It is
an integral part of the vehicle.
WARNING: Fuel pump shut-off: In the event of an accident
this feature will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the
engine. It can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g. collision
when parking). To restart your vehicle, refer to Fuel pump shut-off in
the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.
Introduction
5
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules, safety belt
pretensioners, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material
– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 1,000 miles (1,600 km) before towing a
trailer. For more detailed information about towing a trailer, refer to
Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
Introduction
6
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils since these
additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil usage.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty
Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Guide.
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
WARNING: Please read the section Airbag Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats
should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
Notice to owners of diesel-powered vehicles
Read the diesel supplement for information regarding correct operation
and maintenance of your Diesel-powered light truck.
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully.
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
Using your vehicle with a snowplow
For more information and guidelines for using your vehicle with a
snowplow, refer to the Driving chapter.
Introduction
7
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
If your light truck is equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package, it may be utilized as an ambulance. Ford urges ambulance
manufacturers to follow the recommendations of the Ford Incomplete
Vehicle Manual, Ford Truck Body Builder’s Layout Book and the
Qualified Vehicle Modifiers (QVM) Guidelines as well as pertinent
supplements. For additional information, please contact the Truck Body
Builders Advisory Service at http://www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas/ and
then by selecting “Contact Us” or by phone at 1–877–840–4338.
Use of your Ford light truck as an ambulance, without the Ford Ambulance
Preparation Package voids the Ford New Vehicle Limited Warranty and
may void the Emissions Warranties. In addition, ambulance usage without
the preparation package could cause high underbody temperatures,
overpressurized fuel and a risk of spraying fuel which could lead to fires.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package, it will be indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The label is located on the driver’s side door pillar or on the rear
edge of the driver’s door. You can determine whether the ambulance
manufacturer followed Ford’s recommendations by directly contacting
that manufacturer. Ford Ambulance Preparation Package is only available
on certain Diesel engine equipped vehicles.
Using your vehicle as a stationary power source (PTO)
Refer to the Driving chapter for more information and guidelines for
operating a vehicle equipped with an aftermarket power take-off system.
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing
your vehicle. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC威
Vehicle Health Report, you consent that certain diagnostic information
may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford
authorized service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be
used for any purpose. See your SYNC威supplement for more information.
Introduction
8
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle; this data will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
•How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
•Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
•How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or the brake pedal; and
•How fast the vehicle was travelling; and
•Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data or information
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded (see
limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directions and
Information privacy below). However, parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement,
that have such special equipment, can read the information if
they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Ford Motor Company
and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder
information without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court
order or where required by law enforcement, other government
authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority.
Other parties may seek to access the information independently
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.
Introduction
9
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event
Data Recorders applies to SYNC威or its features, please note the
following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911
Assist may, through any paired and connected cell phone, disclose
to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash
involving the deployment of an airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates
to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically
or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other details about the vehicle or
crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911
operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If
you do not want to disclose this information, do not activate the
911 Assist feature. See your SYNC威supplement for more
information.
Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions and
Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s
current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”), only to help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches that you request. If you do
not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not
activate the service. Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses
to provide you with this information do not store your vehicle
travel information. For more information, see Traffic, Directions
and Information, Terms and Conditions. See your SYNC威
supplement for more information.
Vehicle Modification Data Recording
Some aftermarket products may cause severe engine and/or transmission
damage; refer to the What is not covered section in The new vehicle
limited warranty for your vehicle chapter of your vehicle’s Warranty
Guide for more information. Some vehicles are equipped with
Powertrain Control Systems that can detect and store information about
vehicle modifications that, for example, increase horsepower and torque
output; this information cannot be erased and will stay in the system’s
memory even if the modification is removed. When a dealer or repair
facility works on your vehicle, it may be necessary for them to access the
information in the Powertrain Control System. This information will likely
identify if any unauthorized modifications have been made to the system,
which may be used to determine if the warranty has been violated and if
repairs will be covered by warranty.
Introduction
10
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
CELL PHONE USE
The use of mobile communications equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile communication equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and
portable two-way radios.
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle.
We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving
and that you comply with all applicable laws.
EXPORT UNIQUE (NON–UNITED STATES/CANADA) VEHICLE
SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the features and options that
are described in this Owner’s Guide. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market
unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This
Owner’s Guide is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built
for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Guide for all other required
information and warnings.
Introduction
11
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert See Owner’s Guide
Fasten Safety Belt Airbag - Front
Airbag - Side Child Seat Lower
Anchor
Child Seat Tether
Anchor Brake System
Anti-Lock Brake System Parking Brake System
Brake Fluid -
Non-Petroleum Based Parking Aid System
Stability Control System Speed Control
Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher
Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment
Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Wash/Wipe
Windshield
Defrost/Demist
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist
Introduction
12
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Windows
Front/Rear Power Window Lockout
Child Safety Door
Lock/Unlock
Interior Luggage
Compartment Release
Panic Alarm Engine Oil
Engine Coolant Engine Coolant
Temperature
Do Not Open When Hot Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks Battery Acid
Explosive Gas Fan Warning
Power Steering Fluid Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
MAX
MIN
Service Engine Soon Engine Air Filter
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter Jack
Check Fuel Cap Low Tire Pressure
Warning
Introduction
13
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Base instrument cluster with standard measure shown; metric
similar
Optional instrument cluster with standard measure shown; metric
similar
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
km/h
R
P
M
x
1
0
0
0
0
0
10
20
30
40 50 60
70
80
90
100
1
2
34
5
6
7
E
CH
CHH
LF
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
MPH
km/h
R
P
M
x
1
0
0
0
0
0
10
20
30
40 50 60
70
80
90
100
1
2
34
5
6
7
H
L
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
MPH
EF
CH CH
Instrument Cluster
14
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning light for additional information.
Standard message center
Note: Some warning lights are
reconfigurable telltale (RTT)
indicator lights and will illuminate in
the message center. These lights
function the same as the other
warning lights.
Optional message center
Note: Some warning lights are
reconfigurable telltale (RTT)
indicator lights and will illuminate in
the message center. These lights
function the same as the other
warning lights. The first three
positions will only display one
warning telltale at a time; the last
three positions can cycle between
different warning telltales.
Service engine soon: The service
engine soon indicator
illuminates when the ignition is first
turned to the on position to check
the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the service engine soon
indicator will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the service engine
soon indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready
for I/M testing. See the Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the on-board
diagnostics system (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to
On-board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
Instrument Cluster
15
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly
causing a fire.
Check fuel cap: Displays when the
fuel cap may not be properly
installed. Continued driving with
this light on may cause the Service
engine soon warning indicator to
come on. Refer to Fuel filler cap in
the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Low fuel (RTT): Displays when
the fuel level in the fuel tank is at
or near empty (refer to Fuel gauge
in this chapter).
Powertrain malfunction/Reduced
power/Electronic throttle
control (RTT): Displays when the
engine has defaulted to a
“limp-home” operation or when a transmission problem has been
detected and shifting may be restricted. If the light remains on, have the
system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer.
Brake system warning light: To
confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the on position
when the engine is not running, or in a position between on and start, or
by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the on
position.
If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this time, seek
service immediately from your authorized dealer. Illumination after
releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level or a brake
system malfunction. The brake system should be inspected immediately
by your authorized dealer.
P!
BRAKE
Instrument Cluster
16
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning
light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle.
Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer. Driving extended
distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and
the risk of personal injury.
Anti-lock brake system: If the
ABS light stays illuminated or
continues to flash, a malfunction has
been detected, have the system
serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake
warning light also is illuminated.
Airbag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when the ignition is
turned to on, continues to flash or
remains on, have the system
serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer. A chime will sound if there is a malfunction in the
indicator light.
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A Belt-Minder威
chime will also sound to remind you
to fasten your safety belt. Refer to
the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter to activate/deactivate the Belt-Minder威chime feature.
Charging system: Illuminates when
the battery is not charging properly.
If it stays on while the engine is
running, there may be a malfunction
with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related
component.
Engine oil pressure (RTT and
static warning light): Displays
when the oil pressure falls below the
normal range. Refer to Engine oil
in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
ABS
Instrument Cluster
17
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Door ajar (RTT): Displays when
the ignition is in the on position and
any door is not completely closed.
Engine coolant temperature
(RTT): Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let cool. Refer
to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
Low tire pressure warning (if
equipped): Illuminates when your
tire pressure is low. If the light
remains on at start up or while
driving, the tire pressure should be
checked. Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter. When the ignition is first turned to on, the light will
illuminate for three seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light
does not turn on, have the system inspected by your authorized dealer.
For more information on this system, refer to Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
Hill descent (if equipped):
Displays when using the hill descent
mode. Refer to the Driving chapter
for transmission function and
operation.
Transmission Tow/Haul Feature
(if equipped): Displays when the
Tow/Haul feature has been
activated. Refer to the Driving
chapter for transmission function and operation. If the light flashes
steadily, have the system serviced immediately, damage to the
transmission could occur.
Instrument Cluster
18
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
AdvanceTrac威/Traction control
(if equipped): Displays when the
AdvanceTrac威/Traction control is
active. If the light remains on, have
the system serviced immediately,
refer to the Driving chapter for more information.
AdvanceTrac威/Traction control
off light (if equipped): Illuminates
when AdvanceTrac威/Traction control
has been disabled by the driver.
Refer to the Driving chapter for
more information.
4X2 (RTT) (if equipped):
Displays momentarily when
two-wheel drive high is selected. If
the light fails to display when the
ignition is turned on, or remains on,
have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer.
Four wheel drive low (RTT and
static) (if equipped): Displays
when four-wheel drive low is
engaged. If the light fails to display
when the ignition is turned on, or remains on, have the system serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
Four wheel drive high (RTT and
static) (if equipped): Displays
when four-wheel drive high is
engaged. If the light fails to display
when the ignition is turned on, or remains on, have the system serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
Electronic locking differential
(RTT and static) (if equipped):
Displays when using the electronic
locking differential.
OFF
4x2
4x4
LOW
4x4
HIGH
Instrument Cluster
19
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Speed control (if equipped): The
speed control system indicator light
changes color to indicate what mode
the system is in:
•On (amber light): Illuminates
when the speed control system is turned on. Turns off when the speed
control system is engaged or turned off.
•Engaged (green light): Illuminates when the speed control system is
engaged. Turns off when the speed control system is disengaged.
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high-beam headlamps are turned on.
Diesel warning lights: If your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine,
it has some unique warning lights; refer to Instrument Cluster in your
diesel supplement for detailed information on their function.
•Glow plug pre-heat
•Waterinfuel
•Diesel exhaust fluid
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver’s door is opened.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
Instrument Cluster
20
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
GAUGES
Base cluster with automatic transmission shown. Metric similar.
1. Engine oil pressure gauge: Indicates engine oil pressure. The
needle should stay in the normal operating range (between L and H). If
the needle falls below the normal range, stop the vehicle, turn off the
engine and check the engine oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil level is
correct, have your vehicle checked at your authorized dealer.
2. Engine coolant temperature gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating temperature, the needle will be in the
normal range (between H and C). If it enters the red section, the
engine is overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible,
switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
3. Transmission fluid temperature gauge: If the gauge is in the:
Normal area The transmission fluid is within the normal operating
temperature (between H and C).
123 4
6 5
Instrument Cluster
21
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Yellow area The transmission fluid is higher than normal operating
temperature. This can be caused by special operation conditions (i.e.
snowplowing, towing or off road use). Refer to Special operating
conditions in the scheduled maintenance information for instructions.
Operating the transmission for extended periods of time with the gauge
in the yellow area may cause internal transmission damage.
Altering the severity of the driving conditions is recommended to lower
the transmission temperature into the normal range.
Red area The transmission fluid is overheating. Stop the vehicle to allow
the temperature to return to normal range.
If the gauge is operating in the yellow or red area, stop the vehicle and
verify the airflow is not restricted such as snow or debris blocking airflow
through the grill. If the gauge continues to show high temperatures, see
your authorized dealer.
4. Fuel gauge: Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel
tank (when the ignition is in the on position). The fuel gauge may vary
slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade. The fuel icon and
arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
5. Speedometer: Indicates the current vehicle speed.
6. Tachometer: Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale
may damage the engine.
Odometer and trip odometer: The odometer is displayed on the lower
line in the message center and registers the total accumulated distance
the vehicle has traveled. For trip odometer, refer to Standard message
center or Optional message center in this chapter.
STANDARD MESSAGE CENTER
Your vehicle’s message center is capable of monitoring many vehicle
systems and will alert you to potential vehicle problems and various
conditions with an informational message followed by a long indicator
chime.
The message center display is located in the instrument cluster and the
controls are located on the steering wheel.
Instrument Cluster
22
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Selectable features
Info (information menu)
Press the INFO button repeatedly to
cycle through the following features:
TRIP A/B
Registers the distance of individual journeys. Press and release the INFO
button until the TRIP A/B appear in the display (this represents the trip
mode). Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds to reset.
Refer to UNITS later in this section to switch the display from metric to
English.
XXX° (outside air temperature) (if equipped)
This displays the outside temperature.
Refer to UNITS later in this section to switch the display from Metric to
English.
MYKEY MILES (km) (if programmed)
For more information, refer to MyKey威in the Locks and Security
chapter.
XXX MILES (km) TO E
This displays an estimate of approximately how far you can drive with
the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to
correctly detect the added fuel.
The low fuel indicator will illuminate when the fuel level is at
approximately 1/16 of the tank.
DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is based
on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value is not
the same as the average fuel economy display. The running average fuel
economy is re-initialized to a factory default value if the battery is
disconnected.
XX.X AVG MPG (L/100km)
Average fuel economy displays your average fuel economy in miles/gallon
or liters/100 km.
Instrument Cluster
23
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing distance traveled
by gallons of fuel used (liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled),
your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons:
•Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
•Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
•Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
•Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press the RESET button (press and hold RESET for
two seconds in order to reset the function) after setting the speed
control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
MPG (L/km)
This displays instantaneous fuel economy as a bar graph ranging from ↓
poor economy to ↑excellent economy.
Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy.
When your vehicle is not moving, this function shows ↓, one or no bars
illuminated. Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset.
TIMER
Timer displays the trip elapsed drive time.
To operate, do the following:
1. Press and release RESET in order to start the timer.
2. Press and release RESET to pause the timer.
3. Press and hold RESET until the timer resets.
TBC GAIN (if equipped)
Displays the level of trailer brake gain or if the trailer is not connected.
EXHAUST FILTER (diesel only)
Refer to Diesel exhaust system: oxidation catalyst/diesel particulate
filter system in your diesel supplement for more information.
Instrument Cluster
24
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
System check and vehicle feature customization
Press the SETUP button repeatedly
to cycle the message center through
the following features:
Note: Some items are optional and
will not appear.
Note: When returning to the
SETUP menu and a non-English
language has been selected, HOLD
RESET FOR ENGLISH will be displayed to change back to English. Press
and hold the RESET button to change back to English.
RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK
When this message appears, press the RESET button and the message
center will begin to cycle through the following systems and provide a
status of the item if needed.
1. OIL LIFE
2. EXHAUST FLUID LEVEL (Diesel only)
3. ENGINE HOURS
4. ENGINE IDLE HOURS
5. CHARGING SYSTEM
6. DOOR
7. BRAKE SYSTEM
8. TBC GAIN = XX.X (if equipped)
9. FUEL LEVEL
10. MYKEY DISTANCE (if MyKey威is programmed)
11. MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED
12. ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED
Note: Some systems show a message only if a condition is present.
OIL LIFE
This displays the remaining oil life.
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center and
according to the recommended maintenance schedule.
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change,
perform the following:
1. Press and release the SETUP button to display “OIL LIFE XXX%
HOLD RESET = NEW”.
Instrument Cluster
25
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
2. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds and release to reset
the oil life to 100%.
Note: To change oil life 100% value (if equipped with this feature) to
another value, proceed to Step 3.
3. Once “OIL LIFE SET TO XXX%” is displayed, release and press the
RESET button to change the oil life start value. Each release and press
will reduce the value by 10%.
UNITS
Displays the current units English or Metric.
Press the RESET button to change from English to Metric.
AUTOLAMP (SEC)
This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the
ignition is switched off.
Press the RESET control to select the new autolamp delay values of 0,
10, 20, 30, 60, 90, 120 or 180 seconds.
AUTOLOCK
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is
shifted into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion.
Press the RESET control to turn autolock on or off.
AUTOUNLOCK
This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver’s
door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off.
Press RESET to turn it off or on.
COURTESY WIPE
One extra wipe will occur a few seconds after washing the front window
to clear any excess washer fluid remaining on the windshield.
Press RESET to turn this feature on or off.
CREATE MYKEY / MYKEY SETUP/ CLEAR MYKEY
For more information refer to MyKey威in the Locks and Security chapter.
RESET FOR ZONE SETTING
This feature changes the compass zone setting.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four
degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the vehicle
crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this error.
Instrument Cluster
26
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Refer to Compass zone/calibration adjustment.
ZONE <XX> RESET = CHANGE
The compass heading is displayed as one of N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and
NW in the message center display.
Refer to Compass zone/calibration adjustment.
RESET FOR CALIBRATION
This feature calibrates the compass.
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy. Usually, when something affects the compass
readings, the compass will correct itself after a few days of operating
your vehicle in normal conditions. If the compass still appears to be
inaccurate, a manual calibration may be necessary.
Refer to Compass zone/calibration adjustment.
Compass zone/calibration adjustment
1. Determine your magnetic zone by
referring to the zone map.
2. Turn ignition to the on position.
3. Start the engine.
4. From the SETUP menu, press and release the RESET button until the
message center display changes to show the current zone setting ZONE
<XX> RESET = CHANGE.
5. Press and release the RESET button repeatedly until the correct zone
setting for your geographic location is displayed on the message center.
The range of zone values are from 1 to 15 and “wraps” back to 1.
6. To exit the zone setting mode, and to “lock in” your change:
•press and release the SETUP button or,
•press INFO button to exit or,
•wait four seconds and the zone will be “locked in”.
123
4
5
6 7 8 9 1011
12
13
14
15
Instrument Cluster
27
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures
and high voltage lines. For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical
accessories (heater/air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all
vehicle doors are shut.
7. Press the RESET button until the display reads RESET FOR
CALIBRATION to start the compass calibration function.
8. Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h]) until
the CIRCLE SLOWLY TO CALIBRATE display changes to CALIBRATION
COMPLETED. It will take up to five circles to complete calibration.
9. The compass is now calibrated.
Note: If the RESET button is pressed or three minutes has expired, the
display will go back to the INFO menu and will show CAL instead of the
compass heading until the compass is calibrated.
RESET FOR REMOTE START (if equipped)
Press RESET to enable remote start on or off and choose the remote
start duration time (5, 10, 15 minutes) and other options.
REAR PARK AID (if equipped)
This feature sounds a warning tone to warn the driver of obstacles near
the rear bumper, and functions only when R (Reverse) gear is selected.
Press RESET to turn this feature on or off. You can also choose to turn
this feature on/off when the vehicle is placed in reverse.
TBC MODE (if equipped)
Allows you to choose the trailer brake mode.
Press RESET to choose:
•ELECTRIC
•EOH (electric over hydraulic)
TRAILER SWAY (if equipped)
This feature uses the electronic stability control to mitigate trailer sway,
Press RESET to turn it off or on.
LANGUAGE = ENGLISH / SPANISH / FRENCH
Allows you to choose which language the message center will display in.
Selectable languages are English, Spanish, or French.
Waiting four seconds or pressing the RESET button cycles the message
center through each of the language choices.
Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds to set the language
choice.
Instrument Cluster
28
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
System warnings
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages.
Types of messages and warnings:
•Some messages will appear briefly to inform you of something you
may need to take action on or be informed of.
•Some messages will appear once and then again when the vehicle is
restarted.
•Some messages will reappear after clearing or being reset if a problem
or condition is still present and needs your attention.
•Some messages can be acknowledged and reset by pressing RESET.
This allows you to use the full message center functionality by clearing
the message.
PARK BRAKE ENGAGED — Displayed when the parking brake is
applied (or not fully released).
CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM — Displayed when a fault has been detected
by the ABS module.
CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM— Displayed when the electrical system
is not maintaining proper voltage. If you are operating electrical
accessories when the engine is idling at a low speed, turn off as many of
the electrical loads as soon as possible. If the warning stays on or comes
on when the engine is operating at normal speeds, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the driver’s door is not
completely closed.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the passenger’s door is
not completely closed.
REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the rear left door is not
completely closed.
REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the rear right door is
not completely closed.
CHECK FUEL CAP — Displayed when the fuel cap may not be
properly closed. Refer to What you should know about automotive
fuels in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Instrument Cluster
29
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
PARK BRAKE ENGAGED — Displayed when the parking brake is set,
the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph
(5 km/h). If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM — Displayed when a fault has been detected
by the ABS module.
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW — Indicates the brake fluid level is low
and the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Brake
fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
FUEL LEVEL LOW — Displayed as a reminder of a low fuel condition.
CHECK PARK AID (if equipped) — Displayed when the transmission
is in R (Reverse) and the reverse sensing system (park aid) is disabled.
Refer to Rear park aid in this section to enable.
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed when
a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For
more information on how the system operates under these conditions,
refer to Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. If the warning stays
on or continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
LOW TIRE PRESSURE (if equipped) — Displayed when one or more
tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. Refer to Inflating your
tires in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed
when the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE (if equipped) — Displayed when training
the TPMS. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter for more information.
TRAIN RIGHT FRONT TIRE (if equipped) — Displayed when
training the TPMS. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires, Wheels
and Loading chapter for more information.
TRAIN RIGHT REAR TIRE (if equipped) — Displayed when training
the TPMS. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter for more information.
TRAIN LEFT REAR TIRE (if equipped) — Displayed when training
the TPMS. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter for more information.
Instrument Cluster
30
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
TIRES NOT TRAINED – REPEAT (if equipped) — Displayed when
an error occurs while training the TPMS. Refer to TPMS reset procedure
in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for more information.
TRAINING COMPLETE (if equipped) — Displayed when training of
the TPMS is complete. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter for more information.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF (if equipped) — Displayed when the
traction control has been disabled by the driver. Refer to the Driving
chapter for more information.
INTKEY COULD NOT PROGRAM — Displayed when an attempt is
made to program a fifth integrated key to the remote keyless entry
system. For more information on integrated key, refer to the Locks and
Security chapter.
KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM — Displayed when an attempt is made
to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys. Refer to MyKey威in
the Locks and Security chapter for more information.
VEHICLE SPEED 80 MPH MAX — Displayed when a MyKey威is in
use and the Admin has enabled the MyKey speed limit and the vehicle
speed is 80 mph (130 km/h). Refer to MyKey威in the Locks and
Security chapter for more information.
SPEED LIMITED TO 80 MPH — Displayed when starting the vehicle
and MyKey威is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on. Refer to MyKey威
in the Locks and Security chapter for more information.
CHECK SPEED DRIVE SAFELY — Displayed when a MyKey威is in
use and the optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds a preselected
speed. Refer to MyKey威in the Locks and Security chapter for more
information.
VEHICLE NEAR TOP SPEED — Displayed when a MyKey威is in use
and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching
80 mph (130 km/h). Refer to MyKey威in the Locks and Security
chapter for more information.
TOP SPEED MYKEY SETTING — Displayed when a MyKey威is in use
and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is 80 mph
(130 km/h). Refer to MyKey威in the Locks and Security chapter for
more information.
BUCKLE UP TO UNMUTE AUDIO — Displayed when a MyKey威is in
use and Belt-Minder威is activated. Refer to MyKey威in the Locks and
Security chapter for more information.
Instrument Cluster
31
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
ADVTRAC ON MYKEY SETTING (if equipped) — Displayed when a
MyKey威is in use when trying to disable the ESC system and the
optional setting is on. Refer to MyKey威in the Locks and Security
chapter for more information.
SERVICE ADVANCETRAC (if equipped) — Displayed when the
AdvanceTrac威system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
TO STOP ALARM START VEHICLE (if equipped) — Displayed
when the perimeter alarm system is armed and the vehicle is entered
using the key on the driver’s side door. In order to prevent the perimeter
alarm system from triggering, the ignition must be turned to start or on
before the 12 second chime expires. See Perimeter alarm system in the
Locks and Security chapter.
SECURITY SYSTEM FAULT — Displayed when the security system
has detected a fault. See your authorized dealer for service.
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER (if equipped) — Displayed and
accompanied by a single chime if there are certain faults in the vehicle
wiring and trailer wiring/brake system. Refer to Trailer towing in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for more information.
TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed and
accompanied by a single chime in response to faults sensed by the TBC.
Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for
more information.
TRAILER CONNECTED (if equipped) — Displayed when a correct
trailer connection (a trailer with electric trailer brakes) is sensed during
a given ignition cycle. Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter for more information.
TRAILER BRAKE GAIN = XX.X (if equipped) — Displays the
current gain setting for the trailer brake. Refer to Trailer towing in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for more information.
TBC GAIN = XX.X NO TRAILER (if equipped) — Displays the
current gain setting for the trailer brake when a trailer is not connected.
Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for
more information.
TRAILER DISCONNECTED (if equipped) — Displayed and
accompanied by a single chime when a trailer connection becomes
disconnected, either intentionally or unintentionally, and has been sensed
during a given ignition cycle. Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter for more information.
Instrument Cluster
32
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED (if equipped) — Displayed when
the trailer sway control has detected trailer sway. For more information,
refer to the Driving chapter for more information.
CHECK PARK AID (if equipped) — Displayed when the transmission
is in R (Reverse) and the reverse sensing system (park aid) is disabled.
TRANSPORT MODE CONTACT DEALER (if equipped) —
Displayed when the vehicle is set to transport mode. The transport mode
is used to disable certain vehicle functions to prevent battery discharge
when the vehicle is in the transport/inventory phase and is not driven
long enough to maintain the battery’s charge. This mode can be disabled
by doing the following: Turn the ignition on, without starting the engine.
Press and release the brake pedal fully five times and press the hazard
button four times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds.
CHECK LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL (if equipped) — Displayed
when an electronic locking differential (ELD) system fault is present. For
more information, refer to Electronic locking differential (ELD) in the
Driving chapter.
ELD ENGAGED/DISENGAGED (if equipped) — Displayed when the
electronic locking differential is engaged. See Electronic locking
differential in the Driving chapter for more information.
ELD DISENGAGED (if equipped) — Displayed when the electronic
locking differential is disengaged. See Electronic locking differential in
the Driving chapter for more information.
TO ENGAGE ELD RELEASE PEDAL (if equipped) — Displayed
when the electronic locking differential requests this condition be met in
order to engage. See Electronic locking differential in the Driving
chapter for more information.
TO ENGAGE ELD SLOW TO XX MPH/KM/H (if equipped) —
Displayed when the electronic locking differential requests that a certain
speed be met in order to engage. See Electronic locking differential in
the Driving chapter for more information.
CHECK 4X4 (if equipped) — Displayed when a 4X4 system fault is
present. For more information, refer to Four-wheel drive (4WD)
operation in the Driving chapter.
4X4 SHIFT IN PROGRESS — Displayed when the 4X4 system is
making a shift. For further information, refer to Four-wheel drive
(4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
FOR 4X4 LOW SLOW TO 3 MPH (if equipped) — Displayed when
4X4 LOW is selected while the vehicle is moving. For more information,
refer to Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
Instrument Cluster
33
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
FOR 4X4 LOW APPLY BRAKE (if equipped) — Displayed when
trying to select 4X4 LOW. For more information, refer to Four-wheel
drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
FOR 4X4 LOW SHIFT TO N (if equipped) — Displayed when 4X4
LOW is selected and the vehicle is stopped. For more information, refer
to Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
TO EXIT 4X4 LOW SLOW TO 3 MPH (if equipped) — Displayed
when 2WD is selected while the vehicle is operating in 4X4 LOW. For
more information, refer to Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the
Driving chapter.
TO EXIT 4X4 LOW SHIFT TO N (if equipped) — Displayed when
2WD is selected while the vehicle has been stopped in 4X4 LOW. For
more information, refer to Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the
Driving chapter.
TO EXIT 4X4 LOW APPLY BRAKE (if equipped) — Displayed when
2WD is selected from 4X4 LOW mode. For more information, refer to
Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD (if equipped) — May display
when shifting to or from 4X4 LOW. For more information, refer to
Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL READY (if equipped) — Displayed
when the hill descent control switch is turned on.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed when
a hill descent system fault is present.
HILL CNTRL OFF SYSTEM COOLING (if equipped) — Displayed
when the hill descent system is cooling due to overuse.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL OFF (if equipped) — Displayed when
the hill descent system is deactivated.
FOR HILL CNTRL 20 MPH OR LESS (if equipped) — Displayed
when the vehicle speed requirement for hill control mode entry has not
been met.
DRIVER RESUME CONTROL (if equipped) — Displayed when the
hill control and off-road mode require the driver to resume control.
FOR HILL CNTRL SELECT GEAR (if equipped) — Displayed when
the driver is requested to select a transmission gear to enable operation
of the hill mode and off-road mode.
Instrument Cluster
34
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
ENGINE WARMING PLEASE WAIT XX (diesel engine only) —
Displayed in extremely cold weather, typically below –15°F (–26°C), if
the engine block heater is not utilized. The engine will not respond to
accelerator pedal movement for 30 seconds; this is done so the engine oil
can be properly circulated to avoid engine damage from lack of
lubrication. A timer will begin a countdown from 30 seconds. Once the
counter has reached 0 seconds, OK TO DRIVE will be displayed and the
engine will respond to accelerator pedal movement. Refer to your diesel
supplement for more information.
OK TO DRIVE (diesel engine only) — Displayed when the time
counter has reached 0 (zero) and the engine is sufficiently warm enough
to drive in extremely cold weather (refer to the engine warming please
wait message description mentioned previously). Refer to your diesel
supplement for more information.
WATER IN FUEL DRAIN FILTER (diesel engine only) — Displayed
when the water separator has reached a predetermined capacity and
needs to be drained. Refer to your diesel supplement for more
information.
ENGINE TURNS OFF IN XX (diesel engine only) — Displayed
when the vehicle is in the final 30 seconds of a countdown to where the
engine will intentionally be turned off by the PCM. The diesel engine
shutdown for extended idling is an optional feature. Refer to your diesel
supplement for more information.
ENGINE TURNED OFF (diesel engine only) — Displayed after the
30 second countdown. Refer to your diesel supplement for more information.
DRIVE TO CLEAN EXHAUST FILTER (diesel engine only) —
Displayed when the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) is full of particles
(exhaust soot) and the vehicle is not being operated in a manner to
allow normal cleaning. This message will stay on until the exhaust filter
cleaning has begun, at which time the CLEANING EXHAUST FILTER
message will be displayed. It is recommended the vehicle operator drive
the vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h) until the CLEANING EXHAUST
FILTER message turns off. This message is NORMAL. Refer to your
diesel supplement for more information.
Note: If this message is ignored, your vehicle will continue to fill the
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) with particles (exhaust soot). If cleaning
is not permitted, the light will illuminate and engine power may be
limited. If the vehicle is still not operated in a manner to allow cleaning,
the service engine soon light will illuminate and engine power will
be further limited. Dealer service will then be required to restore your
vehicle to full-power operation.
Instrument Cluster
35
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) regeneration will not initiate at idle
or in Power Take Off (PTO) mode. When DRIVE TO CLEAN EXHAUST
FILTER is displayed in the message center, PTO and/or Stationary
Elevated Idle Control (SEIC) must be disengaged/inactive in order to
properly clean the DPF. The vehicle must be driven until the CLEANING
EXHAUST FILTER message turns off.
CLEANING EXHAUST FILTER (diesel engine only) — Displayed when
the vehicle has entered the cleaning mode. Various engine actions will raise
the exhaust temperature in the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) system to
burn off the particles (exhaust soot). After the particles are burned off, the
exhaust temperature will fall back to normal levels. This message is
NORMAL. Refer to your diesel supplement for more information.
WARNING: When the CLEANING EXHAUST FILTER message
appears in the message center, do not park near flammable
materials, vapors or structures until filter cleaning is complete.
EXHAUST FILTER DRIVE COMPLETE (diesel engine only) —
Displayed when the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) has been adequately
cleaned after the DRIVE TO CLEAN EXHAUST FILTER followed by
CLEANING EXHAUST FILTER messages have been displayed. This message
is NORMAL. Refer to your diesel supplement for more information.
EXHAUST FILTER CLEANED (diesel engine only) — Displayed
when the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) has been adequately cleaned by
the manual regeneration process (OCR). Refer to your diesel supplement
for more information.
EXHAUST CLEAN STOPPED (diesel engine only) — Displayed when
the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) manual regeneration process (OCR) has
been stopped. Refer to your diesel supplement for more information.
STOP SAFELY NOW (diesel engine only) — Displayed and a chime
sounds when the vehicle exhaust system temperature exceeds intended
operating range. If this warning occurs, engine power is reduced and the
engine will shut down when the vehicle speed is below 3 mph (5 km/h).
Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and contact your
authorized dealer. Depending on the severity of the over-temperature
condition, the vehicle may not restart after cycling the ignition off. If the
vehicle restarts, there may be limited power. If the exhaust
over-temperature condition reoccurs, the message center will display
STOP SAFELY NOW, the chime will sound, and engine power will be
reduced again and shut down below 3 mph (5 km/h). Refer to your
diesel supplement for more information.
Instrument Cluster
36
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
REDUCED ENGINE POWER (diesel engine only) — Displayed
approximately two hours after the DRIVE TO CLEAN EXHAUST SYSTEM
message has displayed and the vehicle operator has not driven the vehicle
above 30 mph (48 km/h) for at least 20 minutes to clean the DPF. At this
point the vehicle must be serviced by an authorized dealer. This message is
normal. Refer to your diesel supplement for more information.
EXHAUST FLUID RANGE XXX MI (diesel engine only) — Displays
the distance you can travel before depleting the remaining diesel exhaust
fluid. Refer to your diesel supplement for more information.
SPEED LIMITED XXMPH IN XX MI EXHAUST FLUID EMPTY
(diesel engine only) — Displayed when the diesel exhaust fluid is
nearing empty. The vehicle’s top speed will become limited in the
displayed distance. The diesel exhaust fluid must be replenished to
resume normal operation of the vehicle. Refer to your diesel supplement
for more information.
XX MPH MAX UPON RESTART EXHAUST FLUID EMPTY (diesel
engine only) — Displayed when the remaining diesel exhaust fluid level
is depleted. Speed will be limited upon restart. The diesel exhaust fluid
must be replenished to resume normal operation of the vehicle. Refer to
your diesel supplement for more information.
SPEED LIMITED TO XX MPH EXHAUST FLUID EMPTY (diesel
engine only) — Displayed when the diesel exhaust fluid is empty. The
diesel exhaust fluid must be replenished to resume normal operation of
the vehicle. Refer to your diesel supplement for more information.
ENGINE IDLED SOON EXHAUST FLUID EMPTY (diesel engine
only) — Displayed when the SCR system detects low exhaust fluid. The
engine will eventually enter into an idle only mode. The diesel exhaust
fluid must be replenished to resume normal operation of the vehicle.
Refer to your diesel supplement for more information.
ENGINE IDLED SEE MANUAL (diesel engine only) — Displayed
when a problem exists with the SCR system. The vehicle will enter into
an idle-only mode. If the exhaust fluid is empty, it must be replenished
to resume normal operation of the vehicle. Refer to your diesel
supplement for more information.
SPEED LIMITED XXMPH IN XXXMI EXHAUST FLUID SYSTEM
FAULT (diesel engine only) — Displayed when the SCR system
detects a fault. The vehicle’s top speed will become limited in the
displayed distance and count down from this point. Refer to your diesel
supplement for more information. Contact your authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Instrument Cluster
37
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
XX MPH MAX UPON RESTART EXHAUST FLUID SYSTEM FAULT
(diesel engine only) — Displayed when the SCR system detects a
fault. The vehicle’s top speed will become limited upon restarting. Refer
to your diesel supplement for more information. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
SPEED LIMITED TO XX MPH EXHAUST FLUID SYSTEM FAULT
(diesel engine only) — Displayed when the SCR system detects a
fault. The vehicle’s top speed is limited. Refer to your diesel supplement
for more information. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ENGINE IDLED SOON EXHAUST FAULT SEE MANUAL (diesel
engine only) — Displayed when the SCR system detects a fault. The
engine will eventually enter into an idle-only mode. Refer to your diesel
supplement for more information. Contact your authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
ENGINE IDLED SEE MANUAL EXHAUST FLUID SYSTEM FAULT
(diesel engine only) — Displayed when the SCR system detects a
fault. The engine will enter into an idle only mode. Refer to your diesel
supplement for more information. Contact your authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
ENGINE OIL DILUTED (diesel engine only) — Displays once the
engine oil has become diluted and needs to be changed. Refer to your
diesel supplement for more information.
ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON — Displayed when the engine oil life
remaining is 5% to 1%. Refer to the scheduled maintenance
information for more information.
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — Displayed when the oil life left reaches
0%. Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for more
information.
LOW FUEL PRESSURE SEE MANUAL (diesel engine only) —If
this message appears during a cold start or during cold operation 32°F
(0°C) up to 10 minutes after the initial cold start; monitor the message
center and if it disappears and does not re-appear after the engine has
fully warmed up, the low fuel pressure message is most likely caused by
waxed or gelled fuel. To prevent this, use an anti-gel additive. Refer to
your diesel supplement for more information. The customer warranty
may be void from using additives that do not meet or exceed Ford
specifications. If the low fuel pressure message persistently appears after
re-fueling during the cold start and cold operation conditions defined
previously and then disappear when the engine has fully warmed up,
consider different fuel sources.
Instrument Cluster
38
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•Low Fuel Operation: If the message appears when the vehicle is warm
and during low fuel tank level operation, i.e. the tank level is at or
very near empty, refuel the vehicle and operate the vehicle. If the
message reappears after fueling, see below. If the message does not
come back, the low fuel pressure condition was due to low fuel levels
in the fuel tank.
•Normal Operation: If the message appears during normal operation
when the vehicle / engine is fully warm, and fuel level is not low, the
fuel filters must be changed regardless of the maintenance schedule
interval. If replacement of the fuel filter does not remedy the low fuel
pressure message during normal operation as defined above, please
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer.
OPTIONAL MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle’s message center is capable of monitoring many vehicle
systems and will alert you to potential vehicle problems and various
conditions with a informational messages and/or warnings.
The message center is also used to program/configure the different
features of your vehicle.
The message center display is located in the instrument cluster. Use the
steering wheel mounted buttons to navigate through the message center.
Press the up/down buttons to move
up/down through the message
center choices.
Press the left/right buttons to move
left/right through the message
center choices.
OK
OK
Instrument Cluster
39
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Press the OK button to select
highlighted options and confirm
choices/messages.
Main menu
From the main menu screen you can choose the following:
•Gauge Mode
•Trip A/B
•Fuel Economy
•Truck Apps (if equipped)
•Settings
•Information
Scroll up/down to highlight one of the options, then press the right arrow
key or OK to enter into that menu option.
Gauge Mode
In this mode, the following options are available in different graphical
formats:
•Engine Oil Temperature (diesel only)
•Transmission Temperature
•Compass (see Compass following for compass options)
•Exhaust Filter (diesel only). Refer to Diesel exhaust system:
oxidation catalyst/diesel particulate filter system in your diesel
supplement for more information.
•Blank
Compass: The compass orientation can be changed between fixed north
or rotating north. To change the modes, press OK when the compass
display is shown. Use the right arrow to choose the mode. Press and
hold OK to set the mode.
OK
Instrument Cluster
40
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Trip A/B
In this mode, Trip A or B registers the following:
•Trip Time — shows the elapsed trip time. This timer will stop when
the vehicle is turned off and will restart when the vehicle is restarted.
•Trip Distance — shows the accumulated trip distance.
•Fuel Used — shows the amount of fuel used for a given trip.
•Average MPG (L/100km) — shows the average distance traveled per
unit of fuel used for a given trip.
•Odometer — shows the vehicle’s total accumulated distance. This
value cannot be reset.
Press the right arrow key to reach Trip B. Press the left arrow to go back
to Trip A.
Press OK to pause the Trip A or B screen/press again to un-pause.
Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed trip information.
Fuel Economy
In this mode, fuel economy information is displayed as follows:
•Instant MPG (L/100km) — shows instantaneous fuel usage.
•Miles (kilometers) to empty — shows the approximate distance the
vehicle can travel before running out of fuel.
•Average MPG (L/100km) — shows the average fuel usage based on
time. See Fuel Hist. following to change the time interval. Press and
hold OK to reset this value.
If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing miles traveled by
gallons of fuel used (liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled), your
figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons:
•Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up.
•Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations.
•Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another.
•Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter).
To determine your average highway fuel economy, do the following:
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
Instrument Cluster
41
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
It is important to press RESET in order to reset the function after
setting the speed control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
For more information refer to Essentials of good fuel economy in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Fuel Hist.: Press the right arrow key (when in the Fuel Econ. menu) to
reach Fuel Hist. Fuel history shows fuel usage (AVG MPG or L/100km) as a
bar graph based on time. The duration time can be changed as follows:
Duration– Press the right arrow key (when in the Fuel Hist. menu) to
reach the following duration choices.
•5 Minutes
•10 Minutes
•30 Minutes
•Last 5 Resets
Use the up/down arrows keys to highlight one of the choices; press and
hold OK to set your choice.
The graph is updated each minute with the fuel economy that was
achieved during the prior 5, 10, 30 minutes or last 5 resets of driving.
Truck Apps (if equipped)
In this mode, off-road and trailer towing application options are available.
Off Road*
Pitch and bank angle (in degrees). Displays the pitch angle (front to
rear) and bank angle (side to side) of the road surface.
Steering angle (in degrees). Displays the steering angle of the front
wheels after the vehicle has been driven for a period of time.
Differential lock/unlock. Displays the state (locked or unlocked) of the
electronic locking differential.
Energy flow. Displays the operating mode of the transfer case: 4X2,
4X4 Low or 4X4 High.
* If equipped—your vehicle may be equipped with some or all of these
options.
When “Press OK for info” is displayed, pressing OK will give you
information on the following options if equipped (Note: Information is
only available when traveling less than 3 mph [5 km/h]):
•ELD (electronic locking differential)
•Hill Descent Control
Instrument Cluster
42
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•4X4 System
•Traction Control
•Advancetrac + RSC
Trailer: Press the right arrow key (when in the Off Road menu) to
reach the Trailer menu (vehicle must be equipped with factory installed
trailer brake controller). The following information is displayed:
•Active trailer name or default trailer.
•Accumulated trailer distance.
•Trailer gain and output.
•Trailer disconnected
When “Press OK for options” is displayed, pressing OK will open the
trailer options menus:
Trailer*
Change Active
Trailer
When this is highlighted, press the right arrow key
to change the currently selected trailer. Use the up
and down arrows to select a trailer and press the
OK button to choose the highlighted trailer.
Adding a new trailer– Use the up/down arrows to
highlight “New Trailer” from the Change Active
Trailer menu and press the right arrow key to enter
the New Trailer input screen. Use the up/down
arrow keys to choose alpha, numeric and symbol
characters and then press the right arrow to move
the character space over. Continue adding
characters as needed. Press the left arrow to go
back and change a previously selected character.
When finished with the new trailer name, press OK
to accept the new trailer name.
Connection
Checklist (if
equipped)
Press the right arrow button when this is highlighted
to show the trailer connection types: Conventional,
Fifth Wheel and Gooseneck. Use the up/down
arrows to highlight one of these choices and press
OK to display the connection checklist. Follow the
on-screen instructions to go through the connections
list.
Instrument Cluster
43
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Trailer*
Delete Trailer Press the right arrow button when this is highlighted
to show currently stored trailers. Use the up/down
arrows to highlight the trailer you want to delete
and press OK to delete. Follow the on-screen
prompts to exit or confirm delete.
Information
Screen
Press the right arrow button when this is highlighted
to display information on the following vehicle
features: Tow Haul mode, Trailer Brake Controller.
Rename Trailer Press the right arrow button when this is highlighted
to display saved or default trailers. Use the up/down
buttons to highlight a trailer and press OK to select
it. Use the up/down arrow buttons to change the
characters as needed. When done, press OK to
accept the change.
Reset Trailer
Mileage /
Kilometers (if
equipped)
Press the right arrow button when this is highlighted
to display accumulated distance on a given trailer
within the list of trailer(s). Use the up/down buttons
to select a trailer, then press and hold OK to reset
the trailer mileage (kilometers).
* If equipped—your vehicle may be equipped with some or all of these
options.
Settings
In this mode, you can configure different driver setting choices. Press
the right arrow key (when in the Settings menu) to reach the Driver
Assist menu:
Driver Assist*
Rear Park Aid On/Off
Rear View
Camera
Camera Delay
Trailer Brake
Mode
Electric or Elect. Over Hydraulic
Trailer Sway
Control
On/Off
Instrument Cluster
44
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
* If equipped—your vehicle may be equipped with some or all of these
options.
Vehicle*
Autolamp Delay Off or XXX seconds
Compass Zone Setting (1–15) See the diagram below to
determine your magnetic zone.
Determine which magnetic zone you
are in for your geographic location
by referring to the zone map.
Vehicle* (cont’d)
Compass
(cont’d)
Calibration (When choosing Calibration, follow the
on-screen directions to calibrate the compass)
Easy Entry/Exit On/Off
DTE Calculation
(distance to
empty)
Normal History Used
Towing History Used
Locks Autolock, On/Off
Autounlock On/Off
Unlocking One Stage or Two Stage
Maintenance Coolant (if
equipped)
Hold OK if coolant maintenance
performed
Fuel Filter
(diesel only)
Hold OK if Fuel Filter Changed
123
4
5
6 7 8 9 1011
12
13
14
15
Instrument Cluster
45
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle* (cont’d)
Menu Control
Standard: with standard set, pressing the up/down
arrows from a lower level menu will escape to the
main menu.
Memory On: with memory on set, pressing the
up/down arrows will navigate to the previous lower
level menu.
Oil Life Reset (if
equipped) Set to XXX% (Press and hold OK to set).
Remote Start Duration 5, 10 or 15 minutes
System Enable/Disable
Wiper Control On/Off
* If equipped—your vehicle may be equipped with some or all of these
options.
MyKey
Create MyKey Hold OK to create MyKey
*AdvanceTrac Always on or Selectable
*MAX Speed 80 MPH (120 km/h) or Off
*Speed Warning 45, 55 or 65 MPH (75, 90 or 105 km/h), Off
*Volume Limiter On/Off
*Clear MyKeys Hold OK to Clear MyKeys
*Only displays if MyKey is programmed.
Language
English, Español, Français
Units
Units English or Metric
System Reset
Hold OK to Reset System to Factory Default
Instrument Cluster
46
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Information
In this mode, you can view different vehicle system information and
perform a system check.
When “Press OK for info” is displayed, pressing OK will give you
information on the currently selected/displayed options. Information is
only available when traveling less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
MyKey
Admin Keys (Number of admin keys)
MyKeys (Number of MyKeys programmed)
MyKey Miles (km) (Distance traveled using a programmed MyKey)
System Check*
Oil Life
Engine Hours
Engine Idle Hours
Doors
Exhaust Fluid Level (diesel only)
Brakes
Trailer Brake
Ctrl.
Gain and Output (when trailer is connected)
No trailer (when no trailer is connected)
Trailer Sway
Park Aid Check Rear Park Aid
Fuel Level (distance to empty)
* If equipped—your vehicle may be equipped with some or all of these
options.
Some items will only display during a system check if a problem has
been detected. If an issue exists on one of the monitored systems, the
message center will display the number of warnings that need immediate
attention in red and the number of informational warnings will be listed
in amber. Use the up/down arrow buttons to scroll through the list; press
the right arrow button to display specific information on the highlighted
warning.
Instrument Cluster
47
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Compass/transmission indicator displays
The compass heading will display in the upper right corner of the message
center; the transmission gear indicator displays in the right side of the
message center when using the SelectShift Automatic™ transmission
feature. These displays will not be shown in all screen modes. For example:
when programming certain vehicle features or in certain information menus.
System warnings and status messages
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will cycle
the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages.
Types of messages and warnings:
•Some messages will appear briefly to inform you of something you
may need to take action on or be informed of.
•Some messages will appear once and then again when the vehicle is
restarted.
•Some messages will reappear after clearing or being reset if a problem
or condition is still present and needs your attention.
•Some messages can be acknowledged and reset by pressing OK. This
allows you to use the full message center functionality by clearing the
message.
DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the door is not completely closed.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the driver door is not
completely closed.
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the rear left door is not
completely closed.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the passenger door is
not completely closed.
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the rear right door is
not completely closed.
CHECK FUEL CAP — Displayed when the fuel cap may not be
properly closed. Refer to What you should know about automotive
fuels in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
FUEL LEVEL LOW — Displayed as a reminder of a low fuel condition.
Instrument Cluster
48
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW — Indicates the brake fluid level is low
and the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Brake
fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM — Displayed when the brake system needs
servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
PARK BRAKE ENGAGED — Displayed when the parking brake is set,
the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph
(5 km/h). If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ADVANCETRAC OFF (if equipped) — Displayed when the
AdvanceTrac威system has been disabled by the driver.
SERVICE ADVANCETRAC (if equipped) — Displayed when the
AdvanceTrac威system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
TRANSPORT MODE CONTACT DEALER (if equipped) —
Displayed when the vehicle is set to transport mode. The transport mode
is used to disable certain vehicle functions to prevent battery discharge
when the vehicle is in the transport/inventory phase and is not driven
long enough to maintain the battery’s charge. This mode can be disabled
by doing the following: Turn the ignition on, without starting the engine.
Press and release the brake pedal fully five times and press the hazard
button four times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds.
CHECK COOLANT ADDITIVE (diesel engine only) — Displayed
when the coolant additive needs to be checked. Refer to your diesel
supplement for more information.
POWER REDUCED TO LOWER ENGINE TEMP — Displayed when
the engine temperature gauge needle moves to H. You may notice
reduced engine power. Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance
and Specifications chapter for more information.
CLEANING EXHAUST FILTER (diesel engine only) — Displayed when
the vehicle has entered the cleaning mode. Various engine actions will raise
the exhaust temperature in the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) system to
burn off the particles (exhaust soot). After the particles are burned off, the
exhaust temperature will fall back to normal levels. This message is
NORMAL. Refer to your diesel supplement for more information.
WARNING: When the CLEANING EXHAUST FILTER message
appears in the message center, do not park near flammable
materials, vapors or structures until filter cleaning is complete.
Instrument Cluster
49
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
DRIVE TO CLEAN EXHAUST SYSTEM (diesel engine only) —
Displayed when the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) is full of particles
(exhaust soot) and the vehicle is not being operated in a manner to
allow normal cleaning. This message will stay on until the exhaust filter
cleaning has begun, at which time the CLEANING EXHAUST FILTER
message will be displayed. It is recommended the vehicle operator drive
the vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h) until the CLEANING EXHAUST
FILTER message turns off. This message is NORMAL. Refer to your
diesel supplement for more information.
Note: If this message is ignored, your vehicle will continue to fill the
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) with particles (exhaust soot). If cleaning
is not permitted, the light will illuminate and engine power may be
limited. If the vehicle is still not operated in a manner to allow cleaning,
the service engine soon light will illuminate and engine power will
be further limited. Dealer service will then be required to restore your
vehicle to full-power operation.
STOP SAFELY NOW (diesel engine only) — Displayed and a chime
sounds when the vehicle exhaust system temperature exceeds intended
operating range. If this warning occurs, engine power is reduced and the
engine will shut down when the vehicle speed is below 3 mph (5 km/h).
Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and contact your
authorized dealer. Depending on the severity of the over-temperature
condition, the vehicle may not restart after cycling the ignition off. If the
vehicle restarts, there may be limited power. If the exhaust
over-temperature condition reoccurs, the message center will display
STOP SAFELY NOW, the chime will sound, and engine power will be
reduced again and shut down below 3 mph (5 km/h). Refer to your
diesel supplement for more information.
ENGINE OIL DILUTED (diesel engine only) — Displays once the
engine oil has become diluted and needs to be changed. Refer to your
diesel supplement for more information.
ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON — Displayed when the engine oil life
remaining is 5% to 1%.
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0%.
ENGINE TURNS OFF IN 1 SECOND (diesel engine only) —
Displayed when the vehicle is in the final second of a countdown to
where the engine will intentionally be turned off by the PCM. The diesel
engine shutdown is a (regulatory) requirement which may be required of
a particular diesel vehicle for sale in states requiring this feature. Refer
to your diesel supplement for more information.
Instrument Cluster
50
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
ENGINE TURNS OFF IN XX SECONDS (diesel engine only) —
Displayed when the vehicle is in the final 30 seconds of a countdown to
where the engine will intentionally be turned off by the PCM. The diesel
engine shutdown for extended idling is an optional feature. Refer to your
diesel supplement for more information.
ENGINE TURNED OFF (diesel engine only) — Displayed after the
30 second countdown. Refer to your diesel supplement for more
information.
ENGINE WARMING PLEASE WAIT (diesel engine only) —
Displayed in extremely cold weather, typically below –15°F (–26°C), if
the engine block heater is not utilized. The engine will not respond to
accelerator pedal movement for 30 seconds; this is done so the engine oil
can be properly circulated to avoid engine damage from lack of
lubrication. A timer will begin a countdown from 30 seconds. Once the
counter has reached 0 seconds, OK TO DRIVE will be displayed and the
engine will respond to accelerator pedal movement. Refer to your diesel
supplement for more information.
EXHAUST FILTER DRIVE COMPLETE (diesel engine only) —
Displayed when the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) has been adequately
cleaned after the DRIVE TO CLEAN EXHAUST FILTER followed by
CLEANING EXHAUST FILTER messages have been displayed. This
message is NORMAL. Refer to your diesel supplement for more
information.
EXHAUST FILTER CLEANED (diesel engine only) — Displayed
when the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) has been adequately cleaned by
the manual regeneration process (OCR). Refer to your diesel supplement
for more information.
EXHAUST CLEAN STOPPED (diesel engine only) — Displayed
when the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) manual regeneration process
(OCR) has been stopped. Refer to your diesel supplement for more
information.
EXHAUST FLUID RANGE XXX MI (diesel engine only) — Displays
the distance you can travel before depleting the remaining diesel exhaust
fluid. Refer to your diesel supplement for more information.
IN XX MILES, SPEED LIMITED TO XX MPH EXHAUST FLUID
EMPTY (diesel engine only) — Displayed when the diesel exhaust
fluid is nearing empty. The vehicle’s top speed will become limited in the
displayed distance. The diesel exhaust fluid must be replenished to
resume normal operation of the vehicle. Refer to your diesel supplement
for more information.
Instrument Cluster
51
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
SPEED LIMITED TO XX MPH UPON RESTART EXHAUST FLUID
EMPTY (diesel engine only) — Displayed when the remaining diesel
exhaust fluid level is depleted. Speed will be limited upon restart. The
diesel exhaust fluid must be replenished to resume normal operation of
the vehicle. Refer to your diesel supplement for more information.
SPEED LIMITED TO XX MPH EXHAUST FLUID EMPTY (diesel
engine only) — Displayed when the diesel exhaust fluid is empty. The
diesel exhaust fluid must be replenished to resume normal operation of
the vehicle. Refer to your diesel supplement for more information.
ENGINE IDLED SOON EXHAUST FLUID EMPTY (diesel engine
only) — Displayed when the SCR system detects low exhaust fluid. The
engine will eventually enter into an idle only mode. The diesel exhaust
fluid must be replenished to resume normal operation of the vehicle.
Refer to your diesel supplement for more information.
ENGINE IDLED - SEE OWNER’S MANUAL EXHAUST FLUID
EMPTY (diesel engine only) — Displayed when a problem exists with
the SCR system. The vehicle will enter into an idle-only mode. If the
exhaust fluid is empty, it must be replenished to resume normal
operation of the vehicle. Refer to your diesel supplement for more
information.
IN XX MILES, SPEED LIMITED TO 50 MPH EXHAUST FLUID
SYSTEM FAULT (diesel engine only) — Displayed when the SCR
system detects a fault. The vehicle’s top speed will become limited in the
displayed distance starting at 50 miles (80 km) and count down from
this point. Refer to your diesel supplement for more information. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
SPEED LIMITED TO 50 MPH UPON RESTART EXHAUST FLUID
SYSTEM FAULT (diesel engine only) — Displayed when the SCR
system detects a fault. The vehicle’s top speed will become limited upon
restarting. Refer to your diesel supplement for more information. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
SPEED LIMITED TO 50 MPH EXHAUST FLUID SYSTEM FAULT
(diesel engine only) — Displayed when the SCR system detects a
fault. The vehicle’s top speed is limited. Refer to your diesel supplement
for more information. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ENGINE IDLED SOON EXHAUST FLUID SYSTEM FAULT SEE
MANUAL (diesel engine only) — Displayed when the SCR system
detects a fault. The engine will enter into an idle only mode. Refer to
your diesel supplement for more information. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Instrument Cluster
52
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
ENGINE IDLED - SEE OWNER’S MANUAL EXHAUST FLUID
SYSTEM FAULT (diesel engine only) — Displayed when the SCR
system detects a fault. The engine will eventually enter into an idle-only
mode. Press OK to override the idle mode. Refer to your diesel
supplement for more information. Contact your authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
FUEL FILTER CHANGE REQUIRED (diesel engine only) —
Displayed when a fuel filter change is required. Refer to the scheduled
maintenance information.
LOW FUEL PRESSURE (diesel engine only) — If this message
appears during a cold start or during cold operation 32°F (0°C) up to
10 minutes after the initial cold start; monitor the message center and if
it disappears and does not re-appear after the engine has fully warmed
up, the low fuel pressure message is most likely caused by waxed or
gelled fuel. To prevent this, use an anti-gel additive. Refer to your diesel
supplement for more information. The customer warranty may be void
from using additives that do not meet or exceed Ford specifications. If
the low fuel pressure message persistently appears after re-fueling during
the cold start and cold operation conditions defined previously and then
disappear when the engine has fully warmed up, consider different fuel
sources.
•Low Fuel Operation: If the message appears when the vehicle is warm
and during low fuel tank level operation, i.e. the tank level is at or
very near empty, refuel the vehicle and operate the vehicle. If the
message reappears after fueling, see below. If the message does not
come back, the low fuel pressure condition was due to low fuel levels
in the fuel tank.
•Normal Operation: If the message appears during normal operation
when the vehicle / engine is fully warm, and fuel level is not low, the
fuel filters must be changed regardless of the maintenance schedule
interval. If replacement of the fuel filter does not remedy the low fuel
pressure message during normal operation as defined above, please
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer.
REDUCED ENGINE POWER (diesel engine only) — Displayed
approximately two hours after the DRIVE TO CLEAN EXHAUST
SYSTEM message has displayed and the vehicle operator has not driven
the vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h) for at least 20 minutes to clean the
DPF. At this point the vehicle must be serviced by an authorized dealer.
This message is normal. Refer to your diesel supplement for more
information.
Instrument Cluster
53
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WATER IN FUEL DRAIN FILTER SEE MANUAL (if equipped) —
Displayed when the water separator has reached a predetermined
capacity and needs to be drained. Refer to your diesel supplement for
more information.
LOW TIRE PRESSURE — Displayed when one or more tires on your
vehicle have low tire pressure. Refer to Inflating Your Tires in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT — Displayed when the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, have the system inspected by your authorized
dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT — Displayed when a tire pressure
sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more
information on how the system operates under these conditions, refer to
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
TIRES NOT TRAINED - REPEAT — Displayed when an error occurs
while training the TPMS. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter for more information.
TRAIN INNER LEFT REAR TIRE — Displayed when training the
TPMS. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter for more information.
TRAIN INNER RIGHT REAR TIRE — Displayed when training the
TPMS. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter for more information.
TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE — Displayed when training the TPMS
system. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter for more information.
TRAIN LEFT REAR TIRE — Displayed when training the TPMS
system. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter for more information.
TRAIN RIGHT FRONT TIRE — Displayed when training the TPMS
system. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter for more information.
TRAIN RIGHT REAR TIRE — Displayed when training the TPMS
system. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter for more information.
Instrument Cluster
54
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
TRAIN SPARE TIRE (if equipped) — Displayed when training the
TPMS. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter for more information.
TRAINING COMPLETE — Displayed when training of the TPMS
system is complete. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires, Wheels
and Loading chapter for more information.
POWER STEERING ASSIST FAULT — The power steering system
has disabled power steering assist due to a system error; service is
required.
SERVICE POWER STEERING — The power steering system has
detected a condition that requires service.
SERVICE POWER STEERING NOW — The power steering system
has detected a condition that requires service immediately.
BUCKLE UP TO UNMUTE AUDIO — Displayed when a MyKey威is in
use and Belt-Minder威is activated. Refer to MyKey威in the Locks and
Security chapter for more information.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF (if equipped) — Displayed when the
traction control has been disabled by the driver. Refer to the Driving
chapter for more information.
CHECK 4X4 (if equipped) — Displayed when a 4X4 system fault is
present. For more information, refer to Four-wheel drive (4WD)
operation in the Driving chapter.
4X4 SHIFT IN PROGRESS (if equipped) — Displayed when the 4X4
system is making a shift. For further information, refer to Four-wheel
drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
FOR 4X4 LOW APPLY BRAKE (if equipped) — Displayed when
trying to select 4X4 LOW. For more information, refer to Four-wheel
drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
FOR 4X4 LOW SHIFT TO N (if equipped) — Displayed when 4X4
LOW is selected and the vehicle is stopped. For more information, refer
to Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
FOR 4X4 LOW SLOW TO 3 MPH (if equipped) — Displayed when
4X4 LOW is selected while the vehicle is moving. For more information,
refer to Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
TO EXIT 4X4 LOW APPLY BRAKE (if equipped) — Displayed when
2WD is selected from 4X4 LOW mode. For more information, refer to
Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
Instrument Cluster
55
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
TO EXIT 4X4 LOW SHIFT TO N (if equipped) — Displayed when
2WD is selected while the vehicle has been stopped in 4X4 LOW. For
more information, refer to Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the
Driving chapter.
TO EXIT 4X4 LOW SLOW TO 3 MPH (if equipped) — Displayed
when 2WD is selected while the vehicle is operating in 4X4 LOW. For
more information, refer to Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the
Driving chapter.
TO ENGAGE LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL RELEASE
ACCELERATOR PEDAL (if equipped) — Displayed when the
electronic locking differential requests that the accelerator pedal be
released in order to engage. See Electronic locking differential in the
Driving chapter for more information.
TO ENGAGE LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL SLOW TO XX MPH/KM/H
(if equipped) — Displayed when the electronic locking differential
requests that a certain speed be met in order to engage. See Electronic
locking differential in the Driving chapter for more information.
LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL ENGAGED/DISENGAGED (if
equipped) — Displayed when the electronic locking differential is
engaged. See Electronic locking differential in the Driving chapter for
more information.
LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL DISENGAGED (if equipped) —
Displayed when the electronic locking differential is disengaged. See
Electronic locking differential in the Driving chapter for more
information.
FOR HILL DESCENT REDUCE SPEED (if equipped) — Displayed
when the vehicle speed requirement for off-road mode entry has not
been met.
FOR HILL DESCENT SELECT GEAR (if equipped) — Displayed
when the driver is able to select a transmission gear for hill descent
mode.
HILL DESCENT - DRIVER RESUME CONTROL (if equipped) —
Displayed when hill descent control mode is deactivated and the driver
must resume control.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed when
a hill descent system fault is present.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL OFF (if equipped) — Displayed when
hill descent control mode becomes inactive.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL OFF SYSTEM COOLING (if equipped)
— Displayed when the hill descent system is cooling due to overuse.
Instrument Cluster
56
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
HILL DESCENT CONTROL READY (if equipped) — Displayed
when the hill descent control switch is turned on.
REDUCE ACCELERATOR TO PREVENT WHEEL SLIP (if
equipped) — Displayed when the vehicle senses that torque to the
drive wheels has overcome the available traction.
SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD (if equipped) — May display
when shifting to or from 4X4 LOW. For more information, refer to
Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
SLOW VEHICLE TO XX KM/H FOR ELD (if equipped) — Displayed
when the vehicle speed requirement for the electronic locking
differential mode has not been met.
SLOW VEHICLE TO XX MPH FOR ELD (if equipped) — Displayed
when the vehicle speed requirement for the electronic locking
differential mode has not been met.
CHECK LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL (if equipped) — Displayed
when an electronic locking differential (ELD) system fault is present. For
more information, refer to Electronic locking differential (ELD) in the
Driving chapter.
CHECK SPEED DRIVE SAFELY — Displayed when a MyKey威is in
use and the optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds a preselected
speed. Refer to MyKey威in the Locks and Security chapter for more
information.
COULD NOT PROGRAM INTEGRATED KEY — Displayed when an
attempt is made to program a fifth integrated key to the remote keyless
entry system. For more information on integrated key, refer to the Locks
and Security chapter.
ESC ALWAYS ON - MYKEY SETTING — Displayed when a MyKey威is
in use and the ESC cannot be deactivated. Refer to MyKey威in the Locks
and Security chapter for more information.
MYKEY ACTIVE DRIVE SAFELY — Displayed when a MyKey威is in
use. Refer to MyKey威in the Locks and Security chapter for more
information.
MYKEY COULD NOT PROGRAM — Displayed when an attempt is
made to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys. Refer to
MyKey威in the Locks and Security chapter for more information.
SECURITY SYSTEM FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed when the
security system has detected a fault. See your authorized dealer for
service.
Instrument Cluster
57
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
SPEED LIMITED TO 130 KM/H — Displayed when starting the
vehicle and MyKey威is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on. Refer to
MyKey威in the Locks and Security chapter for more information.
SPEED LIMITED TO 80 MPH — Displayed when starting the vehicle
and MyKey威is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on. Refer to MyKey威
in the Locks and Security chapter for more information.
VEHICLE AT TOP SPEED - MYKEY SETTING — Displayed when a
MyKey威is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed
is 80 mph (130 km/h). Refer to MyKey威in the Locks and Security
chapter for more information.
VEHICLE NEAR TOP SPEED — Displayed when a MyKey威is in use
and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching
80 mph (130 km/h). Refer to MyKey威in the Locks and Security
chapter for more information.
CHECK REAR PARK AID (if equipped) — Displayed when the
transmission is in R (Reverse) and the park aid is disabled.
REAR PARK AID OFF (if equipped) — Displayed when the rear park
aid is disabled by the driver.
REAR PARK AID ON (if equipped) — Displayed when the rear park
aid is enabled.
TO STOP ALARM, START VEHICLE (if equipped) — Displayed
when the perimeter alarm system is armed and the vehicle is entered
using the key on the driver’s side door. In order to prevent the perimeter
alarm system from triggering, the ignition must be turned to start or on
before the 12 second chime expires. See Perimeter alarm system in the
Locks and security chapter.
TRAILER BRAKE GAIN: XX.X [OUTPUT] (if equipped) — Displays
the current gain setting for the trailer brake. Refer to Trailer towing in
the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for more information.
TRAILER BRAKE GAIN: XX.X NO TRAILER (if equipped) —
Displays the current gain setting for the trailer brake when a trailer is
not connected. Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter for more information.
TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed and
accompanied by a single chime, in response to faults sensed by the TBC.
Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for
more information.
Instrument Cluster
58
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
TRAILER CONNECTED (if equipped) — Displayed when a correct
trailer connection (a trailer with electric trailer brakes) is sensed during
a given ignition cycle. Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter for more information.
TRAILER DISCONNECTED (if equipped) — Displayed when a
trailer connection becomes disconnected, either intentionally or
unintentionally, and has been sensed during a given ignition cycle. Refer
to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for more
information.
TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED (if equipped) — Displayed when
the trailer sway control has detected trailer sway. For more information,
refer to the Driving chapter for more information.
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER (if equipped) — Displayed if there
are certain faults in the vehicle wiring and trailer wiring/brake system.
Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for
more information.
Instrument Cluster
59
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
AUDIO SYSTEMS
AM/FM stereo system (if equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may
take their focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state
and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
The AM/FM stereo system does not contain rear speakers; only front
driver side and passenger side speakers.
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay. With
this feature, the window switches and radio may be used for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front door is
opened.
2
4
6
CLK
AUDIO
5
1
7
3
Entertainment Systems
60
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
1. /(Tuner): Press to
manually go up or down the radio
frequency. Press and hold for a fast
advance through radio frequencies.
Also use in AUDIO mode to gain
access to various settings.
2. AUDIO: Press AUDIO repeatedly
to access the following settings:
•TREB (Treble): Press AUDIO to reach the treble setting.
Use / / SEEK .
•BASS (Bass): Press AUDIO to reach the bass setting.
Use / / SEEK
•BAL (Balance): Press AUDIO to reach the balance setting.
Use / / SEEK to adjust between the left and right
speakers.
•Setting the clock: Press and hold CLK until the hours start to flash,
then use / / SEEK to adjust. To adjust minutes, press
CLK again to make the minutes start to flash and use / /
SEEK to adjust. Press CLK again to exit the clock setting mode.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, refer to
Setting the clock in your Navigation supplement.
3. SEEK: Press SEEK to
access the previous/next strong
station.
4. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM1/FM2; tune to a station,
press and hold a preset button until sound returns. You may store up to
six stations in each frequency band for a total of 18.
5. AM/FM: Press AM/FM to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
Entertainment Systems
61
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
6. ON/OFF/Volume: Press VOL -
PUSH to turn ON/OFF. Turn VOL -
PUSH to increase/decrease volume.
7. CLK (Clock): Press CLK to
toggle between the clock and radio
frequency.
AM/FM stereo single CD/satellite-compatible sound system
(if equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may
take their focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state
and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
Entertainment Systems
62
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay which
allows you to operate the window switches and the audio for up to
10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off or until either front
door is opened.
1. /: Press / to
manually go up or down the radio
frequency. Press and hold for a fast
advance through radio frequencies.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press / to tune to the
next/previous channel.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS威radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
2. (Phone): If your vehicle is
equipped with SYNC威, press to
access SYNC PHONE features. For
further information, please refer to your SYNC威supplement.
If your vehicle is not equipped with SYNC威, the display will read NO
PHONE.
3. MENU: Press MENU repeatedly
to access to the following settings:
Setting the clock: Press MENU until SET HOUR or SET MINUTES is
displayed. Use / / SEEK, SEEK to adjust the
hours/minutes.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, refer to
Setting the clock in your Navigation supplement.
SATELLITE RADIO MENU (if equipped): Press MENU when satellite
radio mode is active to access. Press OK to enter into the satellite radio
menu. Press /to cycle through the following options:
•CATEGORY: Press OK to enter category mode. Press / to
scroll through the list of available SIRIUS威channel Categories (Pop,
Rock, News, etc.) Press OK when the desired category appears in the
display. After a category is selected, press SEEK to search for that
specific category of channels only (i.e. ROCK). You may also select
CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS威categories and channels.
Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
Entertainment Systems
63
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•SAVE SONG: Press OK to save the currently playing song title in the
system’s memory. (If you try to save something other than a song,
CANT SAVE will appear in the display.) When the chosen song is
playing on any satellite radio channel, the system will alert you with
an audible prompt. Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and
the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song. You
can save up to 20 song titles. If you attempt to save a song when the
system is full, the display will read REPLACE SONG? Press OK to
access the saved songs and press /to cycle through the saved
songs. When the song appears in the display that you would like to
replace, press OK. SONG REPLACED will appear in the display.
•DELETE SONG: Press OK to delete a song title from the system’s
memory. Press /to cycle through the saved songs. When the
song title appears in the display that you would like to delete, press
OK. The song will appear in the display for confirmation. Press OK
again and the display will read SONG DELETED. If you do not want
to delete the currently listed song, press /to select either
RETURN or CANCEL.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
•DELETE ALL SONGS: Press OK to delete all songs from the
system’s memory. The display will read ARE YOU SURE? Press OK to
confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL
DELETED.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
•ENABLE ALERTS / DISABLE ALERTS: Press OK to enable/disable
the satellite alert status which alerts you when your selected songs are
playing on a satellite radio channel. (The system default is disabled.)
SONG ALERTS ENABLED/DISABLED will appear in the display. The
menu listing will display the opposite state. For example, if you have
chosen to enable the song alerts, the menu listing will read DISABLE
as the alerts are currently on, so your other option is to turn them off.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS威radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
AUTOSET: Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET. Autoset
allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your
original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2. Use / /
SEEK, SEEK to turn on/off.
Entertainment Systems
64
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system
will store the last one in the remaining presets.
BASS: Press MENU to reach the bass setting. Use / / SEEK,
SEEK to adjust.
TREB (Treble): Press MENU to reach the treble setting.
Use / / SEEK, SEEK to adjust.
L..R(Balance): Press MENU to reach the balance setting.
Use / / SEEK, SEEK to adjust the audio between the left
(L) and right (R) speakers.
B..F(Fade): Press MENU to reach the fade setting. Use / /
SEEK, SEEK to adjust the audio between the back (B) and
front (F) speakers.
SPEEDVOL (Speed sensitive volume, if equipped): Press MENU to
reach the SPEEDVOL setting. Radio volume automatically gets louder
with increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
Use / / SEEK, SEEK to adjust.
The default setting is off; increasing your vehicle speed will not change
the volume level.
Adjust 1–7: Increasing this setting from 1 (lowest setting) to 7 (highest
setting) allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with
vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
Recommended level is 1–3; SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7
is the maximum setting.
Track/Folder mode: Available only on MP3 discs in CD mode. In Track
mode, pressing SEEK, SEEK will scroll through all tracks on the
disc
In Folder mode, pressing SEEK, SEEK will scroll only through
tracks within the selected folder.
Press FOLDER, FOLDER to access the previous/next folder (if
available).
Entertainment Systems
65
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
COMPRESS (Compression): Available only in CD/MP3 mode. Press
MENU until COMPRESS ON/OFF appears in the display.
Use / / SEEK, SEEK to toggle ON/OFF. When COMPRESS
is ON, the system will bring the soft and loud CD passages together for a
more consistent listening level.
4. AUX: Press repeatedly to cycle
through LINE IN (auxiliary audio
mode, if equipped) and SAT1, SAT2
and SAT3 modes (satellite radio, if equipped).
For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode, refer to
Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS威radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
5. SEEK: In radio mode,
press /to access the
previous/next strong station.
In CD/MP3 mode, press /
to access the previous/next CD/MP3 track.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press SEEK, SEEK to
seek to the previous/next channel. If a specific category is selected,
(Jazz, Rock, News, etc.), press SEEK, SEEK to seek to the
previous/next channel in the selected category. Press and hold
SEEK, SEEK to fast seek through the previous /next channels.
In TEXT MODE, press SEEK, SEEK to view the
previous/additional display text.
In CATEGORY MODE, press SEEK, SEEK to select a category.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS威radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
6. /OK (Play/Pause): This
control is operational in CD/MP3
mode. When a CD/MP3 is playing,
press to pause or play the current CD/MP3. The CD/MP3 status will
display in the radio display.
OK: Use in various menu selections.
Entertainment Systems
66
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
7. SHUFFLE: In CD/MP3 mode,
press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle
mode. SHUFFLE ON will appear in
the display. If you wish to engage shuffle mode right away, press SEEK to
begin random play. Otherwise, random play will begin when the current
track is finished playing. CD SHUF will appear in the display. To disengage,
press SHUFFLE again. SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the display.
Note: In CD/MP3 mode, press SHUFFLE to play the tracks in random
order. In MP3 folder mode, the system will randomly play all tracks
within the current folder.
8. FOLDER : In folder mode,
press FOLDER to access next
folder on MP3 discs, if available.
9. FOLDER: In folder mode,
press FOLDER to access the
previous folder on MP3 discs, if
available.
10. FF (Fast forward): Press FF
to manually advance in a CD/MP3
track.
11. REW (Rewind): Press REW to
manually reverse in a CD/MP3 track.
12. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM1/FM2; tune to a station,
press and hold a preset control until sound returns. You may store up to
six stations in each frequency band for a total of 18.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), there are 18 available presets,
six each for SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save satellite channels in your
memory presets, tune to the desired channel then press and hold a
preset control until sound returns.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS威radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
13. TEXT/SCAN: In radio and
CD/MP3 mode, press and hold for
a brief sampling of radio stations or
CD tracks. Press again to stop.
In CD/MP3 mode, press and release to display track title, artist name,
and disc title.
Entertainment Systems
67
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and release to enter
TEXT MODE and display the current song title. While in TEXT MODE,
press again to scroll through the current song title, artist, channel
category and the SIRIUS威long channel name.
In TEXT MODE sometimes the display requires additional text to be
displayed. When the “>” indicator is active, press SEEK to view the
additional display text. When the “<” indicator is active, press SEEK
to view the previous display text.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and hold to hear a brief
sampling of the next channels. Press again to stop. In CATEGORY
MODE, press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of the channels in the
selected category. Press again to stop.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS威radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
14. AM/FM: Press AM/FM to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
15. ON/OFF/Volume: Press
VOL-PUSH to turn on/off. Turn
VOL-PUSH to increase/decrease
volume.
Note:If the volume is set above a
certain level and the ignition is turned off, the volume will come back on
at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on.
16. CD: Press to enter CD/MP3
mode. If a CD is already loaded into
the system, CD/MP3 play will begin
where it ended last.
17. (CD eject): Press to eject a
CD.
18. CD slot: Insert a CD label side
up in the CD slot.
Entertainment Systems
68
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Auxiliary input jack (if equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may
take their focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state
and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
Your vehicle may be equipped with
an auxiliary input jack (AIJ). The
auxiliary input jack, located on the
instrument panel below the power
point, provides a way to connect
your portable music player to the
in-vehicle audio system. This allows
the audio from a portable music
player to be played through the
vehicle speakers with high fidelity.
To achieve optimal performance,
please observe the following instructions when attaching your portable
music device to the audio system.
If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, refer to the
Auxiliary input jack section in the Audio Features chapter of your
Navigation System supplement.
Required equipment:
1. Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones
2. An audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8 in. (3.5 mm)
connectors at each end
To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack:
1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off.
2. Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully
charged and that the device is turned off.
3. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output
of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ
in your vehicle.
4. Turn the radio on, using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into
the system. Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level.
Entertainment Systems
69
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the
volume.
6. Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE, LINE IN or
SYNC LINE IN appears in the display.
You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may
be low.
7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the
level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the
AUX and FM or CD controls.
Troubleshooting:
1. Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. Line level
outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not
compatible with the AIJ. The AIJ will only work correctly with devices
that have a headphone output with a volume control.
2. Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is
necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio
system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality. Many
portable music players have different output levels, so not all players
should be set at the same levels. Some players will sound best at full
volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume.
3. If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the
portable music player volume down. If the problems persist, replace or
recharge the batteries in the portable music player.
4. The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner
when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control
(play, pause, etc.) over the attached portable music player.
5. For safety reasons, connecting or adjusting the settings on your
portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is
moving. Also, the portable music player should be stored in a secure
location, such as the center console or the glove box, when the vehicle is
in motion. The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the
portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion.
Entertainment Systems
70
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
USB port (if equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of
the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
USB port located on the instrument
panel. This feature allows you to
plug in media playing devices,
memory sticks, and also to charge
devices if they support this feature.
For further information on this
feature, refer to Accessing and
using your USB port in the SYNC威
supplement or Navigation System
supplement.
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
Radio frequencies:
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio reception factors:
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
•Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
•Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
•Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
Entertainment Systems
71
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
CD/CD player care
Do:
•Handle discs by their edges only.
(Never touch the playing
surface).
•Inspect discs before playing.
•Clean only with an approved CD
cleaner.
•Wipe discs from the center out.
Don’t:
•Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
•Clean using a circular motion.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Do not use any irregular shaped
CDs or discs with a scratch
protection film attached.
Entertainment Systems
72
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be
inserted into the CD player as
the label may peel and cause the
CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade
CDs be identified with
permanent felt tip marker rather
than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Audio system warranty and service
Refer to the Warranty Guide/Customer Information Guide for audio
system warranty information. If service is necessary, see your dealer or
qualified technician.
MP3 track and folder structure
Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure
as follows:
•There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track mode
(system default) and MP3 folder mode. For more information on track
and folder mode, refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following
section.
•MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The
player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255.
Note: The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less
depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio
present.
•MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted
by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from
F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
•Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation
through the disc files.
Entertainment Systems
73
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Sample MP3 structure
If you are burning your own MP3
discs, it is important to understand
how the system will read the
structures you create. While various
files may be present, (files with
extensions other than mp3), only
files with the .mp3 extension will be
played. Other files will be ignored
by the system. This enables you to
use the same MP3 disc for a variety
of tasks on your work computer,
home computer and your in vehicle
system.
In track mode, the system will display and play the structure as if it were
only one level deep (all .mp3 files will be played, regardless of being in a
specific folder). In folder mode, the system will only play the .mp3 files
in the current folder.
Satellite radio information (if equipped)
Satellite radio channels: SIRIUS威broadcasts a variety of music, news,
sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of SIRIUS威satellite radio channels,
visit www.sirius.com in the United States, www.siriuscanada.ca in
Canada, or call SIRIUS威at 1–888–539–7474.
Satellite radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio
system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite
radio reception performance:
•Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
11
2
.mp3
2
.mp3
3
.mp3
34
.mp3
64 .mp3
7
.mp3
.doc
.ppt
.xls
5
.mp3
Entertainment Systems
74
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
•Station overload: When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an
audio mute.
Unlike AM/FM audible static, you will hear an audio mute when there is
a satellite radio signal interference. Your radio display may display NO
SIGNAL to indicate the interference.
SIRIUS威satellite radio service: SIRIUS威satellite radio is a
subscription based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports,
news and entertainment programming. A service fee is required in order
to receive SIRIUS威service. Vehicles that are equipped with a factory
installed SIRIUS威satellite radio system include hardware and a limited
subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of the
vehicle.
For information on extended subscription terms, the online media player
and other SIRIUS威features, please contact SIRIUS威at 1–888–539–7474.
Note: SIRIUS威reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
changes.
Satellite radio electronic serial number (ESN): This 12–digit
Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate, modify or track your
satellite radio account. You will need this number when communicating
with SIRIUS威. While in satellite radio mode, you can view this number on
the radio display by pressing the AUX and preset 1 controls
simultaneously.
Entertainment Systems
75
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Radio Display Condition Action Required
ACQUIRING Radio requires more
than two seconds to
produce audio for the
selected channel.
No action required.
This message should
disappear shortly.
SAT FAULT Internal module or
system failure
present.
If this message does
not clear within a short
period of time, or with
an ignition key cycle,
your receiver may have
a fault. See your
authorized dealer for
service.
INVALID CHNL Channel no longer
available.
This previously
available channel is no
longer available. Tune
to another channel. If
the channel was one of
your presets, you may
choose another channel
for that preset button.
UNSUBSCRIBED Subscription not
available for this
channel.
Contact SIRIUS威at
1–888–539–7474 to
subscribe to the
channel or tune to
another channel.
NO TEXT Artist information not
available.
Artist information not
available at this time on
this channel. The
system is working
properly.
NO TEXT Song title information
not available.
Song title information
not available at this
time on this channel.
The system is working
properly.
Entertainment Systems
76
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Radio Display Condition Action Required
NO TEXT Category information
not available.
Category information
not available at this
time on this channel.
The system is working
properly.
NO SIGNAL Loss of signal from
the SIRIUS威satellite
or SIRIUS威tower to
the vehicle antenna.
You are in a location
that is blocking the
SIRIUS威signal (i.e.,
tunnel, under an
overpass, dense foliage,
etc.). The system is
working properly. When
you move into an open
area, the signal should
return.
UPDATING Update of channel
programming in
progress.
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
CALL SIRIUS威
1–888–539–7474
Satellite service has
been deactivated by
SIRIUS威satellite
radio.
Call SIRIUS威at
1–888–539–7474 to
re-activate or resolve
subscription issues.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a navigation system. Refer to the
Navigation System supplement for further information.
SYNC姞(IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with SYNC威, a hands-free communications
and entertainment system with special phone and media features. For
more information, please refer to the SYNC威supplement or to the
SYNC威section in the Navigation System supplement (if equipped).
Entertainment Systems
77
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
SINGLE ZONE CLIMATE CONTROL
1. Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
vents and de-mister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog
and thin ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce
window fogging. Press this button again to return to the previous air flow
selection.
2. A.RRear defroster (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate the
rear window defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this
chapter for more information. If your vehicle is equipped with both rear
defroster and heated mirrors, the same button will activate both.
2. B. Heated mirrors (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate.
This feature will remove ice and snow from the side view mirrors.
3. Multifunction control: Press repeatedly to cycle through the
settings to choose:
•:Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, de-mister
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. The system will
automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging.
•:Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
•:Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,
rear seat floor vents and de-mister vents.
•:Distributes air through the floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
4. A/C (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use
with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. A/C
engages automatically in MAX A/C, (defrost) and
(floor/defrost).
Climate Controls
78
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
5. Recirculated air (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate air
recirculation in the vehicle. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of
time needed to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help
reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle.
Recirculated air engages automatically when MAX A/C is selected or can
be engaged manually in any airflow mode except (defrost). When
the ignition switch is turned off and back on, the climate system will
return to the recirculated air mode only if the A/C button LED is
illuminated and the air distribution selection is either (panel)
or (panel/floor).
6. MAX A/C (if equipped): Distributes recirculated air through the
instrument panel vents to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the interior
air is more economical and efficient than normal A/C mode. Recirculated
air may also help reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle.
Press the MAX A/C button again for normal A/C operation.
7. Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the airflow in the
vehicle.
8. Fan speed adjustment: Controls the volume of air circulated in
the vehicle.
9. Power: Press to activate/deactivate the climate control system.
When the system is off, outside air is prevented from entering the
vehicle.
Operating tips
•To reduce fog build-up on the windshield during humid weather,
select (defrost) or (floor/defrost). Temperature and/or fan
speed can also be increased to improve clearing.
•To reduce humidity build-up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
system off or with recirculated air engaged and A/C off.
•Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
•Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
•To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”
•A small amount of air may be felt from the floor vent regardless of the
air distribution setting that is selected.
Climate Controls
79
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
If you are driving during extreme high ambient temperatures and idling
for extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C
in the MAX A/C position, adjust the blower fan speed to the lowest
setting and put the vehicle’s transmission into the P (Park) position to
continue to receive cool air from your A/C system.
For maximum cooling performance (MAX A/C):
1. Select MAX A/C.
2. Move the temperature control to the coolest setting.
3. Set the fan speed to the highest setting and then adjust as necessary
to maintain comfort.
•A/C and (recirculated air) will be automatically selected.
•Airflow will automatically be directed out of the panel vents.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select (panel/floor).
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
Climate Controls
80
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
DUAL ZONE AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(IF EQUIPPED)
Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,
refer to Optional or Standard message center in the Instrument
Cluster chapter.
1. –/+Fan speed control: Press to decrease/increase the fan
speed.
2. A.RRear defroster (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate the
rear window defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this
chapter for more information. If your vehicle is equipped with both rear
defroster and heated mirrors, the same button will activate both.
2. B. Heated mirrors (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate.
This feature will remove ice and snow from the side view mirrors.
3. Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
vents and de-mister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog
and thin ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce
window fogging. Press this button again to return to the previous air flow
selection.
A/C A/C
R
+
-
A/C AUTO
DUAL EXT
MAX A/C
1 6 8
17
16
15
9
10
11
43 5 7
2B
2A
14 13 12
Climate Controls
81
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
4. Manual control: Allows you to manually select where airflow is
directed. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO. When
choosing to control airflow manually, press repeatedly to toggle through
the settings to choose:
•:Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, de-mister
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. The system will
automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging.
•:Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
•:Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,
rear seat floor vents and de-mister vents.
•:Distributes air through the floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
5. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. A/C
engages automatically in MAX A/C, (defrost)
and (floor/defrost).
6. Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air recirculation in
the vehicle. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to
cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired
odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculated air engages
automatically when MAX A/C is selected or can be engaged manually in
any airflow mode except (defrost). When the ignition switch is
turned off and back on, the climate system will return to the recirculated
air mode only if the A/C button LED is illuminated and the air
distribution selection is either (panel) or (panel/floor).
7. AUTO: Press to engage automatic temperature control. Select the
desired temperature using the temperature control. The system will
automatically determine fan speed, airflow location, A/C on or off, and
outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the
desired temperature.
8. MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the interior air is more
economical and efficient than normal A/C mode. Recirculated air may
also help reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. Press the
MAX A/C button again for normal A/C operation.
9. Passenger heated seat (if equipped): Press to control the
passenger heated seat. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating
and Safety Restraints chapter for more information.
Climate Controls
82
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
10. Passenger temperature: Turn to increase/decrease the air
temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle. The recommended
initial setting is between 72°F (22°C) and 75°F (24°C), then adjust for
comfort. The passenger side temperature setting will appear in the upper
right corner of the display.
11. Passenger cooled seat (if equipped): Press to control the
passenger cooled seat. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating
and Safety Restraints chapter for more information.
12. EXT: Press to display the exterior temperature. Press again to
display cabin temperature settings. To switch between Fahrenheit and
Celsius, refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
13. DUAL: Press to engage/disengage separate passenger side
temperature control.
14. Power: Press to activate/deactivate the climate control system.
When the system is off, outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle.
15. Driver cooled seat (if equipped): Press to control the driver
cooled seat. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and
Safety Restraints chapter for more information.
16. Driver temperature: Turn to increase/decrease the air temperature
on the driver side of the vehicle. The control also adjusts the passenger
side temperature when PASS TEMP is disengaged. The recommended
initial setting is between 72°F (22°C) and 75°F (24°C), then adjust for
comfort. The driver side temperature setting will appear in the upper left
corner of the display.
17. Driver heated seat (if equipped): Press to control the driver
heated seat. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and
Safety Restraints chapter for more information.
Operating tips
•To reduce fog build-up on the windshield during humid weather,
select (defrost) (floor/defrost).
•To reduce humidity build-up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
system off, or with (recirculated air) engaged and A/C off.
•Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
Climate Controls
83
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
•To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out”.
•A small amount of air may be felt from the floor vent regardless of the
air distribution setting that is selected.
During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for
extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C in
the max A/C position, reduce blower fan speed from the highest setting
and put the vehicle’s transmission into the P (Park) gear position
(automatic transmission only) to continue to receive cool air from your
A/C system.
For maximum cooling performance:
•Automatic operation:
1. Press AUTO for full automatic operation.
2. Do not override A/C or (recirculated air).
3. Set the temperature to 60°F (16°C).
•Manual operation:
1. Select MAX A/C. The system will automatically default to single zone
operation and set the temperature to 60°F (16°C).
•A/C and (recirculated air) will be selected.
•Airflow will be directed out of the panel vents.
2. Fan speed will be automatically increased to the highest setting but
can be adjusted as desired.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select (panel/floor).
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
Climate Controls
84
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER (IF EQUIPPED) R
The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and
works to defrost your rear window from fog and thin ice. If equipped, it
also operates the heated mirror to remove snow and thin ice from the
side mirrors.
Ensure that the ignition on. Press to turn the defroster on/off. The
indicator light will illuminate when activated. For vehicles with a sliding
rear window– the defroster will be disabled when the window is opened.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
will not be covered by your warranty.
REMOTE START CLIMATE OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
The climate control system will condition the cabin temperature during
remote start based on the outside temperature. Engine idle may increase
to help with adjusting the cabin temperature.
Note: No climate control adjustments will be recognized during remote
start operation and none of the climate function indicators will be
illuminated while the vehicle is in remote start. Once the ignition is
cycled to the on position, the climate control system will return to the
previous settings (last ignition-on cycle) and adjustments can be made
normally. If the previous setting was off, the climate control system will
turn off.
If you previously had any of the following activated: heated seats (if
equipped), cooled seats (if equipped), heated mirrors (if equipped), or
rear defrost, they will not return to their previous settings (on) when the
ignition is turned on and will need to be re-activated if desired.
For more information on remote start climate settings and options, refer
to Message Center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Manual climate control
For hot weather conditions:
•The climate control system will be set to MAX A/C.
For cold weather conditions:
•The climate control system will be set to provide maximum heating
in (floor/defrost) mode.
•Rear defrost/heated mirrors (if equipped) will be activated.
Climate Controls
85
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
For moderate weather conditions:
•The interior cabin will be heated, cooled or off, based upon the
previous operating state (last ignition-on cycle).
•Rear defrost/heated mirrors (if equipped) will be deactivated.
Automatic climate control
For hot weather conditions:
•The interior cabin will be set to 72°F (22°C).
•The cooled seats (if equipped) will be set to high.
For cold weather conditions:
•The interior cabin will be set to 72°F (22°C).
•The heated seats (if equipped) will be set to high.
•Rear defrost/heated mirrors (if equipped) will be activated.
For moderate weather conditions:
•The interior cabin will be heated, cooled, or off, based upon the
previous operating state (last ignition-on cycle).
•Heated/cooled seats (if equipped) will be deactivated.
•Rear defrost/heated mirrors (if equipped) will be deactivated.
Climate Controls
86
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Rotate the headlamp control
clockwise to the first position to
turn on the parking lamps.
Rotate clockwise to the second
position to also turn on the
headlamps.
Autolamp control (if equipped)
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
•To turn autolamps on, rotate the
control to .
•To turn autolamps off, rotate the
control from the autolamp
position.
Note: If the vehicle is equipped with autolamps, it will have the
headlamps on with windshield wipers feature. If the windshield
wipers are turned on, the exterior lamps will turn on with the headlamp
control in the autolamp position.
The autolamp system also keeps the lights on for a predetermined
amount of time after the ignition switch is turned to off. You can change
the amount of time the lamps stay on by using the programming
procedure that follows:
Autolamps - Programmable exit delay
Programmable exit delay allows the length of the autolamp exit delay to
be changed.
To program the auto lamp exit time delay:
1. Start with the ignition in the off position and the headlamp control in
the autolamp position.
2. Turn the headlamp control to off.
Lights
87
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
3. Turn the ignition switch to on and then back to off.
4. Turn the headlamp control to the autolamp position. The headlamps
will turn on.
5. Wait the desired amount of time for the exit delay you want (up to
three minutes), then turn the headlamps off.
Fog lamp control (if equipped)
The headlamp control also operates
the fog lamps. The fog lamps can be
turned on only when the headlamp
controlisinthe ,or
position and the high beams are not
turned on.
Pull headlamp control towards you
to turn fog lamps on. The fog lamp
indicator light will illuminate.
High beams
Pull the lever fully past the detent
to activate. Pull the lever fully again
to deactivate.
Flash-to-pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
Lights
88
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output.
To activate:
•the ignition must be in the on position,
•the headlamp control is in the off or parking lamp position and
•the parking brake must be disengaged.
•the transmission is not in P (Park)
WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at
dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp
(DRL) system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not
provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate
your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable
lit components in the vehicle during
headlamp and parking lamp
operation.
•Tapthetoporbottomofthe
control to brighten/dim all interior
lit components incrementally, or
•Press and hold at the first
position the top or bottom of the
control until the desired lighting level is reached.
•Press and hold the top of the control to the full on position to activate
the “dome on” feature. This will turn on the interior courtesy lights.
The lights will remain on until the bottom of the control is pressed.
Lights
89
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
Your vehicle is equipped with an aerodynamic headlamp system. The
aerodynamic headlamps can only be aimed in the vertical direction
(up/down) using the procedure following. The headlamps on your vehicle
are properly aimed at the assembly plant and should not normally need
adjustment.
Vertical aim adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle can only be vertically adjusted. Your
vehicle does not require horizontal aim adjustments.
To adjust the headlamps:
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
•(1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
•(2) Center height of lamp to
ground
•(3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
•(4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height from the
center of your headlamp (indicated
by a 3.0 mm circle on the lens) to
the ground and mark an 8 foot
(2.4 meter) horizontal reference line
on the vertical wall or screen at this height (a piece of masking tape
works well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood. Cover one of the headlamps so no light from that lamp
hits the wall.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe a light pattern with a
distinct horizontal edge towards the
right. If this edge is not at the
horizontal reference line, the beam will need to be adjusted so the edge
is at the same height as the horizontal reference line.
Lights
90
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp, then use a #2
Phillips head to turn the adjuster
either counterclockwise (to adjust
down) or clockwise (to adjust up)
aligning the upper edge of the light
pattern up to the horizontal line.
6. Repeat Steps 3–5 for the other
headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
The turn signal lever does not mechanically lock in the upward or
downward position when activated. The turn signal control activation and
cancellation is electronic.
•To operate the left turn signal,
push the lever down until it stops
and release.
•To operate the right turn signal,
push the lever up until it stops
and release.
•To manually cancel turn signal operation, push the lever again in
either direction.
Lane change
To indicate a left or right lane change:
•Push the lever up/down to the first stop position and release. The turn
signals will flash three times and stop.
•Push the lever up/down to the first stop position and hold. The turn
signals will flash for as long as the lever is held in this position.
Lights
91
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
INTERIOR LAMPS
Front map lamps (if equipped)
The map lamps are located on the overhead console. Press the controls
on either side of each map lamp to turn on the lamps. The map lamps
also light when:
•any door is opened,
•the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated up until the
courtesy lamps come on, and
•any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and the ignition is
off.
Rear dome/map lamps
Your vehicle may have map lamps
within the rear dome lamp. Press
the switches on either side of the
dome lamp to turn the lamps on.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Lamp assembly condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air
enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the
lens. The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during
normal operation. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry
weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
•Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets)
•Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens
Lights
92
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp water
leak) are:
•Water puddle inside the lamp
•Large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of
the lens
Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
Function Number
of bulbs
Trade number
Headlamps 2 H13/9008
Park/Turn lamp 2 3157NA
Sidemarker 2 W5W
Tail/stop/turn/sidemarker (pick-up only) 2 3157
Tail/stop/turn/sidemarker (chassis cabs
only; if equipped)
2 3157
Back-up (pick-ups only) 2 921
Back-up (chassis cabs only) 2 3157
High-mount brake lamp 1 912
Fog lamp 2 9145
License plate lamp 2 194
Cargo lamp 2 912
Map lamp 2 12V6W
Dome/reading lamps 3 578
Interior visor lamp (if equipped) 4 194
Mirror turn signal 2 2825
Mirror clearance lamp 2 2825
*Front clearance lamps (2) and front
identification lamps (3)
5 194
*Rear fender clearance 4 LED**
*Rear identification 3 193**
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer
* Dual rear wheels, or if equipped.
** See your authorized dealer to replace the lamp assembly.
Lights
93
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Replacing headlamps, park lamps, turn lamps
1. Make sure that the exterior lamps are off, then open the hood.
2. Using masking tape or a marker,
make an alignment mark between
one of the grille brackets and the
vehicle radiator support to ensure
correct grille alignment during
re-assembly. Do not scratch the
black coating from the radiator
support.
3. Remove the two grille to
headlamp assembly push pins and
the four bolts attaching the top of
the grille to the radiator support.
4. Pull the top of the grille forward to gain access to the lower grille
spring clips.
5. Depress the spring clips through the lower inner grille access openings
using a flat head screwdriver.
6. Pull the grill straight out to remove.
7. Remove the four bolts from the
headlamp assembly.
8. Pull the assembly straight out
disengaging one snap clip from the
fender.
9. Disconnect the electrical
connector by squeezing the release
tab and pushing the connector
forward, then pulling it rearward.
Lights
94
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
10. For the headlamp bulb, remove
the bulb by turning it
counterclockwise and pulling it
straight out.
11. For the park or turn lamp bulb,
remove the bulb by turning it
counterclockwise and pulling it
straight out.
WARNING: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep
out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base
and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the
bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing brake/tail/turn/back-up lamp bulbs (pick-ups only)
1. Make sure the headlamps are off,
then open the tailgate to expose the
lamp assemblies.
2. Remove the two bolts from the
tail lamp assembly and carefully pull
the lamp assembly from the tailgate
pillar by releasing the two retaining
tabs.
Lights
95
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
3. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp
assembly.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing brake/tail/turn/back-up lamp bulbs (chassis cabs only)
(if equipped)
1. Make sure the headlamps are off.
2. Remove the four screws and the
lamp lens from lamp assembly.
3. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out of the socket and push in the
new bulb.
Replacing cargo lamp and high-mount brake lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamps are off.
2. Remove the screws and lamp
assembly from the vehicle as wiring
permits.
3. Remove the bulb socket by
rotating it counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket.
Lights
96
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Replacing front clearance and identification lamp bulbs
(if equipped)
1. Make sure the headlamps are off.
2. Remove the screw and lens from
the lamp assembly.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket.
Install the bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing fog lamp bulbs (if equipped)
1. Make sure the headlamps are off.
2. Remove the bulb socket from the
fog lamp by turning it
counterclockwise.
3. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the fog lamp bulb.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
The license plate bulbs are located
behind the rear bumper. To change
the license plate lamp bulbs:
1. Reach behind the rear bumper to
locate the bulb.
2. Twist the bulb socket
counterclockwise and carefully pull
to remove it from the lamp
assembly.
3. Pull out the old bulb from the
socket and push in the new bulb.
4. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning it clockwise.
Lights
97
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers;
rotate towards you to decrease the
speed of the wipers.
Speed dependent wipers: When the wiper control is set on the
intermittent settings, the speed of the wipers will automatically adjust
with the vehicle speed. The faster your vehicle is travelling the faster the
wipers will go.
Windshield washer: Press the end
of the stalk:
•briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
•a quick press and hold: the
wipers will swipe three times with
washer fluid.
•a long press and hold: the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for
up to 10 seconds.
Courtesy wipe feature: One extra wipe will occur a few seconds after
washing the front window to clear any excess washer fluid remaining on
the windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid
level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,
always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.
Windshield wiper rainlamp feature (if equipped with autolamp)
When the windshield wipers are turned on during daylight, and the
headlamp control is in the autolamp position, the exterior lamps will turn
on after a brief delay and will remain on until the wipers are turned off.
o
o
Driver Controls
98
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
TILT/TELESCOPE STEERING WHEEL
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down to unlock the
steering column.
2. While the lever is in the down
position, move the steering wheel
up or down and in or out until you
find the desired position.
3. While holding the steering wheel
in place, pull the lever up to its
original position to lock the steering
column.
WARNING: Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is
moving.
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamps.
Slide-on-rod feature (if
equipped)
Rotate the visor towards the side
window and extend it rearward for
additional sunlight coverage.
Note: To stow the visor back into
the headliner, visor must be
retracted before moving it back
towards the windshield.
Driver Controls
99
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to
your option package.
Storage compartment (if equipped)
Press the release tab on the rear
edge of the bin door to open the
storage compartment. The door will
open to the full open position.
The storage compartment may be
used to secure sunglasses or a
similar object.
CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. These
include:
•Locking storage compartment
with hanging file folder supports
•Storage for laptop computer,
binder or book between the
hanging file folder support and
the passenger side of the console
bin
•One 12V power point inside the
storage compartment and one on
the rear of the console
•110V AC power point outlet on the rear of the console
•Rear cupholders
Driver Controls
100
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•Two removable front cupholder
modules
•Removable false bottom tray for
accessing hidden storage
compartment (also has space for
a large cup)
WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects
can injure you in a collision.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12V DC)
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet for this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Auxiliary power points can be found in the following locations:
•On the instrument panel (two locations)
•Inside the center console storage compartment (if equipped)
•On the rear of the center console (if equipped)
•Inside the 20-percent front seat console (if equipped)
•Inside the rear under seat storage compartment (if equipped)
Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element (if
equipped).
Note: Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter
socket (if equipped). Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not
covered by your warranty, and can result in fire or serious injury.
To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the power point(s)
over the vehicle capacity of 12V DC/180W. If the power point or cigar
lighter socket is not working, a fuse may have blown. Refer to Fuses and
relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on
checking and replacing fuses.
Driver Controls
101
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
To have full capacity usage of your power point, the engine is required to
be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery. To prevent
the battery from being discharged:
•do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running,
•do not leave battery chargers, video game adapters, computers and
other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for
extended periods.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
Power point (110V AC) (if equipped)
The 110V AC power point outlet is used for powering electrical devices
that require up to 150W. Exceeding the 150W limit will cause the power
point to cut off the power temporarily to provide overload protection.
Note: The 110V AC power point is
equipped with a cap which provides
protection from inserting objects into
the socket. The cap should always be
in a closed position whenever the
power point outlet is not in use.
The 110V AC power point is located
on the back of the center console.
The power outlet is not designed for the following electric appliances;
they may not work properly:
•Cathode ray tube type televisions
•Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners, electric saws and other electric
power tools, compressor-driven refrigerators, etc.
•Measuring devices, which process precise data, such as medical
equipment, measuring equipment, etc.
•Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply:
microcomputer-controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.
WARNING: Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the power
point whenever the device is not in use. Do not use any
extension cord with the 110V AC power point, since it will defeat the
safety protection design provided by the cap and twist tab. Doing so
my cause the power point to overload due to powering multiple
devices that can reach beyond the 150W load limit and could result in
fire or serious injury.
AC 110V
150W
Driver Controls
102
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
The power point can switch to a fault mode when it is overloaded,
overheated, or shorted. For overloading and shorting conditions, unplug
your device and turn the ignition key off then on. For an overheating
condition, let the system cool off, then turn the ignition key off then on.
The 110V AC power point can provide power whenever the vehicle
ignition is in the on position and the power point green indicator light
located in the top left corner is turned on. Refer to the indicator light
code below for the power point status.
Indicator light codes
Green light is on — Power point is ready to supply power
Green light is off — Power point power supply is off. Ignition is not in
the on position
Green light is blinking — Power point is in fault mode
Note: The 110V AC power point will turn off after 13 minutes if the
ignition is in the on position without the engine running. Keep the
engine running or cycle the ignition before the 13 minute time-out to
keep the inverter on.
POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
Press and pull the window switches
to open and close windows.
•Press down (to the first detent)
and hold the switch to open.
•Pull up (to the first detent) and
hold the switch to close.
Rear Window Buffeting: When one or both of the rear windows are
open, the vehicle may demonstrate a wind throb or buffeting noise. This
noise can be alleviated by lowering a front window approximately 2–3 in.
(5–8 cm).
Driver Controls
103
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
One-touch down
Allows the driver’s window to open fully without holding the control
down. Press the switch completely down to the second detent and
release quickly. The window will open fully. Momentarily press the switch
to any position to stop the window operation.
Window lock (if equipped)
The window lock feature allows only
the driver to operate the power
windows.
To lock out all the window controls
(except for the driver’s) press the
right side of the control. Press the
left side to restore the window
controls.
Power sliding back window (if equipped)
The control is located on the
overhead console.
Press and hold the control to
open the window all the way to the
full open position.
Pull and hold the control to
close the window.
WARNING: When operating the power sliding back window you
must ensure all rear seat occupants and/or cargo are not in the
proximity of the back window.
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power sliding back window.
They may seriously injure themselves.
Accessory delay
With accessory delay, the window switches may be used for up to
10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the off position or until
either front door is opened.
Driver Controls
104
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
INTERIOR MIRROR
The interior rearview mirror has two pivot points on the support arm
which lets you adjust the mirror up or down and from side to side.
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
motion.
Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror (if equipped)
The interior rear view mirror has an auto-dimming function. The
electronic day/night mirror will change from the normal (high reflective)
state to the non-glare (darkened) state when bright lights (glare) reach
the mirror. When the mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle,
it will automatically adjust (darken) to minimize glare.
The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the
vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) to ensure a bright clear view when
backing up.
Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior
rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror
performance.
Note: A rear center passenger and/or raised rear center headrest (if
equipped) may also block the light from reaching the sensor.
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
Note: If equipped with a rearview camera system, a video image will
display in the mirror or the navigation system display (if equipped) when
the vehicle is put in R (Reverse). As you shift into any other gear from R
(Reverse), the image will remain for a few seconds and then turn off.
Refer to Rearview camera system in the Driving chapter.
Driver Controls
105
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power side view mirrors (if equipped)
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
motion.
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Rotate the control clockwise to
adjust the right mirror and rotate
the control counterclockwise to
adjust the left mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
The spotter mirror below the main glass (if equipped) must be adjusted
manually.
Heated outside mirrors (if equipped)
The main mirror glass and lower
convex spotter mirror are heated to
remove ice, mist and fog. To activate
the heated mirrors, press the heated
mirror control located on the
climate control panel.
Do not remove ice from the
mirrors with a scraper or
attempt to re-adjust the mirror
glass if it is frozen in place.
These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
Driver Controls
106
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Fold-away mirrors
Fold the side mirrors in carefully before driving through a narrow space,
like an automatic car wash.
Power-fold mirrors (if equipped)
You can fold the side mirrors
simultaneously using the power
mirror switch.
To operate the power-fold mirrors:
1. Rotate the switch to the center/neutral position.
2. Momentarily pull the switch rearward to auto fold in.
3. Momentarily pull the switch rearward again to fold back to design
position.
Note: When power-folding the mirrors, it is normal to hear the sound of
the motors.
Power-fold mirror positions, from left to right: Position 1, Position 2,
Position 3
The power-fold mirrors may be folded forward/rearward manually to any
of the three positions shown and electrically to positions 1 and 2 only. If
a mirror is folded manually forward to position 3, you must manually fold
it back to position 1 or 2 in order for the power-fold function to continue
functioning. Note: Although it is possible to electrically fold the mirror
from position 3 to 2, it was not designed for this functionality and may
not always work under all conditions.
Driver Controls
107
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Ten or more switch activations within one minute, or repeated
fold/unfolding of the mirrors while holding the switch rearward during the
full travel may cause the system to disable the fold/unfold function to
protect the motors from overheating. Should this occur, wait approximately
3
1
⁄
2
minutes for the system to reset and function to return to normal.
Note: The power-fold mirrors are designed to operate while the vehicle
is stationary or traveling at moderate speeds. If you attempt to
power-fold the mirrors at high speeds, they may not fully fold
forward/rearward - slow down and power-fold or manually fold the
mirrors in order to complete the fold operation.
Note: If the power fold/telescope mirror glass appears loose or vibrates
when driving, it is possible that the mirrors have been manually folded or
telescoped. To minimize the vibration, ensure that the mirrors are
electronically folded and telescoped in/out with the switches on the door
trim panel. If the power fold mirrors are out of sync, electronically
power-fold the mirrors to re-sync the motors. This will cause a loud “click”
and the mirrors will jerk during re-synchronization. This is normal.
Telescoping mirrors (if equipped)
The telescoping feature allows the
mirror to extend approximately
2.75 inches (70 mm). This feature is
especially useful to the driver when
towing a trailer. Mirrors can be
manually pulled out or pushed in to
the desired telescopic position.
If equipped with PowerScope™
power telescoping mirrors, you can
simultaneously position both mirrors
using the power telescope switch
found on the door trim panel.
•To telescope the mirrors
outboard, press and hold the left
side of the power telescope switch until the mirrors reach their
desired position. When the end of travel is reached, it is normal to
hear the power telescoping motors running as long as you continue to
hold the switch.
Driver Controls
108
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•To telescope the mirrors inboard, press and hold the right side of the
power telescope switch until the mirrors reach their desired position.
Memory mirrors (if equipped)
This system allows automatic positioning of the outside rearview mirrors.
For more information on this feature, refer to Memory seats/power
mirrors/adjustable pedals in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter.
Mirror-mounted side turn signal indicator (if equipped)
When the vehicle turn signals are
activated, the outer portion of the
mirror housing will blink amber.
The turn signal feature can be seen
by other drivers who may approach
from the rear of the vehicle.
Clearance lamps (if equipped)
Illuminates when the headlamps or
parking lamps are switched on.
This provides additional visibility of
your vehicle to other drivers on the
road.
Driver Controls
109
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED)
The accelerator and brake pedal
should only be adjusted when the
vehicle is stopped and the gearshift
lever is in the P (Park) position.
The control is located on the left
side of the steering column. Press
and hold the rear of the control to
move the pedals toward you. Press
and hold the front of the control to
move the pedals away from you.
WARNING: Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with
feet on the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
The accelerator and brake pedal positions are saved when doing a
memory set function and can be recalled along with the vehicle
personality features when a memory position is selected. Refer to
Memory seats/power mirrors/adjustable pedals in the Seating and
Safety Restraints chapter.
SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
With speed control set, you can maintain a set speed without keeping
your foot on the accelerator pedal.
WARNING: Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Using speed control
The speed controls are located on the steering wheel.
Driver Controls
110
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
CNCL (Cancel)/RSM (Resume):
Press to cancel or resume a set
speed.
ON/OFF: Press to turn the system
on or off.
– SET +: Press to set a speed or to
decrease or increase a set speed.
The speed control system uses two indicator lights in the instrument
cluster:
•an amber indicator light which illuminates when the system is on, and
•a green indicator light which illuminates when the system is engaged.
Setting speed control
To set speed control:
1. Press and release ON.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press and release SET +.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
5. The green indicator light on the instrument cluster will turn on.
Note:
•Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
•If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
•If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
Disengaging a set speed
To disengage speed control, tap the brake pedal or press and release
CNCL.
Disengaging the speed control will not erase the previous set speed.
Resuming a set speed
Press and release RSM. This will automatically return the vehicle to the
previously set speed.
ON/
OFF
CNCL
RSM
- SET +
Driver Controls
111
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Increasing speed while using speed control
To increase the set speed:
•Press and hold SET + until you get to the desired speed, then release.
You can also use SET + to operate the tap-up function. Press and
release SET + to increase the vehicle set speed in approximately
1 mph (2 km/h) increments.
•Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed then press and
release SET +.
Reducing speed while using speed control
To reduce a set speed:
•Press and hold SET – until you get to the desired speed, then release.
You can also use SET – to operate the tap-down function. Press and
release SET – to decrease the vehicle set speed in approximately
1 mph (2 km/h) increments.
•Press the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached then
press and release SET +.
Turning off speed control
To turn off the speed control, press OFF or turn off the ignition.
Note: When you turn off the speed control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
Audio control features
MEDIA: Press repeatedly to scroll
through available audio modes.
SEEK :Press to select
the previous/next radio station
preset or CD track (if equipped).
Press and hold to select the
previous/next radio station
frequency or to reverse/forward a
CD.
+ VOL – (Volume): Press to
increase or decrease the volume.
VOL
SEEK
MEDIA
+
Driver Controls
112
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation system hands free
control features (if equipped)
Press and hold VOICE briefly until
the voice icon appears on the
navigation display to use the voice
command feature.
Press VOICE to complete a voice
command.
For further information on the
Navigation system, refer to the
Navigation System supplement.
SYNC威system hands free
control feature (if equipped)
Press VOICE briefly until the
voice icon appears on the display
to use the voice command feature.
You will hear a tone and LISTENING
will appear in the radio display.
Press and hold VOICE to exit voice
command.
Press to activate phone mode or
answer a phone call. Press and hold to end call or exit phone mode.
Press to scroll through various menus and selections. Press
OK to confirm your selection.
For further information on the SYNC威system, refer to the SYNC威
supplement.
Navigation system/SYNC威hands
free control features (if
equipped)
Press VOICE briefly until the
voice icon appears on the
navigation display to use the voice
command feature.
Press to activate phone mode or
answer a phone call. Press and
hold to exit phone mode or end
call.
Driver Controls
113
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
For further information on the Navigation system/SYNC威system, refer to
the Navigation System and SYNC威supplements.
UPFITTER CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with
the Upfitter option package which
will provide four switches, mounted
in the center of the instrument
panel, labeled AUX 1, AUX 2, AUX 3
and AUX 4. These switches will only
operate while the ignition is in the
on position, whether the engine is
running or not. It is, however, recommended that the engine remain
running to maintain battery charge when using the Upfitter switches for
extended duration or higher current draws. (This is even more important
for vehicles with diesel engines since the glow plugs are also draining
battery power when the ignition key is in the on position.)
When switched on by the operator they provide 8 amps, 12 amps or
20 amps of electrical battery power for a variety of personal or
commercial uses.
If your vehicle is equipped with this option, there will also be a relay box
located on the driver side end of the instrument panel. See your
authorized dealer for service.
The relays are coded as shown in
the accompanying illustration.
RELAY
1
RELAY
2
RELAY
3
RELAY
4
Driver Controls
114
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
There will also be one power lead
for each switch found as a blunt-cut
and sealed wire located below the
instrument panel and to the left of
the steering column.
They are coded as follows:
Switch Circuit number Wire color Fuse
AUX 1 CAC05 Yellow 25A
AUX 2 CAC06 Green with
Brown Trace
25A
AUX 3 CAC07 Violet with
Green Trace
10A
AUX 4 CAC08 Brown 15A
More detailed information about Upfitter switches can be found at
https://www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas/.
MOON ROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
The moon roof control is located on the overhead console.
WARNING: Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave
children unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt
themselves.
WARNING: When closing the moon roof, you should verify that
it is free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are
not in the proximity of the moon roof opening.
The moon roof is equipped with an automatic, one-touch, express
opening and closing feature. To stop motion at any time during the
one-touch operation, press the control a second time.
Driver Controls
115
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
To open the moon roof: Press and
release the SLIDE control and the
moon roof will open automatically to
the “comfort” position. Press and
release again to fully open. Press the
switch again to stop the moon roof.
To close the moon roof: Pull and
release the SLIDE control, the moon
roof will close automatically. Press the
switch again to stop the moon roof.
Bounce-back: When an obstacle has been detected in the moon roof
opening as the moon roof is closing, the moon roof will automatically
open and stop at a prescribed position.
Bounce-back override: To override bounce-back function, pull and hold
the SLIDE switch within two seconds of a bounce-back event. The
closing force will begin to increase each time the moon roof is closed for
the first three closing cycles, with bounce-back active. For example:
Bounce-back can be used to overcome the resistance of ice on the moon
roof or seals
To vent the moon roof: Press and release the TILT control, the moon
roof will move to the vent position automatically from any moon roof
position. Press the switch again to stop the moon roof. Pull and hold the
TILT control to close the moon roof.
The moon roof has a built-in sliding shade that can be manually opened
or closed when the glass panel is shut. To close the shade, pull it toward
the front of the vehicle.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a universal garage door opener which
can be used to replace the common hand-held transmitter.
WARNING: Make sure that the garage door and security device
are free from obstruction when you are programming. Do not
program the system with the vehicle in the garage.
WARNING: Do not use the system with any garage door opener
that does not have the safety stop and reverse feature as
required by U.S. Federal Safety Standards (this includes any garage
door opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
Driver Controls
116
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Make sure you keep the original remote control transmitter for
use in other vehicles as well as for future system programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale or lease termination of your
vehicle, you erase the programmed function buttons for security reasons.
See Erasing the function button codes later in this section.
Note: You can program a maximum of three devices. To change or
replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed,
you must first erase the current settings. See Erasing the function
button codes later in this section.
Note: Programming the system to a community gate will require a
unique set of instructions depending on the gate system model. Contact
the help line on 1-866-572-2728 for further information.
Note: If you accidently enter the program mode by pressing and
releasing the outer two buttons or all three buttons simultaneously, do
not press any button until the module times out after a few seconds and
resets to normal mode. When the module has timed out, all three LED
lamps will flash rapidly for a few seconds then turn off. Any settings
should remain as previously set.
The universal garage door opener
replaces the common hand-held
garage door opener with a
three-button transmitter that is
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary
features, a garage door opener and a
platform for remote activation of devices with the home. As well as being
programmed for garage doors, the system transmitter can be
programmed to operate security devices and home lighting systems.
Additional system information can be found on-line at www.learcar2U.com
or by calling the toll-free help line on 1-866-572-2728.
Types of garage door openers (rolling code and fixed code)
The Car2U威Home Automation System may be programmed to operate
rolling code and fixed code garage door openers.
•Rolling code garage door openers were produced after 1996 and are
code protected. Rolling code means the coded signal is changed every
time your remote control garage door opener is used.
•Fixed code garage door openers were produced prior to 1996. Fixed
code uses the same coded signal every time. It is manually
programmed by setting DIP switches for a unique personal code.
Driver Controls
117
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
If you do not know if your garage
door opener is a rolling code or
fixed code device, open your garage
door opener’s remote control battery
cover. If a panel of DIP switches is
present your garage door opener is
a fixed code device. If not, your
garage door opener is a rolling code
device.
Note: Programming the Car2U威system to a community gate will require
a unique set of instructions depending on the gate system model.
Contact the Car2U威help line at 1-866-572-2728 to program your Car2U威
system.
Note: Accidentally entering the program mode may override previously
programmed buttons. This can happen by pressing and releasing the
outer two buttons, or all three buttons, simultaneously. If this happens,
do not press any button until the module times out after approximately
2.5 seconds and resets to normal mode. When time-out occurs, all three
LEDs will flash rapidly for a few seconds then turn off. Any settings
should remain as previously set.
Rolling code programming
Note: If you do not follow the time-sensitive instructions, the device will
time out and you will have to repeat the complete procedure.
Note: It may be helpful to have another person assist you in
programming the transmitter.
1. Switch the ignition on.
123
456
789101112
CTS 206-12 T124
O
N
Driver Controls
118
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
2. Press and hold the outer two
buttons for 1–2 seconds, then
release.
Note: You may need a ladder to
reach the unit and you may need to
remove the cover or lamp lens.
Note: If you cannot locate the learn
button, refer to the Owner Manual
of your garage door opener or call the toll-free help line on
1-866-572-2728.
3. Press the learn button on the
garage door opener motor.
Note: You will have 10–30 seconds
to complete the following steps.
4. Return to your car.
5. Press and hold the function
button you would like to use to
control the garage door. You may need to hold the button from
5–20 seconds, during which time the selected button LED lamp will flash
slowly.
6. When the garage door moves, release the button within one second.
The LED lamp will flash rapidly until programming is complete.
7. Press and release the button again. The garage door should move,
confirming that programming is successful. If your garage door does not
operate, repeat the previous steps.
The LED lamp above the selected button will illuminate to confirm that
the system is responding to the button command.
To program another rolling code device, repeat steps one through six
substituting a different function button in step four.
Driver Controls
119
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Fixed code programming
Note: It may be helpful to have another person assist you in
programming the transmitter.
To program units with fixed code
DIP switches, you will need the
garage door hand-held transmitter,
paper and a pen or pencil.
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Open the battery cover and note
all the switch settings from left to right.
When the switch is in the up, on, or + position, mark down “left button”.
When the switch is in the middle, neutral, or 0 position, mark down
“middle button”.
When the switch is in the down, off, or – position, mark down “right
button”.
3. Press all three function buttons
simultaneously for a few seconds
and then release. The LED lamps
will flash slowly.
Note: The following step must be
completed within 2.5 minutes.
4. Enter the corresponding DIP switch settings from left to right into the
system by pressing and releasing the buttons corresponding to the
settings you noted.
5. Simultaneously press and release all three function buttons. The LED
lamps will illuminate.
6. Press and hold the function
button you would like to use to
control the garage door.
Note: You may need to hold the
button from 5–55 seconds before
observing movement of the garage
door.
Driver Controls
120
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
7. When the garage door moves, release the button within one second.
When the button is released, the LED lamp will flash slowly.
8. The LED lamp will begin to flash rapidly until programming is
complete. If your garage door does not operate, repeat the previous
steps. Otherwise, call the toll-free help line on 1-866-572-2728.
The LED lamp above the selected button will illuminate to confirm that
the system is responding to the button command.
Erasing the function button codes
Note: You cannot erase individual
buttons.
1. Press and hold the outer two
function buttons simultaneously for
approximately 20 seconds until the
LED lamps above the buttons flash
rapidly.
2. When the LED lamps flash,
release the buttons. The codes for all buttons are erased.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance can void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Driver Controls
121
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Always use floor mats that are designed to fit the
foot well of your vehicle. Only use floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed. Only use floor mats that are firmly secured to
retention posts so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
•Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal injury.
•Always make sure that the floor mats are properly attached to the
retention posts in the carpet that are supplied with your vehicle.
Floor mats must be properly secured to both retention posts to
ensure mats do not shift out of position.
•Never place floor mats or any other covering in the vehicle foot well
that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and
interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
•Never place floor mats or any other covering on top of already
installed floor mats. Floor mats should always rest on top of vehicle
carpeting surface and not another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering will reduce the pedal
clearance and potentially interfere with pedal operation.
•Check attachment of floor mats on a regular basis. Always properly
reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning
or replacement.
•Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well
while the vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can become
trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
•Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or attachment
instructions can potentially cause interference with pedal operation
causing loss of control of vehicle.
Driver Controls
122
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING (Continued)
•To install floor mats, position the floor mat so that the eyelet is over
the retention post and press down to lock in.
•To remove the floor mat, reverse the installation procedure.
TAILGATE LOCK
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
tailgate lock designed to help
prevent theft of the tailgate.
•Insert ignition key and turn to the
right to engage lock.
•Turn ignition key to the left to
unlock.
Tailgate Removal
WARNING: Always properly secure cargo to prevent shifting
cargo or cargo falling from vehicle, which could result in
compromised vehicle stability and serious personal injury to vehicle
occupants or others.
Your tailgate is removable to allow more room for loading.
Note: If equipped with a rearview camera system, do Steps 1 through 3
before removing the tailgate.
1. Before removal of the tailgate,
locate and disconnect the tailgate
in-line connector under the pickup
box on the passenger side of the
vehicle near the spare tire.
2. Install a protective cap (tethered
to the wire assembly) onto the
in-line rearview camera system
connector that remains under the
pickup box.
Driver Controls
123
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
3. Partially lower tailgate and carefully feed tailgate harness up through
the gap between the pickup box and the bumper. Place the tailgate
harness out of the way under the pickup box.
4. Lower the tailgate.
5. Using a screwdriver, gently pry
the spring clip (on each connector)
past the head of the support screw.
Disconnect cable.
6. Disconnect the other cable.
7. Lift tailgate to a 45-degree angle
from horizontal.
8. Lift right side off of its hinge.
9. Lift tailgate to a 80-degree angle from horizontal.
10. Remove tailgate from left side hinge by sliding tailgate to the right.
To install, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
Tailgate Step (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a feature that allows easier entry into
the truck bed. To open the tailgate step:
1. Flip down the tailgate.
2. Pull the yellow latch lever to the
unlock position ( ) to release the
grab handle from its stowed position
and raise the handle upright until
you feel it latch and see the latch
lever in the lock position ( ). The
yellow lever only needs to be used
when releasing the grab handle.
Driver Controls
124
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
3. Rotate the center molding to
unlatch the tailgate step and pull it
towards you to extend it.
4. Flip open the step panel to widen
the step.
Note: To reduce risk of falling:
•Operate step only when the
vehicle is on level surface.
•Operate step only in areas with
sufficient lighting
•Always open flip panel to widen step.
•Always use grab handle when stepping up and down.
•Step not intended for bare-footed use.
•Keep step clean from contamination before use (e.g. snow, mud)
•Keep the step load (you + load) below 350 lb (159 kg).
•Never drive with step deployed.
To close the tailgate step:
1. Close the step panel, then lift and fully close the tailgate step into the
tailgate.
2. Slide the latch at the bottom of the handle, then lower the handle.
Note:
•Fully close and latch the tailgate step before moving the vehicle.
•Never drive with the step or grab handle deployed.
•Replace slip resistance tape (serviceable item) if worn out.
•Replace handle molding (serviceable item) if damaged.
•Do not tow with grab handle or step frame.
Driver Controls
125
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Bed extender (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a cargo management feature in the
truck bed.
Note: This feature is not intended for off-road usage.
To open the bed extender into tailgate mode:
1. Pull the locking pin toward the
center of the vehicle.
2. Open the latches to release the
panels.
3. Rotate the panels toward the
tailgate.
Repeat Steps 1–3 for the other side of the bed extender.
Driver Controls
126
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
4. Connect the two panels, then rotate both knobs a quarter-turn
clockwise to secure the panels.
5. Ensure the latch rod is inserted
into the tailgate hole and the locking
pins on both sides are engaged into
their holes in the pick-up box.
6. Reverse steps for storage of the
bed extender.
Note: When the vehicle is in motion, ensure the locking pins and knobs
are fully engaged.
Note: Ensure all cargo is secured.
Note: When the vehicle is in motion, the tailgate load must not exceed
150 lb (68 kg).
Note: The bed extender should always be kept in the grocery mode or
stowed position with the tailgate closed when not being used for the
purpose of restraining cargo in the tailgate mode.
Driver Controls
127
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
To open the bed extender into grocery mode, follow Steps 1–4 by
rotating the panels away from the tailgate. Close the tailgate.
Driver Controls
128
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
KEYS
Your vehicle may be equipped with
two integrated keyhead transmitters
(IKTs). The key blade functions as a
programmed key which starts the
vehicle and unlocks/locks all the
doors. The transmitter portion
functions as the remote entry
transmitter.
Your IKTs are programmed to your vehicle; using a non-programmed key
will not permit your vehicle to start. If you lose your authorized dealer
supplied IKTs, replacement IKTs are available through your authorized
dealer. Standard SecuriLock威keys without remote entry transmitter
functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if
desired.
Always carry a spare key with you in case of an emergency.
For more information regarding programming replacement IKTs, refer to
the SecuriLock威passive anti-theft system section later in this chapter.
Note: Your vehicle’s IKTs were
issued with a security tag that
provides important vehicle key cut
information. It is recommended that
you keep the tag in a safe place for
future reference.
MYKEY姞(IF EQUIPPED)
The MyKey威feature allows you to program a restricted driving mode to
promote good driving habits. All but one of the keys programmed to the
vehicle can be activated as a MyKey威. The key will remain restricted
until MyKey威is cleared. Any remaining keys are referred to as an
“administrator key” or admin key. The admin key can be used to create a
MyKey威, program optional MyKey威settings, and clear the MyKey威
feature. When the MyKey威feature is enabled the user can use the
system check in the message center to see how many MyKeys™ and
admin keys are programmed to the vehicle, and how many total miles
have been driven with the MyKey威active.
Locks and Security
129
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
MyKey威restricted features
Standard settings – These settings cannot be changed
•
The audio system will be muted whenever Belt-Minder威is activated
until the safety belts are buckled. Refer to the Seating and Safety
Restraints chapter for a detailed description of Belt-Minder威operation.
•Low fuel warnings are displayed in the message center followed by a
chime when the vehicle has only 1/8 tank of fuel.
•If equipped, any of the following: parking aid, Blind Spot Information
System (BLIS威) with cross traffic alert and forward collision warning
systems cannot be turned off.
Optional settings – These settings can be changed
•Vehicle speed is limited to 80 mph (130 km/h). Visual warnings are
displayed followed by a chime when the vehicle speed has reached
80 mph (130 km/h).
•Visual warnings are displayed followed by a chime when a preselected
vehicle speed of 45, 55 or 65 mph (75, 90, or 105 km/h) is exceeded.
•The maximum volume of the audio system is limited to 45%. MYKEY
VOLUME LIMITED will be displayed in the radio or navigation screen
(if equipped) when attempting to exceed the limited volume.
•The AdvanceTrac威system cannot be turned off. When this optional
setting is on, the MyKey威user will not be able to deactivate the
system. Note: It may be beneficial to deactivate the AdvanceTrac威
system if the vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, or sand.
Create a MyKey威
To program MyKey威on one of the keys programmed to the vehicle,
insert the key that you want to make a MyKey威into the ignition. (For
vehicles equipped with push button start, put the intelligent access key
in the backup slot with the buttons facing out of the slot; see the
Driving chapter for the location of the backup slot.) Turn the ignition
on. Use the message center buttons to do the following:
For standard message center:
1. Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO CREATE MYKEY is displayed.
2. Press and release the RESET button. HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM
MYKEY will be displayed.
3. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until MARK THIS
AS RESTRICTED is displayed.
4. Wait until KEY RESTRICTED AT NEXT START is displayed.
Locks and Security
130
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
For optional message center:
1. At the main menu screen select SETTING then MYKEY by pressing
OK or the right arrow key.
2. Press OK to select CREATE MYKEY.
3. Hold OK as prompted until you see MARK THIS KEY AS
RESTRICTED.
MyKey威is successfully programmed. Make sure you label it so you can
distinguish it from the admin keys. Note: To program the optional
settings go to Step 2 in the Programming MyKey威optional settings
section. If your vehicle is equipped with remote start, see the Using
MyKey威with remote start systems section.
Note: The MyKey威can be cleared within the same key cycle that it was
created, otherwise a standard key (administrator key) is required to
clear the MyKey威programming. To clear all MyKeys威go to Step 2 in the
Clear MyKey威section.
Programming MyKey威optional settings
To program the optional settings, use the message center buttons to do
the following:
For standard message center:
1. Press SETUP until RESET FOR MYKEY SETTINGS is displayed.
2. Press and release the RESET button to display MyKey威setup menus.
The first menu shown is:
MYKEY MAX MPH <80 MPH> OFF
3. If you don’t want to change the maximum speed setting, press the
SETUP button to display the next menu. The remaining menus appear as
follows with the default settings shown:
MYKEY MPH TONES 45 55 65 <OFF>
MYKEY VOLUME LIMIT <ON> OFF
MYKEY ADVTRAC CTRL ON <OFF>.
4. On any of the menus press RESET to highlight your choice with the
<…>.
5. Press SETUP to enter your choice. The next optional setting will be
displayed.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until you are done changing the optional
settings.
Locks and Security
131
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
For optional message center:
1. At the main menu screen select SETTING then MYKEY by pressing
OK or the right arrow key.
2. Use the up and down arrows to get to any of the optional features.
3. Press the right arrow key to bring up the settings available for each
feature.
4. Press OK or the right arrow key to make your choice.
Clear MyKey威
To reset all MyKeys威as admin keys do the following:
For standard message center:
1. Turn the vehicle on using the admin key.
2. Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO CLEAR MYKEY is displayed.
3. Press and release the RESET button. HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM
CLEAR is displayed.
4. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until ALL MYKEYS
CLEARED is displayed.
For optional message center:
1. At the main menu screen select SETTING then MYKEY by pressing
OK or the right arrow key.
2. Press the down arrow key to get to CLEAR MYKEYS.
3. Hold OK until you see ALL MYKEYS CLEARED.
Check MyKey威system status
The vehicle system check will provide the status of the following MyKey威
parameters:
•
MYKEY MILES — This odometer only tracks distance when a MyKey威is
used. If mileage does not accumulate as expected, then the MyKey威is
not being used by the intended user. The only way to reset this odometer
to zero is by clearing MyKey威. If this odometer is lower than the last time
you checked, then the MyKey威system has been recently cleared.
•
# MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED — Indicates how many MyKeys威are
programmed to the vehicle. Can be used to detect deletion of a MyKey威.
•# ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED — Indicates how many admin keys
are programmed to the vehicle. Can be used to detect if an additional
spare key has been programmed to the vehicle
Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for MyKey威
system warnings displays.
Locks and Security
132
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Using MyKey威with remote start systems
MyKey威is not compatible with non Ford-approved aftermarket remote
start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system please see
your authorized dealer for a Ford approved remote start system.
The following information MAY help customers who choose to use a non
Ford-approved remote start system. The actions proved below do not
make MyKey威compatible with non Ford-approved remote start system,
but it MAY help you to retain some MyKey威functions.
Vehicles equipped with traditional keys
When using a non Ford-approved remote start system, the default
settings may recognize the remote start system as an additional admin
key with its associated privileges. This makes it NOT compatible with
MyKey威. The following action may help you to retain some MyKey威
functions:
1. Restart the engine when you insert a key into the ignition cylinder.
2. In addition to the key that you have already programmed as a
MyKey威, owners of vehicles equipped with traditional keys may want to
program the non Ford-approved remote start system as a MyKey威if the
remote start fob is used by the MyKey威driver.
To program a non Ford-approved remote start system as MyKey威,dothe
following:
1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
2. Remote start the vehicle using a remote start fob.
3. Follow steps 1-4 in the Create a MyKey威section.
Vehicles equipped with intelligent access key (push button start)
•It is not possible to program any remote start system as MyKey威on
vehicles equipped with an intelligent access key (push button start).
Therefore, you should treat the remote start fob as you would any
other admin key. When the vehicle is started using remote start, the
system will stall the engine when you either enter the vehicle or shift
the vehicle into gear. Prior to the engine stall, the vehicle will have
administrative privileges. When you restart the engine, the vehicle will
identify the user as an admin or MyKey威drive depending on the
settings of the actual key used to start the vehicle.
Locks and Security
133
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Note: For all vehicles, the number of MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED or
ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED that is displayed in the MyKey威system
status menus will include the non Ford-approved remote start system as
an additional key in the total count. See the Check MyKey威system
status section.
Note: For all vehicles with a non Ford-approved remote start installed, it
is possible to program all “real” keys as MyKeys威, in which case, you will
need to use your remote start system to reset all MyKeys威as admin keys
by doing the following:
1. Enter the vehicle, close all doors.
2. Remote start the vehicle using your remote start fob.
3. Follow steps 1-4 in the Clear MyKey威section.
Using MyKey威with remote start systems
MyKey威is not compatible with non Ford-approved aftermarket remote
start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system please see
your authorized dealer for a Ford-approved remote start system.
When using a Ford-approved remote start system, the default settings
will recognize the remote start system as an additional admin key with
its associated privileges. Owners of vehicles equipped with traditional
keys should program the remote start system as a MyKey威in addition to
the key that they have already programmed as a MyKey威. To program
the remote start system as MyKey威, do the following:
1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
2. Remote start the vehicle using a remote start fob.
3. Follow Steps 1-4 in the Create a MyKey威section.
Note: For all vehicles, the number of MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED or
ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED that is displayed in the MyKey威system
status menus will include the remote start system as an additional key in
the total count. See the Check MyKey威system status section.
Note: For all vehicles with remote start installed, it is possible to
program all “real” keys as MyKeys威, in which case, you will need to use
your remote start system to reset all MyKeys威as admin keys by doing
the following:
1. Enter the vehicle, close all doors.
2. Remote start the vehicle using your remote start fob.
3. Follow Steps 1-4 in the Clear MyKey威section.
Locks and Security
134
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Troubleshooting
Condition Potential Causes
Can’t create a MyKey威•Key in the ignition is already a
MyKey威.
•Key in the ignition is the last
remaining admin key (there always
has to be at least one admin key).
•SecuriLock威passive anti-theft
system is disabled or in unlimited
mode.
•Vehicle has been started using a
non Ford-approved remote start
system that is programmed as
MyKey威. Refer to Using MyKey威with
remote start systems section.
Cannot program the MyKey威
optional settings
•Key in the ignition is a MyKey威.
•No MyKeys威are programmed to the
vehicle. Refer to Create a MyKey威
section.
•Vehicle has been started using a
non Ford-approved remote start
system that is programmed as
MyKey威. Refer to Using MyKey威with
remote start systems section.
Cannot clear MyKey威•Key in the ignition is a MyKey威.
•No MyKeys威are programmed to the
vehicle. Refer to Create a MyKey威
section.
•Vehicle has been started using a
non Ford-approved remote start
system that is programmed as
MyKey威. Refer to Using MyKey威with
remote start systems section.
Lost the only admin key •Purchase a new key from your
authorized dealer.
Lost any key •For programming spare keys, refer
to the Programming spare keys
section in this chapter.
Locks and Security
135
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Condition Potential Causes
I accidentally programmed all
keys as MyKeys威
•Vehicle has a non Ford-approved
remote start system that is recognized
as an admin key. Refer to the Using
MyKey威with remote start systems
section to reset all MyKeys威as admin
keys.
No MyKey威function with (if
equipped) intelligent access
key with push button start
•An admin intelligent access key is
present at a push-and-start vehicle.
•No MyKeys威are programmed to the
vehicle. Refer to Create a MyKey威
section.
•Vehicle has been started using a
non Ford-approved remote start
system (as an admin key) then a
MyKey威is inserted without restarting
the engine.
MyKey威programmed total
includes one additional key
•Unknown key has been programmed
to the vehicle as a MyKey威.
•Vehicle is equipped with a non
Ford-approved remote start system.
Refer to Using MyKey威with remote
start systems section.
Admin keys programmed total
includes one additional key
•Unknown key has been programmed
to the vehicle as admin key.
•Vehicle is equipped with a non
Ford-approved remote start system.
Refer to Using MyKey威with remote
start systems section.
MyKey威distance does not
accumulate
•MyKey威is not being used by the
intended user.
•MyKey威system has been recently
cleared.
•Vehicles has been started using a
non Ford-approved remote start
system (as an admin key) then a
MyKey威is inserted without recycling
the MyKey威in ignition.
Locks and Security
136
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
POWER DOOR LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED)
Press control to unlock all doors.
Press control to lock all doors.
Smart locks (if equipped)
This feature prevents you from locking yourself out of the vehicle if your
key is still in the ignition.
When you open the driver’s door and you lock the vehicle with the
power door lock control, all the doors will lock, then the driver’s door
will automatically unlock reminding you that your key is still in the
ignition.
The vehicle can still be locked, with the key in the ignition, using the
manual lock button on the door, locking the driver’s door with a key, by
simultaneously pressing button 7 •8 and the 9 •0 controls on the
remote entry keypad (if equipped), or using the buttononthe
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
Autolock feature (if equipped)
The autolock feature will lock all the doors when:
•all the doors are closed,
•the ignition is in the on position,
•you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
•the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h) for greater
than two seconds.
Locks and Security
137
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
The autolock feature repeats when:
•any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the on position
and the vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and
•the vehicle then attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h) for
greater than two seconds.
Deactivating/activating autolock feature
There are four methods to enable/disable this feature:
•Through your authorized dealer,
•by using a power door unlock/lock procedure,
•using a keypad procedure (if equipped), or
•or by using the instrument cluster message center (if equipped). Refer
to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Note: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently
of the autounlock feature.
Power door lock switch autolock enable/disable procedure
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle
doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the
procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be
repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Place the key in the ignition and
turn the ignition to the on position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the on
position to the off position.
4. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the on position. The horn will chirp one time
to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. To enable/disable the autolock feature, press the unlock control, then
press the lock control. The horn will chirp once if autolock was deactivated
or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autolock was activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the off position. The horn will chirp once to
confirm the procedure is complete.
Locks and Security
138
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Keyless entry keypad autolock enable/disable procedure
1. Turn the ignition to the off
position.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry
code.
4. Press and hold the 3 •4. While holding the 3 •4pressthe7•8.
5. Release the 7 •8.
6. Release the 3 •4.
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
Autounlock feature (if equipped)
The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when:
•the ignition is in the on position, all the doors are closed, and the
vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h);
•the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the
off ) or accessory position; and
•the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being
transitioned to the off or accessory position.
Note: The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been
electronically locked before the driver door is opened.
Deactivating/activating autounlock feature
There are three methods to enable/disable this feature:
•Through your authorized dealer,
•by using a power door unlock/lock sequence,
•using a keypad procedure (if equipped)
•or by using the instrument cluster message center (if equipped). Refer
to Optional message center in the Driver controls chapter.
Note: The autounlock feature can be activated/deactivated
independently of the autolock feature.
Locks and Security
139
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Power door lock switch autounlock enable/disable procedure
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle
doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the
procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be
repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Place the key in the ignition and
turn the ignition to the on position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the on
position to the off position.
4. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the on position. The horn will chirp one time
to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. To enable/disable the autounlock feature, press the lock control, then
press the unlock control. The horn will chirp once if autounlock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autounlock was
activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the off position. The horn will chirp once to
confirm the procedure is complete.
Keyless entry keypad autounlock enable/disable procedure
1. Turn the ignition to the off
position.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry
code.
4. Press and hold the 3 •4. While holding the 3 •4, press and release
the 7 •8. While still holding the 3 •4, press and release the 7 •8a
second time.
5. Release the 3 •4.
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
Locks and Security
140
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED)
•When these locks are set, the
rear doors cannot be opened from
the inside.
•The rear doors can be opened
from the outside when the
childproof door locks are set, but
the doors are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
the rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock
for both doors.
•Move lock control up to engage
the childproof lock.
•Move lock control down to
disengage the childproof lock.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT) complies with part 15 of the
FCC rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
There are two possible types of
IKTs: vehicles with the remote start
feature will have the IKT shown.
Vehicle’s without remote start will
not have the remote start
button .
Locks and Security
141
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
The typical operating range for your IKT is approximately 33 feet
(10 meters). A decrease in operating range could be caused by:
•weather conditions,
•nearby radio towers,
•structures around the vehicle, or
•other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
The IKT allows you to:
•remotely unlock the vehicle doors.
•remotely lock all the vehicle doors.
•remotely start the engine (if equipped with remote start).
•activate the personal alarm.
•operate the illuminated entry feature.
The remote entry lock/unlock feature operates in any ignition position
except while the key is held in the start position. The panic feature
operates with the key in the off position.
If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take
ALL integrated keyhead transmitters with you to the authorized
dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.
Two step door unlocking
1. Press and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The parking
lamps and interior lamps will illuminate (refer to the Illuminated entry
feature later in this section) if the control on the overhead lamp is not
set to the off position.
2. Press and release again within three seconds to unlock the
passenger doors.
The battery saver feature will turn off the lamps 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned to the off position.
One step door unlocking
If the one step door unlocking feature is activated, press and release
once to unlock all of the doors. Note: The parking lamps and interior
lamps will illuminate (refer to the Illuminated entry feature later in this
section) if the control on the overhead lamp is not set to the off position.
Switching from two step to one step door unlocking
Your vehicle comes with two step unlocking enabled. Unlocking can be
switched between two step and one step door unlocking by pressing and
Locks and Security
142
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
holding both the and buttons simultaneously on the remote entry
transmitter for approximately four seconds. The hazard lamps will flash
twice to indicate that the vehicle has switched to one step unlocking.
Repeat the procedure to switch back to two-step unlocking.
Locking the doors
1. Press and release to lock all the doors. The parking lamps will
illuminate if all the doors are closed and locked.
2. Press and release again within three seconds to confirm that all
the doors are closed and locked. Note: The doors will lock again, the
horn will chirp once, and the parking lamps will illuminate once more.
If any of the doors are not properly closed the horn will make two quick
chirps and the parking lamps will not flash.
Car finder
Press twice within three seconds. The horn will chirp and the turn
lamps will flash. It is recommended that this method be used to locate
your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.
Sounding a panic alarm
Press to activate the alarm. Press again or turn the ignition to on to
deactivate.
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is off.
Memory feature (seat, mirrors and adjustable pedals)
The integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT) allows you to recall the
memory seat/power mirrors/adjustable pedals feature.
Press to automatically move the driver seat, power mirrors and
adjustable pedals to the desired memory position. (The seat position
corresponds to the transmitter being used).
Programming memory feature to transmitter
To activate this feature:
1. Move the driver seat, power mirrors, and adjustable pedals to the
desired positions using the associated controls.
Locks and Security
143
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
2. Press and hold control button 1
for five seconds. A tone will be
heard after two seconds confirming
memory position has been set.
Continue to hold until a second tone
is heard after five seconds.
3. Within three seconds press .
4. Wait 10 seconds, then press .
5. Repeat this procedure for
memory 2 and another transmitter if
desired.
Deprogramming memory feature from transmitter
To deactivate this feature:
1. Press and hold either the 1 or 2 control on the driver’s door for five
seconds. A tone will be heard after 1
1
⁄
2
seconds when the memory store
is done, continue to hold until a second tone is heard after five seconds.
2. Within three seconds press .
3. Repeat this procedure for another transmitter if desired.
Replacing the battery
The integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT) or intelligent access key (IA
key) uses one coin type three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent.
Integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT)
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot near
the key ring to remove the battery
cover (1).
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on
the battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
2. Carefully peel up the rubber
gasket (2) from the transmitter if it
does not come off with battery
cover.
3. Remove the old battery (3).
Note: Please refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter
batteries.
1
2
3
Locks and Security
144
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the instructions inside the IKT for the
correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery down to ensure that
the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity.
5. Snap the battery cover back onto the key.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the IKT or IA key to
become de-programmed from your vehicle. They should operate normally
after battery replacement.
Replacing lost Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs)
If you would like to have your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters
reprogrammed because you lost one, or would like to buy additional
IKTs, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all IKTs to your
authorized dealer for reprogramming.
How to reprogram your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs)
To program a new Integrated Keyhead Transmitter yourself, refer to
Programming spare keys in the SecuriLock威passive anti-theft system
section of this chapter. Note: At least two IKTs are required to perform
this procedure yourself.
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps and parking lamps illuminate when the remote entry
system is used to unlock the door(s).
The illuminated entry system will turn off the lights if:
•the ignition switch is turned to the on position, or
•the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or
•the 7 •8 and the 9 •0 controls on the keyless entry keypad are
pressed, or
•after 25 seconds of illumination.
The dome lamp control (if equipped) must not be set to the off position
for the illuminated entry system to operate.
The lights will not turn off if:
•they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
•any door is open.
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the
ignition has been turned to the off position, 10 minutes after if the dome
lamp is off, and 30 minutes after if the dome lamp switch is left on.
Locks and Security
145
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Remote start (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with the remote start feature which allows
you to start the engine from outside the vehicle. If your integrated
keyhead transmitter (IKT) has a icon, you have remote start. The
remote start feature has an extended operating range which allows you
to remote start your vehicle from a farther distance from your vehicle.
All the buttons have this increased range performance capability when
equipped with remote start.
Many states and provinces have restrictions for the use of remote start.
Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements
regarding remote start systems.
Note: Do not use remote start if your vehicle is low on fuel.
WARNING: To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use remote start if
your vehicle is parked indoors or areas that are not well
ventilated.
The remote start system will not work if:
•The ignition is in the on position.
•The alarm system is triggered.
•The feature has been disabled.
•The hood is not closed.
•Two remote vehicle starts have already been attempted within the last
hour.
•The vehicle is not in P (Park).
Starting the engine with remote start
To start the engine using remote start:
Note: Each button press must be done within 3 seconds of each other. If
this sequence is not followed the vehicle will not remote start and the
horn will not chirp.
1. Press on the IKT to lock all the doors.
2. Press two times. The exterior lamps will flash twice.
Note: On diesel engines there will be a 3 second delay before the
engine starts.
If for some reason, the system fails to start, the horn will chirp twice.
3. Insert the key in the ignition and turn to the on position before driving.
Locks and Security
146
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
The power windows will be inhibited during the remote start and the
radio will not turn on.
The parking lamps will remain on and the engine will run for 5, 10, or
15 minutes, depending on how you programmed the system. To select
the duration of the remote start system refer to Message center in the
Instrument Cluster chapter.
Extending the engine run time
To keep the engine running for another remote start duration, repeat
Steps 1 and 2 with the engine still running. If you programmed the
duration to last 10 minutes, the second 10 minutes will begin
immediately so that, for example, if the vehicle had been running from
the first remote start for five minutes, the engine will continue to run for
a total of 15 minutes. You can only extend the remote start once.
If the vehicle is remote started then remote stopped, wait at least five
seconds before remote starting a second time.
The ignition switch must be turned to the on position and then back to
the off position or allow one hour to pass before using remote start
again.
Turning the engine off after using remote start
•Press one time. The parking lamps will turn off.
You may have to be closer to the vehicle than when starting due to
ground reflection and the added noise of the running engine.
You can disable or enable the remote start system through the message
center. Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
You can use the keyless entry
keypad to lock or unlock the doors
without using a key.
The keypad can be operated with
the factory set 5–digit entry code;
this code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box, is
marked on the computer module, and is available from your authorized
dealer. You can also create your own 5–digit personal entry code.
When pressing the controls on the keypad, press the middle of the
controls to ensure a good activation.
Locks and Security
147
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Programming a personal entry code and keypad association to
memory feature
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory set code.
2. Within five seconds press the 1 •2 on the keypad.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered
within five seconds of each other.
4. To associate the entry code with a memory setting, enter a sixth digit
to indicate which driver should be set in a memory recalled by the
personal entry code:
•Pressing 1 •2 recalls Driver 1 settings.
•Pressing 3 •4 recalls Driver 2 settings.
•Pressing other keypad buttons or not pressing a keypad button as a
sixth digit does not set a driver and will not recall a memory setting.
Note: The factory-set code cannot be associated with a memory
setting.
5. The doors will again lock then unlock to confirm that your personal
entry code has been programmed to the module.
Tips:
•Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
•Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
•The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal
code.
Erasing personal code
1. Enter the factory set 5–digit code.
2. Within five seconds, press the 1 •2 on the keypad and release.
3. Press and hold the 1 •2 for two seconds. This must be done within
five seconds of completing Step 2.
Your personal code is now erased and only the factory set 5–digit code
will work.
Anti-scan feature
If an incorrect code has been entered seven times (35 consecutive button
presses), the keypad will go into an anti-scan mode. This mode disables the
keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash during this time.
Locks and Security
148
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
•one minute of keypad inactivity.
•pressing the control on the remote entry transmitter.
•the ignition is turned to the on position.
Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry
To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory set 5-digit code or your
personal code. Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each
other. The interior lamps will illuminate after entering a valid keypad
entry code.
To unlock all doors, press the 3 •4 control within five seconds.
To lock all doors, press the 7 •8 and the 9 •0 at the same time. You
do not need to enter the keypad code first. Note: The interior lamps
will turn off.
SECURILOCK姞PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
SecuriLock威passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The
use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.
The message center will display: STARTING SYSTEM FAULT.
Your vehicle comes with two coded keys; additional coded keys may be
purchased from your authorized dealer. The authorized dealer can
program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys
yourself. Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to
program the coded key.
Note: The SecuriLock威passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These
objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle. Always
take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
Locks and Security
149
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately after turning the ignition off.
Automatic disarming
Switching the ignition on with a coded key disarms the vehicle.
Replacement keys
If your keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key,
you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The
key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will
need to be programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
Programming spare keys
A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle. Only
SecuriLock威keys can be used. To program a coded key yourself, you
will need two previously programmed coded keys (keys that already
operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed key(s) readily
accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure.
If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must
bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare coded
key(s) programmed.
Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously
programmed coded key into the
ignition and turn the ignition from
the 1 (off) position to the 3 (on)
position (maintain ignition in the 3
(on) position for at least one
second, but no more than
10 seconds).
2. Turn ignition from the 3 (on)
position back to the 1 (off) position
in order to remove the first coded
key from the ignition.
Locks and Security
150
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
3. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of removing the first coded
key, insert the second previously programmed coded key into the
ignition and turn the ignition from the 1 (off) position to the 3 (on)
position (maintain ignition in the 3 (on) position for at least one second
but no more than 10 seconds).
4. Turn the ignition from the 3 (on) position back to the 1 (off) position
in order to remove the second coded key from the ignition.
5. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of removing the second
coded key, insert the new unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into
the ignition and turn the ignition from the 1 (off) position to the 3 (on)
position (maintain ignition in the 3 (on) position for at least one second,
but no more than 10 seconds). This step will program your new key to a
coded key.
6. To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat Steps 1
through 5.
If successful, the new coded key(s) will start the vehicle’s engine.
If not successful, the new coded key(s) will not start the vehicle’s engine
and you may repeat Steps 1 through 5. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle
to your authorized dealer to have the new spare key(s) programmed.
PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The perimeter anti-theft system will warn you in the event of an
unauthorized entry to your vehicle.
If there is any potential perimeter anti-theft problem with your vehicle,
ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are taken to the authorized
dealer to aid in troubleshooting.
Arming the system
When armed, this system will respond if unauthorized entry is
attempted. When unauthorized entry occurs, the system will flash the
park/turn lamps and will sound the horn.
The system is ready to arm whenever the key is removed from the
ignition. Either of the following actions will prearm the alarm system:
•Press the control on the remote entry transmitter.
•Open a door and press the power door lock control to lock all the
doors, and then close the door.
•Press and hold the 7 •8and9•0 controls on the keyless entry pad
at the same time to lock the doors (driver’s door must be closed).
Locks and Security
151
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
There is a 20 second countdown when any of the above actions occur
before the vehicle becomes armed.
Each door and the hood is armed individually, and if any are open, they
must be closed before the open entry point can enter the 20 second
countdown.
The turn signal lamps will flash once when all doors and the hood are
closed indicating the vehicle is locked and entering the 20 second
countdown.
Disarming the system
You can disarm the system by any of the following actions:
•Unlock the doors by pressing the control on your remote entry
transmitter.
•Turn the ignition to the on position with a programmed coded ignition
key.
•Unlock the doors by using your keyless entry pad.
•If using a key in the driver’s door to unlock the vehicle, a chime will
sound when you open the door and you will have 12 seconds to
disarm the alarm system using any of the actions above, otherwise the
alarm will trigger.
Pressing the power door unlock control within the 20 second prearmed
mode will return the vehicle to a disarmed state.
Triggering the anti-theft system
The armed system will be triggered if any door or hood is opened
without using the key or the remote entry transmitter.
Locks and Security
152
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
FRONT SEATS
WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to
slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to
reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop.
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original
position, pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or
collision.
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
Adjustable head restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with front row outboard head restraints that are
vertically adjustable.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in
and/or operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its
proper position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint
while the vehicle is in motion.
Seating and Safety Restraints
153
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
The adjustable head restraints
consist of :
•a trimmed energy absorbing foam
and structure (1),
•two steel stems (2),
•a guide sleeve adjust/release
button (3),
•and a guide sleeve unlock/remove
button (4).
To adjust the head restraint, do the following:
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving/riding position.
2. Raise the head restraint by pulling up on the head restraint.
3. Lower the head restraint by pressing and holding the guide sleeve
adjust/release button (3) and pushing down on the head restraint.
Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is
even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the
back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the
head restraint to its full up position.
WARNING: The adjustable head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted
when the seat is occupied.
To remove the adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment
position.
2. Simultaneously press and hold both the adjust/release button (3) and
the unlock/remove button (4), then pull up on the head restraint.
Seating and Safety Restraints
154
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
To reinstall the adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Insert the two stems (2) into the
guide sleeve collars.
2. Push the head restraint down
until it locks.
Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is
even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the
back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the
head restraint to its full up position.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, head restraints must be installed properly.
Tilting head restraints (if equipped)
The front head restraints may have a tilting feature for extra comfort. To
tilt the head restraint, do the following:
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving/riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward
towards your head to the desired
location.
After the head restraint reaches
the forward-most tilt position,
pivoting it forward again will then
release it to the rearward
un-tilted position.
Seating and Safety Restraints
155
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Front row center non-adjustable head restraint (if equipped)
Vehicle’s equipped with a front center seat will have head restraints that
are non-adjustable.
The non-adjustable head restraints
consist of:
•a trimmed energy absorbing foam
and structure (1),
•two steel stems (2),
•and two guide sleeve
unlock/remove buttons (3).
To remove the non-adjustable head restraint, do the following:
Simultaneously press and hold both
unlock/remove buttons, then pull up
on the head restraint.
To reinstall the non-adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Insert the two stems into the
guide sleeve collars.
2. Push the head restraint down
until it locks.
12
3
Seating and Safety Restraints
156
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: The non-adjustable head restraint is a safety device.
It should be installed whenever the seat is occupied.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, head restraints must be installed properly.
Front seat
•Lift the track release bar to move
the seat forward or rearward.
Make sure that the seat is
relatched into place.
•Pull the release lever handle
located on the side of the seat up
to move the seatback forward or
backward.
Seating and Safety Restraints
157
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
20 percent front seat armrest and console (if equipped)
To release the armrest and gain
access to the cupholders and
seatback storage bin, press the
button on the right-hand side of the
seat and pull the seatback down.
Pull up on the tab to open the
storage bin.
Lift up on the seatback to return it to the upright position.
To gain access to the under-seat
storage compartment (if equipped)
in your seat cushion, lift the latch to
open the lid. The lid cannot be
opened when the armrest is down.
Seating and Safety Restraints
158
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
The under-seat storage
compartment (if equipped) has a
programmable lock. Use the ignition
key to program the lock to the
compartment. Electronics may be
powered or charged using the
under-seat storage compartment
auxiliary power point. Refer to
Auxiliary power point (12VDC) in
the Drive Controls chapter.
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)
Move the front of the control up or
down to tilt the seat cushion.
Move the rear of the control up or
down to raise or lower the seat
cushion.
Move the control in the directions
shown to move the seat forward or
backward.
Seating and Safety Restraints
159
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Power recline (if equipped)
Press the control to recline the
seatback forward or rearward.
Using the power lumbar support (if equipped)
The power lumbar control is located on the outboard side of the seat.
Press one side of the control to
adjust firmness.
Press the other side of the control
to adjust softness.
Using the manual lumbar support (if equipped)
The lumbar support control is
located on the outboard side of the
seat
Turn the lumbar support forward
toward the front of the vehicle for
more support.
Turn the lumbar support backward
toward the rear of the vehicle for
less support.
Seating and Safety Restraints
160
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Heated and cooled seats (if equipped)
The controls for the climate controlled seats are located on the climate
control system.
Heated Seats
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions, must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles, or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
•Do not place heavy objects on the seat.
•Do not operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled
on the seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The heated seats will only function when the engine is running.
To operate the heated seats:
Press the heated seat button/symbol
to cycle through the various heat
settings and off. Warmer settings are
indicated by more indicator lights.
Cooled Seats
The cooled seats will only function when the engine is running.
To operate the cooled seats:
Press the cooled seat button/symbol
to cycle through the various cooling
settings and off. Cooler settings are
indicated by more indicator lights.
If the engine falls below 350 rpm while the cooled seats are on, the
feature will turn itself off and will need to be reactivated.
A/C
Seating and Safety Restraints
161
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Climate controlled seats air filter replacement (if equipped)
The heated and cooled seat system includes air filters that must be
replaced periodically. Refer to Scheduled maintenance information.
•There is a filter located under
each front seat.
•The filter can be accessed from the 2nd row foot-well area. Move the
front seats all the way to the full front and full up positions to ease
access.
To remove an air filter:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Push up on the outside rigid edge
of the filter until the tabs are
released, then rotate the air filter
toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Remove filter.
Seating and Safety Restraints
162
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
To install a filter:
1. First, position the filter in its
housing making sure that the far
forward end is all the way up in the
housing.
2. Push in on the center of the
outside edge of the filter and rotate
up into the housing until it clips into
position.
Memory seats/power mirrors/adjustable pedals (if equipped)
This system allows automatic
positioning of the driver seat, power
mirrors, and adjustable pedals to
two programmable positions.
The memory control is located on
the driver’s door.
•To program position 1, move the
memory features to the desired
positions using the associated
controls. Press and hold button 1
for at least two seconds. A chime will sound confirming that a memory
position has been set.
•To program position 2, repeat the previous procedure using button 2.
A memory position may be programmed at any time.
To program the memory feature to a remote entry transmitter, refer to
Remote entry system in the Locks and Security chapter.
A programmed memory position can be recalled:
•in any gearshift position if the ignition is not on.
•only in P (Park) or N (Neutral) if the ignition is on.
The memory positions are also recalled when you press your remote
entry transmitter (unlock) control (if the transmitter is programmed
to a memory position) or, when you enter a valid personal entry code
that is programmed to a memory position. The mirrors will move to the
programmed position and the seat will move to the easy entry position.
The seat will move to the final position when the key is in the ignition (if
easy entry feature is enabled).
Seating and Safety Restraints
163
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Easy-access/easy-out feature (if equipped)
The easy entry feature can be turned off or on through the vehicle
message center. Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
The easy entry feature automatically moves the driver’s seat 2 inches
(5 cm) forward when:
•the transmission is in P (Park)
•the key is inserted into the ignition cylinder
(If the seat is located less than 2 inches [5 cm] from the front of the seat
track, the seat will travel up to
1
⁄
4
inch (6 mm) to the front of the seat
track).
The easy out feature automatically moves the driver’s seat 2 inches
(5 cm) backward when:
•the transmission is in P (Park)
•the key is removed from the ignition cylinder
(If the seat is located less than 2 inches (5 cm) from the rear of the seat
track, the seat will travel up to
1
⁄
4
inch (6 mm) to the rear of the seat
track).
If the memory setting is programmed through the remote transmitter,
upon unlocking the door via remote entry system, the seat position will
travel to the desired memory setting less 2 inches (5 cm). Once entering
the vehicle and inserting the key in the ignition while in P (Park), the
easy entry feature will move the seat an additional 2 inches (5 cm) to
the desired memory location. See Locks and Security for activating the
memory seat feature through the remote entry system.
REAR SEATS
Non-adjustable second-row head restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with second row head restraints that are
non-adjustable.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in
and/or operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its
proper position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint
while the vehicle is in motion.
Seating and Safety Restraints
164
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Outboard head restraints (Crew
Cab)
Center head restraint (Crew Cab)
The non-adjustable second row head restraints consist of :
•a trimmed energy absorbing foam and structure (1),
•two steel stems (2),
•and two guide sleeve unlock/remove buttons (3).
Removal of the second-row non-adjustable head restraints is the same as
the front row center head restraint. Refer to Front-row center
non-adjustable head restraint in this chapter.
WARNING: The non-adjustable head restraint is a safety device.
It should be installed whenever the seat is occupied.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, head restraints must be installed properly.
Note: The SuperCab has rear outboard head restraints that are not
removable and are bolted to the back wall.
12
3
1
2
3
Seating and Safety Restraints
165
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Folding Up the Rear Seats (SuperCab)
1. Pull the control to release the
seat cushion.
2. Rotate the seat cushion up until it
locks into the vertical storage
position.
Returning the Seat to the Seating Position
WARNING: Make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
underneath the seat cushion before returning the seat cushion to
its original position, and that the seat cushion locks into place. Failure
to do so may prevent the seat from operating properly in the event of
a crash, which could increase the risk of serious injury.
1. Pull the control on the side of the seat to release the seat cushion
from the storage position.
2. Push the seat cushion down until it locks into the horizontal position.
Folding the Rear Seat Back (Crew Cab)
1. Pull forward on the control to
fold down the seatback.
2. Pull down on the handle and lift
up on the seatback to return it
to the original position.
Folding up the Rear Seat Cushion
1. Pull the control to release the seat cushion.
2. Rotate the seat cushion up until it locks into the vertical storage
position.
Seating and Safety Restraints
166
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Returning the Seat to the Seating Position
WARNING: Make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
underneath the seat cushion before returning the seat cushion to
its original position, and that the seat cushion locks into place. Failure
to do so may prevent the seat from operating properly in the event of
a crash, which could increase the risk of serious injury.
1. Pull the control on the side of the seat to release the seat cushion
from the storage position.
2. Push the seat cushion down until it locks into the horizontal position.
Rear center armrest (if equipped)
To use the armrest simply rotate it
forward from the seatback.
Rear Under Seat Storage (if equipped) (Crew Cab)
The rear seat has storage space located under the seat cushion.
Lift up the lever and flip up the seat
cushion to access the storage space
and the power point (1).
1
Seating and Safety Restraints
167
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
To remove the storage space divider,
squeeze the sides and lift it from the
storage tub.
Use your vehicle key to lock the
storage space.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
where they can be properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
Seating and Safety Restraints
168
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
WARNING: Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child
anywhere near them.
WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant
women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an
accident.
Seating and Safety Restraints
169
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, push the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
Safety belt with cinch tongue (front and rear center seat only)
The cinch tongue will slide up and down the belt webbing when the belt
is stowed or while putting safety belts on. When the lap/shoulder safety
belt is buckled, the cinch tongue will allow the lap portion to be
shortened, but pinches the webbing to keep the lap portion from getting
longer. The cinch tongue is designed to slip during a crash, so always
wear the shoulder belt properly and don’t allow any slack in either the
lap or shoulder portions.
Before you can reach and latch a combination lap and shoulder belt
(with a cinch tongue) into the buckle, you may have to lengthen the lap
belt portion of it.
Seating and Safety Restraints
170
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
1. To lengthen the lap belt, pull
some webbing out of the shoulder
belt retractor.
2. While holding the webbing below
the tongue, grasp the tip (metal
portion) of the tongue so that it is
parallel to the webbing and slide the
tongue upward.
3. Provide enough lap belt length so that the tongue can reach the
buckle.
How to fasten the cinch tongue
1. Pull the combination lap and shoulder belt from the retractor so that
the shoulder belt portion of the safety belt crosses your shoulder and
chest.
2. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If the belt is twisted, remove the twist.
3. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for your seating position
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
4. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on
the tongue.
WARNING: The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible
around the hips, not across the waist.
WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant
women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an
accident.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
Seating and Safety Restraints
171
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
While you are fastened in the safety belt, the combination lap/shoulder
belt with a cinch tongue adjusts to your movement. However, if you
brake hard, turn hard, or if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the safety belt will become locked and help reduce
your forward movement.
Restraint of pregnant women
WARNING: Always ride and drive with your seatback upright and
the safety belt properly fastened. The lap portion of the safety belt
should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips. The shoulder
portion of the safety belt should be positioned across the chest. Pregnant
women should also follow this practice. See figure below.
Pregnant women should always
wear their safety belt. The lap belt
portion of a combination lap and
shoulder belt should be positioned
low across the hips below the belly
and worn as tight as comfort will
allow. The shoulder belt should be
positioned to cross the middle of
the shoulder and the center of the
chest.
Safety belt locking modes
All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder
belts. The driver safety belt and the optional front and rear center seat
safety belt have the first locking mode described below only. All outboard
passenger and outboard rear safety belts have both types of locking
modes described as follows:
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out
too quickly. If this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing
out again in a slow and controlled manner.
Seating and Safety Restraints
172
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt or the optional
front or rear seat center safety belt.
When to use the automatic locking mode
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat is installed in a
front outboard passenger seating position or any outboard rear seating
position (if equipped). The optional front and rear seat center safety belt
have a cinch mechanism. Refer to Safety belt with cinch tongue earlier
in this chapter. Children 12 years old and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seat whenever possible. Refer to Safety restraints
for children or Safety seats for children later in this chapter.
How to use the automatic locking mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt (front safety
belt/buckle shown, rear similar).
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire belt
is pulled out.
•Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING: After any vehicle collision, the safety belt system at
all passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized
dealer to verify that the “automatic locking retractor” feature for child
seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all safety belts should be
checked for proper function.
Seating and Safety Restraints
173
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE
REPLACED if the safety belt assembly “automatic locking
retractor” feature or any other safety belt function is not operating
properly when checked by an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the
belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in
collisions.
Energy management feature
•This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management
feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.
•The front outboard safety belt systems have a retractor assembly that
is designed to pay out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is
designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest.
Safety belt pretensioner
The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are
designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body
during frontal collisions, and in side collisions and rollovers. This helps
increase the effectiveness of the safety belts. In frontal collisions, the
safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or, if the collision is of
sufficient severity, together with the front airbags.
The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt system (including
retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be replaced if the vehicle
is involved in a collision that results in the activation of the safety belt
pretensioners. Refer to the Child restraint and safety belt
maintenance section in this chapter.
WARNING: Failure to replace the safety belt assembly under
the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in
the event of a collision.
Seating and Safety Restraints
174
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Safety belt height adjustment
Your vehicle has safety belt height
adjustments at the front outboard
seating positions. Adjust the height
of the shoulder belt so the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height,
pull on the center button and slide
the height adjuster down. Release
the button and pull down on the
height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place. To adjust the belt
upward, slide the adjuster up and then pull down on the height adjuster
to make sure it is locked in place
WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety
belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, a safety belt extension
assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the
shoulder belt across the torso.
Seating and Safety Restraints
175
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
Conditions of operation
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
Belt-Minder姞
The Belt-Minder威feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the
driver that the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the
instrument cluster.
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the vehicle has
reached at least 3 mph
(5 km/h) and 1-2 minutes have
elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned to the
on position...
The Belt-Minder威feature is activated
- the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for six seconds every
30 seconds, repeating for
approximately five minutes or until
safety belt is buckled.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the safety belt
indicator light is illuminated
and the safety belt warning
chime is sounding...
The Belt-Minder威feature will not
activate.
Seating and Safety Restraints
176
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The Belt-Minder威feature will not
activate.
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts
(All statistics based on U.S. data):
Reasons given... Consider...
“Crashes are rare events” 36700 crashes occur every day. The
more we drive, the more we are
exposed to “rare” events, even for
good drivers. 1in4ofuswillbe
seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
“I’m not going far” 3of4fatal crashes occur within 25
miles (40 km) of home.
“Belts are uncomfortable” We design our safety belts to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable -
try different positions for the safety
belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as
possible; this can improve comfort.
“I was in a hurry” Prime time for an accident.
Belt-Minder威reminds us to take a few
seconds to buckle up.
“Safety belts don’t work” Safety belts, when used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45% in cars, and by
60% in light trucks.
“Traffic is light” Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when
no other vehicles are around.
“Belts wrinkle my clothes” Possibly, but a serious crash can do
much more than wrinkle your clothes,
particularly if you are unbelted.
Seating and Safety Restraints
177
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Reasons given... Consider...
“The people I’m with don’t
wear belts”
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4
times more often in vehicles with
TWO or MORE people. Children and
younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
“I have an airbag” Airbags offer greater protection when
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags
are not designed to inflate in rear and
side crashes or rollovers.
“I’d rather be thrown clear” Not a good idea. People who are
ejected are 40 times more likely
to DIE. Safety belts help prevent
ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR
CRASH”.
WARNING: Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a
latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt-Minder威chime. To
do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle’s airbag
system.
Deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder姞feature (Driver only)
Note: If you are using MyKey威, the Belt-Minder威cannot be disabled.
Also, if the Belt-Minder威has been previously disabled, it will be
re-enabled during the use of MyKey威. Refer to MyKey威in the Locks and
Security chapter.
The Belt-Minder威feature can be deactivated/activated by performing the
following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that the following conditions
are met:
•the parking brake is set
•the gearshift is in P (Park)
•the ignition switch is in the off position
•all vehicle doors are closed
•the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled
•the parking lamps/headlamps are in the off position
Seating and Safety Restraints
178
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your
Belt-Minder威, this system is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you
leave the Belt-Minder威system activated for yourself and others who
may use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not
deactivate/activate the Belt-Minder威feature while driving the vehicle.
Belt-Minder威activation and deactivation procedure
Read Steps1-5thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the on position. (DO NOT START THE
ENGINE)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (approximately one
minute)
•Step 3 must be completed within 30 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times at a moderate speed,
ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state.
•After Step 3 is complete, the safety belt warning light will be turned
on for three seconds.
•If Step 4 does not occur within 10 seconds at the end of Step 3,
Belt-Minder威will automatically exit programming mode without
changing its enable status.
4. Within seven seconds of the light turning on, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt.
•This will disable the Belt-Minder威feature if it is currently enabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning light will flash four times per
second for three seconds.
•This will enable the Belt-Minder威feature if it is currently disabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning light will flash four times per
second for three seconds, followed by three seconds with the light off,
then followed by the safety belt warning light flashing four times per
second for three seconds again.
After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is
complete.
Seating and Safety Restraints
179
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Important SRS precautions
The SRS is designed to work with
the safety belt to help protect the
driver and right front passenger
from certain upper body injuries.
Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly;
thereisariskofinjuryfroma
deploying airbag.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
WARNING: The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches
(25 cm) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.
Seating and Safety Restraints
180
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Never place your arm over the airbag module as a
deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
•Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
•Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.
WARNING: Do not put anything on or over the airbag module.
Placing objects on or over the airbag inflation area may cause
those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso
causing serious injury.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer
protection to an occupant in the center front seating position.
WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of
the vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure
and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the
vehicle.
WARNING: Additional equipment such as snowplow equipment
may effect the performance of the airbag sensors increasing the
risk of injury. Please refer to the Body Builders Layout Book for
instructions about the appropriate installation of additional equipment.
Children and airbags
For additional important safety information, read all information on
safety restraints in this guide.
Children must always be properly restrained. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Seating and Safety Restraints
181
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: An infant in a rear-facing seat faces a high risk of
serious or fatal injuries from a deploying passenger airbag. Rear
facing infant seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats, unless
the passenger airbag is turned off. See Passenger airbag ON/OFF
switch.
WARNING: Front seating positions only: If seating two adults
and a child, Ford recommends properly restraining the child in
the center front seating position, but only if doing so will not interfere
with driving the vehicle. This arrangement provides lap and shoulder
belt and airbag protection for adult occupants and an attachment
method for a child restraint. If the child seat interferes with driving the
vehicle and the child restraint is forward-facing, the child may be
restrained in the passenger seat. Move the seat as far rearward as
possible to minimize the likelihood of interaction with the front
passenger airbag. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an
active airbag. Always properly restrain all occupants, including the
child in an appropriate child seat or booster.
How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?
The airbag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains
sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
The fact that the airbags did not
inflate in a collision does not mean
that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces
were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation. Airbags are
designed to inflate in frontal and
near-frontal collisions, not rollover,
side-impact, or rear-impacts.
Seating and Safety Restraints
182
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
airbag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, it may also
cause minor abrasions, swelling or temporary hearing loss. Because
airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk
of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly
restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly
restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
WARNING: Several air bag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not
function again and must be replaced immediately. If the air
bag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
The SRS consists of:
•driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators and
airbags),
•seat-mounted side airbags (if equipped) . Refer to Seat-mounted side
airbag system later in this chapter
Seating and Safety Restraints
183
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•Safety Canopy威System (if equipped). Refer to Safety Canopy威
System later in this chapter.
•one or more impact and safing sensors,
•a readiness light and tone
•and the electrical wiring which connects the components.
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the
supplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the impact
sensors), the system wiring, the airbag system readiness light, the airbag
backup power and the airbag ignitors.
Seat-mounted side airbag system (if equipped)
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or
near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front
seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of
accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side
airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag
could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag SRS, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag. See an authorized dealer.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle should always wear
their safety belts even when an airbag SRS is provided.
Seating and Safety Restraints
184
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
How does the side airbag system work?
The design and development of the
side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags.
The side airbag system consists of
the following:
•An inflatable bag (airbag) with a
gas generator concealed behind
the outboard bolster of the driver
and front passenger seatbacks.
•A special seat cover designed to
allow airbag deployment.
•The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used
for the front airbags.
•Crash sensors located on the front doors.
•One crash sensor located on each side of the c-pillar (Crew cab and
SuperCab only).
Side airbags, in combination with safety belts, can help reduce the risk of
severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision.
The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the side affected by
the collision will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between
the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided
occupants in side impact collisions.
The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral
deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit
that initiates airbag inflation.
Seating and Safety Restraints
185
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that
something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were not of
the type sufficient to cause activation. Side airbags are designed to inflate in
side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or near-frontal
collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration.
WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the side
airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again.
The side airbag system
(including the seat) must be
inspected and serviced by an
authorized dealer. If the airbag
is not replaced, the unrepaired
area will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
Safety Canopy姞System (if equipped)
WARNING: Do not place
objects or mount equipment
on or near the headliner at the
siderail that may come into contact
with a deploying Safety Canopy威.
Failure to follow these instructions
may increase the risk of personal
injury in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The Safety
Canopy威could injure you as it deploys from the headliner.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
Safety Canopy威System, its fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or
the headliner on a vehicle containing a Safety Canopy威. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Seating and Safety Restraints
186
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle including the driver
should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS
and Safety Canopy威System is provided.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place
objects in the deployment path of the inflatable Safety Canopy威.
How does the Safety Canopy姞System work?
The design and development of the
Safety Canopy system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags (including the Safety
Canopy).
The Safety Canopy system consists
of the following:
•An inflatable curtain with a gas
generator concealed behind the
headliner between the A and C
pillar.
•A headliner designed to flex open
above the side doors to allow Safety Canopy deployment.
•The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used
for the front airbags.
•Two crash sensors located on the C-pillar (one on each side)
(SuperCab and Crew Cab only).
•Crash sensors located on the front doors.
•Rollover sensor in the restraints control module (RCM).
Seating and Safety Restraints
187
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
The Safety Canopy system, in combination with safety belts, can help
reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact
collision or rollover event.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in
the second row seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere with children
restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is
designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along
the side window opening.
The Safety Canopy system is designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the RCM to initiate Safety
Canopy inflation or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is
detected by the rollover sensor.
The Safety Canopy is mounted to roof side-rail sheet metal, behind the
headliner, above each row of seats. The Safety Canopy is designed to
inflate between the side window area and occupants to further enhance
protection provided in side impact collisions and rollover events.
The fact that the Safety Canopy did not activate in a collision does not
mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the
forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. The Safety
Canopy is designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions or rollover
events, not in rear impact, frontal or near-frontal collisions, unless the
collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration or rollover likelihood.
WARNING: Several Safety
Canopy system components
get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the Safety Canopy system has deployed, the
Safety Canopy will not function again unless replaced. The
Safety Canopy system (including the A, B, C, and D pillar trim and
headliner) must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. If
the Safety Canopy is not replaced, it will not function again, which will
increase the risk of injury in a future collision.
Seating and Safety Restraints
188
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
side airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
•The readiness light (same light as for front airbag system) will either
flash or stay lit.
•The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
•A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may
not function properly in the event of a collision.
SOS Post-Crash Alert System™
The system automatically flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the
horn three times at four second intervals in the event of a serious impact
that deploys an airbag (front, side, side curtain [if equipped] or Safety
Canopy威[if equipped]) or the safety belt pretensioners.
The system can be turned off when any one of the following actions are
taken by the driver or any other person:
•pressing the hazard control button,
•or pressing the panic button on the remote entry transmitter.
The feature will continue to operate until the vehicle runs out of power.
Seating and Safety Restraints
189
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Passenger airbag ON/OFF switch (if equipped)
WARNING: An airbag
ON/OFF switch may be
installed in this vehicle. Before
driving, always look at the face of
the switch to be sure the switch is
in the proper position in
accordance with these instructions
and warnings. Failure to put the
switch in a proper position can
increase the risk of serious injury
or death in a collision.
Turning the passenger airbag off
1. Insert the ignition key, turn the
switch to OFF position and hold in
the OFF position while removing the
key.
2. When the ignition is turned to the
on position the “pass airbag off”
light illuminates briefly, momentarily
shuts off and then turns back on.
This indicates that the passenger
airbag is deactivated.
WARNING: If the light fails to illuminate when the passenger air
bag switch is in the OFF position and the ignition switch is in
on, have the passenger air bag switch serviced at your authorized
dealer immediately.
WARNING: In order to avoid inadvertent activation of the
switch, always remove the ignition key from the passenger air
bag ON/OFF switch.
WARNING: An infant in a rear-facing seat faces a high risk of
serious or fatal injuries from a deploying passenger airbag. Rear
facing infant seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats, unless
the passenger airbag is turned off.
Seating and Safety Restraints
190
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Turning the passenger airbag back on
The passenger airbag remains off until you turn it back on.
1. Insert the ignition key and turn
the switch to ON.
2. The “pass airbag off” light will
briefly illuminate when the ignition
is turned to on. This indicates that
the passenger airbag is operational.
WARNING: If the “pass airbag off” light is illuminated when the
passenger airbag switch is in the ON position and the ignition
switch is in on, have the passenger airbag switch serviced at your
authorized dealer immediately.
The passenger side airbag should always be ON (the “pass airbag off”
light should not be illuminated) unless the passenger is a person who
meets the requirements stated either in Category 1, 2 or 3 of the
NHTSA/Transport Canada deactivation criteria which follows.
WARNING: The safety belts for the driver and right front
passenger seating positions have been specifically designed to
function together with the airbags in certain types of crashes. When
you turn OFF your airbag, you not only lose the protection of the
airbag, you also may reduce the effectiveness of your safety belt
system, which was designed to work with the airbag. If you are not a
person who meets the requirements stated in the NHTSA/Transport
Canada deactivation criteria turning OFF the airbag can increase the
risk of serious injury or death in a collision.
Seating and Safety Restraints
191
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: If your vehicle has rear seats, always transport
children who are 12 and younger in the rear seat. Always use
safety belts and child restraints properly. DO NOT place a child in a
rear facing infant seat in the front seat unless your vehicle is equipped
with an airbag ON/OFF switch and the passenger airbag is turned OFF.
This is because the back of the infant seat is too close to the inflating
airbag and the risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the airbag
inflates is substantial.
The vast majority of drivers and passengers are much safer with an
airbag than without. To do their job and reduce the risk of life
threatening injuries, airbags must open with great force, and this force
can pose a potentially deadly risk in some situations, particularly when a
front seat occupant is not properly buckled up. The most effective way
to reduce the risk of unnecessary airbag injuries without reducing the
overall safety of the vehicle is to make sure all occupants are properly
restrained in the vehicle, especially in the front seat. This provides the
protection of safety belts and permits the airbags to provide the
additional protection they were designed to provide. If you choose to
deactivate your airbag, you are losing the very significant risk reducing
benefits of the airbag and you are also reducing the effectiveness of the
safety belts, because safety belts in modern vehicles are designed to
work as a safety system with the airbags.
Read all airbag warning labels in the vehicle as well as the other
important airbag instructions and warnings in this Owner’s Guide.
NHTSA deactivation criteria (excluding Canada)
1. Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat
because:
•the vehicle has no rear seat;
•the vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing
infant seat; or
•the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s
physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front so that
the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
Seating and Safety Restraints
192
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
2. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat
because:
•the vehicle has no rear seat;
•although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever
possible, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front
because no space is available in the rear seat(s) of the vehicle; or
•the child has a medical condition which, according to the child’s
physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
3. Medical condition. A passenger has a medical condition which,
according to his or her physician:
•causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger;
and
•
makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater
than the potential harm from turning OFF the airbag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or windshield in a crash.
WARNING: This vehicle has special energy management safety
belts for the driver and right front passenger. These particular
belts are specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the
risk of injury in a collision. The energy management safety belt is
designed to give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents
to reduce concentration of force on an occupant’s chest and reduce the
risk of certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a
crash, if the airbag is turned OFF, this energy management safety belt
might permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to
incur a serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the
heavier the occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the airbag is
turned ON for any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA
deactivation criteria.
Transport Canada deactivation criteria (Canada Only)
1. Infant: An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat
because:
•my vehicle has no rear seat;
•the rear seat in my vehicle cannot accommodate a rear-facing infant
seat; or
•the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s
physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can monitor the infant’s condition.
Seating and Safety Restraints
193
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
2. Child age 12 or under: A child age 12 or under must ride in the
front seat because:
•my vehicle has no rear seat;
•although children age 12 and under ride in the rear seat whenever
possible, children age 12 and under have no option but to sometimes
ride in the front seat because rear seat space is insufficient; or
•the child has a medical condition that, according to the child’s
physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can monitor the child’s condition.
3. Medical condition: A passenger has a medical condition that,
according to his or her physician:
•poses a special risk for the passenger if the airbag deploys; and
•makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag deployment
greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the airbag and
experiencing a crash without the protection offered by the airbag
WARNING: This vehicle has special energy management safety
belts for the driver and right front passenger. These particular
belts are specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the
risk of injury in a collision. The energy management safety belt is
designed to give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents
to reduce concentration of force on an occupant’s chest and reduce the
risk of certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a
crash, if the airbag is turned OFF, this energy management safety belt
might permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to
incur a serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the
heavier the occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the airbag is
turned ON for any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA
deactivation criteria.
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles
See authorized dealer. Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified
personnel.
Seating and Safety Restraints
194
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.
Important child restraint precautions
WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in
a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight.
Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The
Recommendations for Safety Restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety
organizations or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford
recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) and consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and
properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station
and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the
internet at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local
St. John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further
information, contact your provincial ministry of transportation, your
local St. John Ambulance office at http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport
Canada at 1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly
restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height, age,
and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to
your child.
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child size, height, weight, or
age
Recommended
restraint type
Infants
or
toddlers
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or
less (generally age four or
younger)
Use a child safety seat
(sometimes called an
infant carrier,
convertible seat, or
toddler seat).
Seating and Safety Restraints
195
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child size, height, weight, or
age
Recommended
restraint type
Small
children
Children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a child safety
seat (generally children who are
less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than
age four (4) and less than age
twelve (12), and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and
upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by your child
restraint manufacturer)
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
Larger
children
Children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a
belt-positioning booster seat
(generally children who are at
least 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall or greater than 80 lb (36 kg)
or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended
by child restraint manufacturer)
Use a vehicle safety
belt having the lap belt
snug and low across the
hips, shoulder belt
centered across the
shoulder and chest, and
seatback upright.
•You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and
toddlers in the U.S. and Canada.
•Many states and provinces require that small children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 ft 9 in.
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state or
provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of
children in your vehicle.
•When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years of
age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in a front seating position.
Seating and Safety Restraints
196
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Restraint
Type
Child
Weight
Use any attachment method as indicated
below by “X”
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and
top
tether
anchor)
LATCH
(lower
anchors
only)
Safety
belt
and
top
tether
anchor
Safety
belt and
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
Safety
belt
only
Rear
facing
child seat
Up to
48 lb
(21 kg)
X
Forward
facing
child seat
Up to
48 lb
(21 kg)
X
Forward
facing
child seat
Over
48 lb
(21 kg)
X
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
vehicle seat all the way back. When possible, all children age 12 and
under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating
position, properly restrain the largest child in the front seat.
WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and
warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child’s size,
height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child’s height, age, or weight or does not
properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death.
Seating and Safety Restraints
197
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision, which may result in serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child.
They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or
death in a collision.
WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster
seat. These objects may become projectiles in a collision or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets
unattended in your vehicle.
Transporting children
Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their age, height and weight. All children are shaped
differently. The child height, age and weight thresholds provided are
recommendations or the minimum requirements of law. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) provides education and
training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrained in
the correct restraint system. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and your
pediatrician to make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and
properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station and
CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the internet
at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local St. John
Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information,
contact your provincial ministry of transportation, your local St. John
Ambulance office at http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport Canada at
1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca).
Seating and Safety Restraints
198
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult
passengers in your vehicle.
If the child is the proper height, age, and weight (as specified by your
child safety seat or booster manufacturer), fits the restraint and can be
restrained properly, then restrain the child in the child safety seat or
with the belt-positioning booster. Remember that child seats and
belt-positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of
different heights, ages and weights. Children who are too large for child
safety seats or belt-positioning boosters (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always properly wear safety belts.
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Infant and/or toddler seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
When installing a child safety seat:
•Review and follow the information
presented in the Airbag
supplemental restraint system
(SRS) section in this chapter.
•Carefully follow all of the
manufacturer’s instructions
included with the safety seat you
put in your vehicle. If you do not
install and use the safety seat
properly, the child may be injured
in a sudden stop or collision.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the vehicle seat all the
way back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
Seating and Safety Restraints
199
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Installing child safety seats with automatic locking mode
combination lap and shoulder belts (front passenger and rear
outboard seating positions)
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
When installing a child safety seat with combination lap/shoulder belts:
•Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position.
•
Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and
feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle.
•Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
•Place vehicle seat back in upright position.
•This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
Seating and Safety Restraints
200
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Installing the child safety seat
Perform the following steps when installing the child seat in the
outboard combination lap/shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,
the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
WARNING: An airbag can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Child seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats, unless
the passenger airbag switch is turned off, See Passenger airbag on/off
switch.
WARNING: Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in
the front seats unless the passenger airbag switch is turned off.
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
Seating and Safety Restraints
201
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear and feel the latch engage.
Make sure the tongue is latched
securely by pulling on it.
5. Put the safety belt in the
automatic locking mode. To do so,
grasp the shoulder portion of the
belt and pull downward until all of
the belt is pulled out.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it
retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and 6.
Seating and Safety Restraints
202
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
8. Remove remaining slack from the
belt. Force the seat down with extra
weight, e.g., by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in
order to force slack from the belt.
This is necessary to remove the
remaining slack that will exist once
the additional weight of the child is
added to the child restraint. It also
helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child seat to the
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
towards the buckle will additionally
help to remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the
child seat is equipped). Refer to
Attaching child safety seats with
tether straps later in this chapter.
10. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward. There should be no
more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) of movement for proper installation.
11. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for
referral to a CPST.
Seating and Safety Restraints
203
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Installing child safety seats in cinch tongue combination lap and
shoulder belt seating positions (All front center and Super/Crew
cab rear center positions)
The belt webbing below the tongue is the lap portion of the combination
lap/shoulder belt, and the belt webbing above the tongue is the shoulder
belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING: Always use both lap and shoulder safety belt in the
Regular Cab center seating position if applicable.
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,
the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.
1. Position the child safety seat in
the center seat.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. If
you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move
seat all the way back.
WARNING: Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in
front of an active airbag.
2. Slide the tongue up the webbing.
Seating and Safety Restraints
204
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
3. While holding both shoulder and
lap portions next to the tongue,
route the tongue and webbing
through the child seat according to
the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions. Be sure that the belt
webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle for that seating
positions until you hear a snap and
feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely latched to the buckle by
pulling on the tongue.
5. Remove remaining slack from the
belt. Force the seat down with extra
weight, e.g., by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in
order to force slack from the belt.
This is necessary to remove the
remaining slack that will exist once
the additional weight of the child is
added to the child restraint. It also
helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child seat to the vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
towards the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from
the belt.
Seating and Safety Restraints
205
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
6. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). Refer to
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter.
7. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward. There should be no
more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) of
movement for proper installation.
8. Ford recommends checking with
a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for
referral to a CPST.
Attaching child safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) attachments
The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two (2)
lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet
(called the “seat bight”) and one (1) top tether anchor located behind
that seating position. Your vehicle is not equipped with the lower anchor
points in the seat bight. For this vehicle use the vehicle safety belt and
upper tether to secure a child seat. See Attaching child safety seats
with tether straps and Recommendations for attaching safety
restraints for children in this chapter for more information.
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring
point called the top tether anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the manufacturer of your
child seat for information about ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a
longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach
the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle.
The passenger seats of your vehicle may be equipped with built-in tether
strap anchors located behind the seats as described below.
The tether anchors in your vehicle may be straps on the seatback or an
anchor bracket mounted to the body shell on the back panel.
Seating and Safety Restraints
206
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
The SuperCab rear seat has three straps behind the top of the seat back
that function as both routing loops for the tether straps and anchor loops.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
•F-Series Regular Cab
•F-Series SuperCab
•F-Series Crew Cab
Seating and Safety Restraints
207
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown.
The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other
than the correct tether anchor.
Once the child safety seat has been installed using the safety belt, you
can attach the top tether strap.
Tether strap attachment
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, other wise route
the tether strap over the top of the seatback. If the top of the safety seat
hits the head restraint, raise the head restraint to let the child seat fit
further rearward.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position.
3. You may need to pull the seatback forward to access the tether
anchors. Make sure the seat is locked in the upright position before
installing the child seat. Refer to the Rear folding seat system with load
floor section in this chapter for information on how to operate the rear
seats.
4. Remove tether cover.
Seating and Safety Restraints
208
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
5. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown.
•Front seats (Regular Cab)
•Rear seats (Crew Cab)
If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat may not be
retained properly in the event of a collision.
6. Refer to the Installing child safety seats with automatic locking
mode combination lap and shoulder belts and Installing child safety
seats in cinch tongue combination lap and shoulder belt seating
positions sections of this chapter for further instructions to secure the
child safety seat.
7. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the
child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends
its use.
Seating and Safety Restraints
209
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Tether strap attachment (rear SuperCab only)
There are three loops of webbing just above the back of the rear seat
(along the bottom edge of the rear window) in the SuperCab. These
loops are to be used as both routing loops and anchor loops for up to
three child safety seat tether straps.
These straps may be secured below the back of the seat with rubber
bands. To access, reach below the back of the seat and pull tether loop
out of the rubber band securing it.
Many tether straps cannot be tightened if the tether strap is hooked to
the loop directly behind the child seat. To provide a tight tether strap:
1. Route the tether strap through
the loop directly behind the child
seat.
2. Attach the strap hook onto the
loop behind an adjacent seating
position.
Seating and Safety Restraints
210
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
3. Install the child safety seat tightly
using the vehicle belts. Follow the
instructions in this chapter.
4. Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
A single loop can be used to route and anchor more than one child seat.
For example, the center loop can be used as a routing loop for a child
safety seat in the center rear seat and as an anchoring loop for child
seats installed in the outboard rear seats.
Child booster seats
The belt-positioning booster (booster seat) is used to improve the fit of
the vehicle safety belt. Children outgrow a typical child seat (e.g.,
convertible or toddler seat) when they weigh about 40 lb (18 kg) and are
around four (4) years of age. Consult your child safety seat owner guide
for the weight, height, and age limits specific to your child safety seat.
Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child,
remains appropriate for their weight, height and age AND if properly
secured to the vehicle.
Although the lap/shoulder belt will provide some protection, children
who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap/shoulder
belts to fit properly, and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt
could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash. To improve the fit of
both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child
safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt-positioning
booster.
Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap/shoulder safety belts fit
better. They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips
and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion, while
minimizing slouching. Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit
better and more comfortably. Try to keep the belt near the middle of the
shoulder and across the center of the chest. Moving the child closer (a
few centimeters or inches) to the center of the vehicle, but remaining in
the same seating position, may help provide a good shoulder belt fit.
Seating and Safety Restraints
211
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they reach a
height of at least 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall (around age eight to
age twelve and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) or upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions when seated without a booster seat:
•Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat cushion?
•Can the child sit without
slouching?
•Does the lap belt rest low across
the hips?
•Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
•Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Seating and Safety Restraints
212
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Types of booster seats
There are generally two types of belt-positioning booster seats: backless
and high back. Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle
lap/shoulder belt.
•Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield. If a vehicle seating position
has a low seat back or no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (as
measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this
case, move the backless booster
to another seating position with a
higher seat back or head restraint and lap/shoulder belts, or consider
using a high back booster seat.
•High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
Seating and Safety Restraints
213
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that
keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the
stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and
rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings below compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck
and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings below
also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child’s
hips.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster
seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is generally best to use a
booster seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat.
Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not
stay positioned on the shoulder during use.
Seating and Safety Restraints
214
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
Child restraint and safety belt maintenance
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically
to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the
vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears
or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety
seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be
inspected after a collision. Refer to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint. Ford Motor Company recommends that all
safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be
replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer
finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate
properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in
use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Interior in the Cleaning
chapter.
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the
safety belt assembly or child restraint system under the above
conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a
collision.
Seating and Safety Restraints
215
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in
the various driving conditions that
are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility
vehicles and trucks are not designed
for cornering at speeds as high as
passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed
to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions.
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must:
•Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
•Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
•Keep tires properly inflated;
•Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
•Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts and children/infants must use
appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Study your owner’s guide and any supplements for specific information
about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and additional
precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
216
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS
Four-wheel drive (4WD) system (if equipped)
A vehicle equipped with 4WD (when selected) has the ability to use all
four wheels to power itself. This increases traction which may enable you
to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional
two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case or power
transfer unit. 4WD vehicles allow you to select different drive modes as
necessary. Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures
can be found in the Driving chapter. Information on transfer case
maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this information
before you operate your vehicle.
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4WD
while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting
sound. These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to
speed and is not cause for concern.
WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD
vehicles. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate better than
two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won’t stop any
faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
217
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
How Your Vehicle Differs from Other Vehicles
SUVs and trucks can differ from
some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may
be:
•Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity and to allow it
to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
•Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines and drive
over the crest of a hill without
getting hung up or damaging
underbody components. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer
wheelbase.
•Narrower – to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, SUVs and trucks often
will have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that make your
vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
218
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
•Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or
temporary use spare tires, light truck or “LT” type tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as
defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1
1
⁄
2
) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
219
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Temperature A B C
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
•Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
•Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
•Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
•Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
•Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
•kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
220
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
•Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
•Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
•B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
•Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
•Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
•Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
•Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation
or “blowout”, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased
risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It
also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of
vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure and not appear to be flat!
Tires, Wheels and Loading
221
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a
digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Note: Do not reduce tire pressure to change the ride characteristics of
the vehicle. If you do not maintain the inflation pressure at the levels
specified by Ford, your vehicle may experience a condition known as
“shimmy”. Shimmy is a severe vibration and oscillation in the steering
wheel after the vehicle travels over a bump or dip in the road that does
not dampen out by itself. Shimmy may result from significant
under-inflation of the tires, improper tires (load range, size, or type), or
vehicle modifications such as lift-kits. In the event that your vehicle
experiences shimmy, you should slowly reduce speed by either lifting off
the accelerator pedal or lightly applying the brakes. The shimmy will
cease as the vehicle speed decreases.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed
to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
222
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see the Dissimilar spare
tire/wheel information section for description): Store and maintain at
60 psi (4.15 bar). For full-size and dissimilar spare tires (see the
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information section for description): Store
and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as
shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
223
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Tire Inflation Information
WARNING: An inflated tire and rim can be very dangerous if
improperly used, serviced or maintained. To reduce the risk of
serious injury, never attempt to re-inflate a tire which has been run flat
or seriously under-inflated without first removing the tire from the
wheel assembly for inspection. Do not attempt to add air to tires or
replace tires or wheels without first taking precautions to protect
persons and property.
All tires with Steel Carcass Plies (if equipped):
This type of tire utilizes steel cords in the sidewalls. As such, they
cannot be treated like normal light truck tires. Tire service, including
adjusting tire pressure, must be performed by personnel trained,
supervised and equipped according to Federal Occupational Safety and
Health Administration (OSHA) regulations. For example, during any
procedure involving tire inflation, the technician or individual must
utilize a remote inflation device, and ensure that all persons are clear of
the trajectory area.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
224
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Stay out of the trajectory (1) as indicated in the
illustration.
TIRE CARE
Inspecting your tires and wheel valve stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts
that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace
the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and
other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be
repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show
signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
225
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or “wear bars”, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear
on the tire when the tread is worn
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to
the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be
replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
WARNING: Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
226
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire Replacement Requirements
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found
on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or the Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these labels then you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If you
have questions regarding tire replacement, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
227
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions
listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure
indicated, re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (138 kPa)
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the tire wheel
assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (138 kPa) greater than the
maximum pressure, an authorized dealer or other tire service
professional should do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the tire
wheel assembly.
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels are not designed to be
used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system(if
equipped).
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some
component of the TPMS may be damaged(if equipped).
Tires, Wheels and Loading
228
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Safety Practices
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do
not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and
cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
•Observe posted speed limits
•Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
•Avoid potholes and objects on the road
•Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your vehicle
seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
229
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Tire Rotation
WARNING: If the tire label shows different tire pressures for
the front and rear tires and the vehicle is equipped with TPMS
(tire pressure monitoring system), then the settings for the TPMS
sensors need to be updated. Always perform the TPMS reset procedure
after tire rotation. If the system is not reset, it may not provide a low
tire pressure warning when necessary. See the TPMS reset procedure
in this chapter.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire and
wheel assembly. A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire or
wheel that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires
and wheels. If you have a dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly, it is
intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire
rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
Scheduled Maintenance chapter) will help your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance and longer tire life.
•Rear-wheel drive (RWD)
vehicles/Four-wheel drive (4WD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
230
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•Dual rear wheel (DRW) vehicles –
Six tire rotation
If your vehicle is equipped with dual
rear wheels it is recommended that
the front and rear tires (in pairs) be
rotated only side to side. We do not
recommend splitting up the dual
rear wheels. Rotate them side to
side as a set/pair. After tire rotation,
inflation pressures must be adjusted
for the tires new positions in
accordance with vehicle
requirements.
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
231
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for service on cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is
designated by either ETRTO (European Tire and Rim Technical
Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
232
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
owner’s guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M 81 mph (130 km/h)
N 87 mph (140 km/h)
Q 99 mph (159 km/h)
R 106 mph (171 km/h)
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
U 124 mph (200 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
W 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y 186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
233
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
•Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1
1
⁄
2
) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
•Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
•Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
234
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than
the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined
as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
235
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades do
not apply to this type of tire.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general,
the larger the number, the wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the tire label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Vehicle loading – with and without a trailer section.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
236
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure
should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge,
see Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain
your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
Tires, Wheels and Loading
237
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changing Tires with a TPMS
Note: Each road tire is equipped
with a tire pressure sensor located
inside the tire and wheel assembly
cavity. The pressure sensor is
attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the
tire and is not visible unless the tire
is removed. Care must be taken
when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.
It is recommended that you always
have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using
an accurate tire gauge, refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road
tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The low tire
pressure warning light will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low.
Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under-inflated and need to be
inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the light
turns on and a short time later turns off, your tire pressure still needs to
be checked. Visit www.checkmytires.org for additional information.
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare,
the TPMS will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged
road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
238
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
To restore the full functionality of the tire pressure monitoring system,
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with a
TPMS in this section.
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is
no longer capable of functioning as intended. Refer to the following chart
for information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system:
Low tire
pressure
warning light
Possible cause Customer action required
Solid warning
light
Tire(s)
under-inflated
1. Make sure tires are at the proper
pressure. See Inflating your tires in
this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label (located
on the edge of driver’s door or the
B-Pillar), the vehicle must be driven
for at least two minutes over 20 mph
(32 km/h) before the light turns off.
Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel/tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle to
restore system functionality. For a
description on how the system
functions, refer to When your
temporary spare tire is installed in
this section.
TPMS
malfunction
If the tires are properly inflated and
the spare tire is not in use but the
light remains on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Tire rotation
without sensor
training
On vehicles with different front and
rear tire pressures, the TPMS must be
retrained following every tire rotation.
See Tire rotation in this chapter.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
239
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Low tire
pressure
warning light
Possible cause Customer action required
Flashing warning
light
Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel/tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle to
restore system functionality. For a
description on how the system
functions, refer to When your
temporary spare tire is installed in
this section.
TPMS
malfunction
If the tires are properly inflated and
the spare tire is not in use but the
light remains on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in
each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
overnight with the outside temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
(21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower
pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower
than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning
light for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is on,
visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or more tires
are flat, repair as necessary.) Check air pressure in the road tires. If any
tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location
where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
240
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
TPMS Reset Procedure
WARNING: To determine the required pressure(s) for your
vehicle, refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating
position), or Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. See Load Carrying for more information.
Note: The TPMS reset procedure needs to be performed after each tire
rotation on vehicles that require different recommended tire pressures in
the front tires as compared to the rear tires.
Overview
To provide the vehicle’s load carrying capability, some vehicles require
different recommended tire pressures in the front tires as compared to
the rear tires. The tire pressure monitoring system equipped on these
vehicles is designed to illuminate the low tire pressure warning light at
two different pressures; one for the front tires and one for the rear tires.
Since tires need to be rotated to provide consistent performance and
maximum tire life, the tire pressure monitoring system needs to know
when the tires are rotated to determine which set of tires are on the
front and which are on the rear. With this information, the system can
detect and properly warn of low tire pressures.
TPMS reset tips:
•To reduce the chances of interference from another vehicle, the TPMS
reset procedure should be performed at least three feet (one meter)
away from another Ford Motor Company vehicle undergoing the TPMS
reset procedure at the same time.
•Do not wait more than two minutes between resetting each tire sensor
or the system will time-out and the entire procedure will have to be
repeated on all four wheels.
•A double horn chirp indicates the need to repeat the procedure.
Performing the TPMS Reset Procedure
It is recommended that you read the entire procedure before attempting.
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph (32 km/h) for at least two minutes
and then park in a safe location where you can easily get to all four tires
and have access to an air pump.
2. Place the ignition in the off position and keep the key in the ignition.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
241
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
3. Cycle the ignition to the on
position with the engine off.
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then
off three times. This must be
accomplished within 10 seconds.
If the reset mode has been entered successfully, the horn will sound
once, the TPMS indicator will flash and the message center (if
equipped) will display TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE. If this does not
occur, please try again starting at Step 2.
If after repeated attempts to enter the reset mode, the horn does not
sound, the TPMS indicator does not flash and the message center (if
equipped) does not display TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE, seek service
from your authorized dealer.
5. Train the TPMS sensors in the tires using the following TPMS reset
sequence starting with the left front tire in the following clockwise
order:
•Left front (Driver’s side front tire)
•Right front (Passenger’s side front tire)
•Right rear (Passenger’s side rear tire)
•Left rear (Driver’s side rear tire)
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left front tire;
decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
Note: The single horn chirp confirms that the sensor identification code
has been learned by the module for this position. If a double horn is
heard, the reset procedure was unsuccessful, and must be repeated.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
242
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
7. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right front tire;
decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
8. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right rear tire;
decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
9. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left rear tire;
decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
Training is complete after the horn sounds for the last tire trained
(driver’s side rear tire), the TPMS indicator stops flashing, and the
message center (if equipped) displays a message.
10. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn beeps are heard, the reset
procedure was unsuccessful and must be repeated.
If after repeating the procedure and two short beeps are heard when the
ignition is turned to off, seek assistance from your authorized dealer.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure as indicated on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating position) or Tire Label located on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. See Load Carrying for more
information.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed
rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally, the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension,
axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure.
Note: Do not use snow chains on vehicles with 20 inch wheels and tires.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as chains may chip
aluminum wheels.
Note: The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using
snow tires and chains.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
243
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
•If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
•Use only SAE Class S chains.
•Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
•Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and retighten the chains. If this does not work, remove
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
•Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
244
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should
carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
245
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Example only:
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
246
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver’s seating position. The total load on each axle
must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position.
The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
247
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•Example only:
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label
vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle
handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural
damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal
injury.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
248
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR.) Separate functional brakes should be used for
safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle.
The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your authorized
dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer) for more detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to
2,875 lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
249
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the original tires because they may
lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could
result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.). In metric units (635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
•Another example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x
99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
250
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•A final example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for
12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity
to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (12
x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 -
540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least
240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then
the load calculation would be:
1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x
45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver’s seating position.
Special loading instructions for owners of pick-up trucks and
utility-type vehicles
WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation
of this type of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle
section in the Driving chapter of this owner’s guide.
WARNING: Loaded vehicles may handle differently than
unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
251
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
TRAILER TOWING
Note: The trailer towing chart in this section applies to vehicles
equipped with a gasoline engine; for vehicles equipped with a diesel
engine, refer to your diesel supplement.
Your vehicle may tow a Conventional/Class IV trailer or fifth-wheel trailer
provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the
maximum trailer weight for your engine and rear axle ratio.
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these
components carefully prior to and after any towing operation. Refer to
Transmission fluid temperature gauge in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for the transmission fluid temperature information.
To find the maximum trailer weight allowed for your vehicle, consult
your authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided
by your authorized dealer).
To calculate your maximum trailer weight on your own:
1. Pick-up trucks: Take curb weight, hitch hardware and the driver’s
weight, then subtract them from the GCWR listed for your vehicle
series and drive axle ratio listed on the following table.
2.
Chassis cabs and pick-up trucks with aftermarket equipment:
Weigh your vehicle at a certified scale and subtract this actual curb
weight, hitch hardware and the driver’s weight from the GCWR listed
for your vehicle series and drive axle ratio listed on the following table.
The weight of all additional cargo and passengers must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight calculated above.
Further trailer/hitch restrictions and limitations exist depending on the
type of trailer and hitch used. This information follows the table listing
the maximum GCWRs.
For load specification terms found on the label and instructions on
calculating your vehicle’s load, refer to Vehicle loading - with and without
a trailer in this chapter when figuring the total weight of your vehicle.
Note: Do not exceed the tire ratings specified on the Tire Label or
Safety Compliance Certification Label.
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the certification label.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
252
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could
result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Vehicle type Rear axle
ratio
Maximum
GCWR - lb (kg)
F–250/F–350 Single Rear Wheel (SRW) 3.73 19000 (8617)
4.30 22000 (9977)
F–350 Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) 3.73 19500 (8844)
4.30 22500 (10204)
F–450/550 4.88 26000 (11791)
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. Contact your authorized dealer or a
reliable trailer dealer as soon as possible if you require assistance.
Hitches
WARNING: ON PICK-UP TRUCKS, the trailer hitch provided on
this vehicle enhances collision protection for the fuel system. DO
NOT REMOVE!
Do not mount a ball hitch (sometimes referred to as a trailer ball hitch
or trailer ball) to the bumper or use a hitch that clamps onto the
vehicle’s bumper or attaches to the axle. You must distribute the load in
your trailer so that 10–15% for conventional towing or 15–25% for
fifth-wheel towing of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
Hitch ratings
The standard hitch has two ratings depending on mode of operation:
•Weight-carrying - requires a draw bar and hitch ball. The draw bar
supports all the vertical tongue load of the trailer.
•Weight-distributing - requires an aftermarket weight-distributing
system which includes draw bar, hitch ball, spring bars and snap-up
brackets. The vertical tongue load of the trailer is distributed between
the truck and the trailer by this system.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
253
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
To determine which trailer hitch your vehicle is equipped with, refer to
the trailer hitch label located on trailer hitch cross tube. Once you
determine which trailer hitch you have consult your authorized dealer,
the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your dealer or online at
https://www.fleet.ford.com/showroom/rv_trailer_towing/default.asp.
WARNING: The hitch rating listed on the trailer hitch label are
maximum possible trailer ratings for that hitch but may not be
what your vehicle is capable of towing. To find the maximum trailer
weight allowed for your specific vehicle, consult your authorized dealer
(or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized
dealer).
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum tongue weight
exceeds the limit of the towing system and could result in
vehicle structural damage, loss of vehicle control and personal injury.
Weight-Distributing Hitches
When hooking-up a trailer using a weight-distributing hitch, always use
the following procedure:
1. Park the vehicle (without the trailer) on a level surface.
2. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the
fender, this is H1.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight distributing bars
connected.
4. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the
fender a second time, this is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing bars so that the
height of the front fender is approximately halfway between H1 and H2.
6. Check that the trailer is level. If not level, adjust the ball height
accordingly and repeat Steps 3–6.
WARNING: Do not adjust a weight-distributing hitch to any
position where the rear bumper of the vehicle is higher than it
was before attaching the trailer. Doing so will defeat the function of
the weight-distributing hitch, which may cause unpredictable handling,
and could result in serious personal injury.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
254
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Fifth-wheel trailer hitch (if equipped)
To find the maximum trailer weight allowed for your vehicle, consult
your authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided
by your authorized dealer).
Fifth-wheel and gooseneck towing
Your vehicle may be equipped with a fifth-wheel prep package. This
package enables your vehicle to accept certain fifth-wheel trailer hitches
and gooseneck ball hitches. The fifth-wheel trailer hitch is attached to
the four mounting pads in the pick-up bed; an optional 7–pin connector
provided in the bed as well. Alternatively, if a gooseneck ball hitch is
used, the ball is attached to the tube in the center of the bed.
Shorter pick-up boxes (e.g. 6’ 6” F-250/350) provide less clearance
between the cab and fifth-wheel/gooseneck trailer compared to “long box”
pick-ups. When selecting a trailer and tow vehicle, it’s critical that this
combination provide clearance between the cab and tow vehicle for turns
up to and including 90 degrees. Failure to follow this recommendation
could result in the trailer contacting the cab of the tow vehicle during tight
turns that are typical during low-speed parking and turning maneuvers.
This contact could result in damage to the trailer and tow vehicle.
WARNING: The mounting pads in the bed are specifically
designed for certain fifth-wheel trailer hitches and gooseneck ball
hitches. Do not use these mounting pads for other purposes. Doing so
could result in vehicle structural damage, loss of vehicle control, and
personal injury. Contact your authorized dealer to purchase gooseneck
and fifth-wheel hitches that are compatible with your vehicle.
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum limit of the
towing system could result in vehicle structural damage, loss of
vehicle control and personal injury.
Fifth-wheel and gooseneck hitch ratings
WARNING: The hitch rating listed on the trailer hitch label is
the maximum possible trailer rating. To find the maximum trailer
weight allowed for your specific vehicle, consult your authorized dealer
or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized
dealer.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
255
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Safety Chains
Note: Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Trailer brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are safe
if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations.
WARNING: If you own a trailer with a hydraulic brake system,
do not connect the trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to
your vehicle’s brake system. The vehicle’s brake system is only
designed to carry the appropriate amount of brake fluid for the vehicle
alone. Connecting a hydraulic trailer braking system could adversely
affect your vehicle’s braking performance, which could result in loss of
vehicle control, crash or serious injury.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Integrated trailer brake controller (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a fully integrated electronic trailer
brake controller (TBC). When used properly, the TBC helps ensure
smooth and effective trailer braking by powering the trailer’s electric
brakes with a proportional output based on the towing vehicle’s brake
pressure.
The Ford TBC has been tested to be compatible with several major
brands of electric-over-hydraulic trailer brakes; contact your authorized
dealer for information on which brands can be used.
WARNING: The Ford TBC has been verified to be compatible
with trailers having electric-actuated drum brakes (one to four
axles) and some electric-over-hydraulic types, but not hydraulic surge
types. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the trailer
brakes are adjusted appropriately, functioning normally and all electric
connections are properly made. Failure to do so may result in loss of
vehicle control, crash or serious injury.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
256
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
The TBC user interface consists of
the following:
1. +/- (GAIN adjustment
buttons): Pressing these buttons
adjusts the TBC’s power output to
the trailer brakes (in
0.5 increments). The GAIN setting
can be increased to a maximum of
10.0 or decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking). Pressing and
holding a button raises or lowers the setting continuously. The gain
setting displays in the message center as follows: TBC GAIN = XX.X.
The trailer brake controller (TBC) is designed to display three items of
information in the instrument cluster message center. These are: gain
setting, output bar graph, and trailer connectivity status. They appear in
the message center as follows:
•TBC GAIN = XX.X NO TRAILER: The instrument cluster message
center displays the current gain setting during a given ignition cycle
and when adjusting the gain. This message is also displayed during
manual activation without a trailer connected or when gain
adjustments are made with no trailer connected.
•TBC GAIN = XX.X OUTPUT = //////: When the vehicle’s brake pedal
is pushed, or when the manual control is activated, bar indicators
illuminate in the instrument cluster message center to indicate the
amount of power going to the trailer brakes relative to the brake pedal
or manual control input. One bar indicates the least amount of output
with six bars indicating maximum output.
•TRAILER CONNECTED: This message is displayed when a correct
trailer wiring connection (a trailer with electric trailer brakes) has
been sensed during a given ignition cycle.
•TRAILER DISCONNECTED: This message is displayed and
accompanied by a single chime, when a trailer connection was
determined and then a disconnection, either intentionally or
unintentionally, has been sensed during a given ignition cycle. It is also
displayed if a truck or trailer wiring fault occurs causing the trailer to
appear disconnected. This message is also displayed during manual
activation without a trailer connected.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
257
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
2. Manual control lever: Slide the control lever to the left to activate
power to the trailer’s electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle’s
brakes (see the following Procedure for adjusting GAIN section for
instructions on proper use of this feature). If the manual control is
activated while the brake is also applied, the greater of the two inputs
determines the power sent to the trailer brakes.
•Stop lamps: Activating the TBC manual control lever illuminates both
the trailer brake lamps and the tow vehicle brake lamps except the
center high-mount stop lamp (presuming proper trailer electrical
connection). Pressing the vehicle brake pedal also illuminates both
trailer and vehicle brake lamps.
Procedure for adjusting GAIN:
The GAIN setting is used to set the TBC for the specific towing condition
and should be changed as towing conditions change. Changes to towing
conditions include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions and weather.
The GAIN should be set to provide the maximum trailer braking
assistance while ensuring the trailer wheels do not lock when braking;
locked trailer wheels may lead to trailer instability.
Note: This should only be performed in a traffic-free environment at
speeds of approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition, functioning
normally and properly adjusted. See your trailer dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections according to
the trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric brakes is plugged in, the TRAILER
CONNECTED message displays in the instrument cluster message center.
4. Use the GAIN adjustment (+/-) buttons to increase or decrease the
GAIN setting to the desired starting point. A GAIN setting of 6.0 is a
good starting point for heavier loads.
5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry, level surface at
a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual control
lever completely.
6. If the trailer wheels lock up (indicated by squealing tires), reduce the
GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels turn freely, increase the GAIN setting.
Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the GAIN setting is at a point just below
trailer wheel lock-up. If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lock-up
may not be attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
258
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Explanation of instrument cluster warning messages:
The TBC interacts with the instrument cluster message center to display
the following messages:
TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT: This message is displayed and
accompanied by a single chime, in response to faults sensed by the TBC.
In the event this message is seen, please contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible for diagnosis and repair. The TBC may still function,
but performance may be degraded.
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER: This message is displayed when a
Short circuit on the electric brake output wire has occurred. If the
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER message is displayed and accompanied
by a single chime, with no trailer connected, the problem is with the
vehicle wiring from the TBC to the 7–pin connector at the bumper. If the
message is only displayed with a trailer connected, the problem is related
to the trailer wiring; consult your trailer dealer for assistance. This can
be a short to ground (i.e., chaffed wire) or a short to voltage (i.e., pulled
pin on trailer emergency break-away battery) or trailer brakes drawing
too much current.
Note: Your TBC can be diagnosed by your authorized dealer to
determine exactly which trailer fault has occurred; however, if the fault
is with the trailer this diagnosis is not covered under your Ford
warranty.
Points to Remember:
•Remember to adjust gain setting before using the TBC for the first
time.
•Readjust gain setting on the TBC (according to procedure above)
whenever road, weather and trailer or vehicle loading conditions
change from those that existed when the gain was initially set.
•The sliding lever on the TBC should be used only for manual
activation of trailer brakes to assist with proper adjustment of the
GAIN. Misuse, such as application during trailer sway, could cause
instability of trailer and/or tow vehicle.
•Avoid towing in adverse weather conditions. The TBC does not
provide anti-lock control of the trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can lock
up on slippery surfaces, resulting in reduced stability of trailer and
tow vehicle.
•The TBC is equipped with a feature which reduces output at vehicle
speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h) so trailer and vehicle braking is not
jerky or harsh. This feature is only available when applying the brakes
using the vehicle’s brake pedal, not the TBC.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
259
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•The TBC interacts with the brake system of the vehicle, including
ABS, in order to reduce the likelihood of trailer wheel lock-up;
therefore, if these systems are not functioning properly, the TBC may
not function at full performance.
•Your vehicle’s brake system and the trailer brake system work
independently of each other; changing the GAIN setting on the TBC
does not affect the operation of your vehicle’s brakes whether a trailer
is attached or not.
•When the vehicle is turned off, the TBC output is disabled and the
display is shut down; turning the ignition from off to on awakens the
TBC module.
•The TBC is only a factory- or dealer-installed item; Ford is not
responsible for warranty or performance of the TBC due to misuse or
customer installation.
•Do not attempt removal of the TBC without consulting the
Workshop Manual; damage to the unit may result.
Trailer Lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. Contact
your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions
and equipment for hooking-up trailer lamps.
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
•Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer.
•Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) during the first 500 miles
(800 km) of trailer towing and don’t make full-throttle starts.
•Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
•Activate the tow/haul feature to eliminate excessive transmission
shifting and assist in transmission cooling. For additional information,
refer to Automatic transmission operation in the Driving chapter.
•Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached; anticipate
stops and brake gradually.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
260
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a temporary or conventional spare
tire. If the spare tire is different in size (diameter and/or width), tread
type (All-Season or All-Terrain) or is from a different manufacturer other
than the road tires on your vehicle, your spare tire is considered
“temporary”. Consult information on the Tire Label or Safety Compliance
Certification Label for limitations when using.
Trailer towing safety tips
General
•Ensure that the trailer, safety chains and 7–pin electrical connectors
are securely fastened.
•Make sure the truck receiver, draw bar and coupler are properly
connected and adjusted.
•Check rear view and side mirrors for proper visibility especially when
towing a trailer wider than the truck.
•When turning, make wide turns to allow trailer tires to properly clear
any obstacles.
•Operate the vehicle at lower speeds than you would when not towing
a trailer; the likelihood of trailer sway is greater at higher speeds.
•Be prepared for trailer sway due to buffeting when larger vehicles
pass in either direction.
•If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly
conditions, at GCWR, or any combination of these factors, consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lubricant if not already so
equipped. Refer to Maintenance product specifications and
capacities in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for the
proper axle lubricant. Remember that regardless of the rear axle
lubricant used, do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km) of
a new vehicle, and that the first 500 miles (800 km) of towing be done
at no faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) with no full-throttle starts.
Loading
•Trailer loads should be evenly distributed front-to-back and
left-to-right.
•Never exceed truck, trailer, receiver, ball, tongue, tire or coupler
loading recommendations.
•Keep the center of gravity low for best handling.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
261
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Braking
•Anticipate stops; allow more distance and time to stop than normal.
•Do not apply the trailer brakes for extended periods of time as they
can overheat and lose effectiveness.
•The trailer brakes (including the shoes, drum and trailer brake
magnets) must be inspected and serviced at intervals specified by the
manufacturer.
•Electric brakes also require periodic adjustment to keep the shoes
properly spaced. If the brakes get hot when driving or if they will not
hold, chances are that they need adjustment.
Backing-up
•Practice backing-up, particularly if you are a novice. Turn the steering
wheel to the right to move the trailer’s rear end to the right.
•Sharp steering movements may cause the trailer to jackknife or go out
of control.
Tires
•Select tires that meet the trailer loading requirements.
•All trailer tires should be of the same size, and construction.
•Always check tow vehicle and trailer tire pressure before towing.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Water Craft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into
the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the trailer is removed
from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
1. Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
2. Do not allow waves to break higher than six inches (15 centimeters)
above the bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
1. Causing internal damage to the components.
2. Affecting driveability, emissions, and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the rear axle has been
submerged in water. Water may have contaminated the rear axle
lubricant, which is not normally checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or other axle repair is required.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
262
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational (RV) towing.
An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind
a motor home.
Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to
prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle. Refer to the Climate
Controls chapter for more information.
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle, see Wrecker
towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not
damaged after the vehicle is hooked-up to the RV or tow dolly.
Drivetrain
configuration Requirements for neutral towing
4x4 with manual-shift
transfer case
Transmission in N (Neutral); transfer case in N
(Neutral); hublocks set to FREE*
4x2 or 4x4 with
electronic-shift
transfer case
Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on
the ground, as vehicle or transmission damage
may occur. It is recommended to tow your
vehicle with all four (4) wheels off the ground
such as when using a car-hauling trailer.
Otherwise, no recreational towing is permitted.
*Always make sure that both hub locks are set to the same position.
RECOVERY HOOKS
WARNING: Using recovery hooks is dangerous and should only
be done by a person familiar with proper vehicle recovery safety
practices. Improper use of recovery hooks may cause hook failure
and/or separation from the vehicle and could result in serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Always slowly remove the slack from the recovery
strap prior to pulling. Failure to do so can introduce significantly
higher loads which can cause the recovery hooks to break off, or the
recovery strap to fail which can cause serious injury or death.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
263
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Never link two straps together with a clevis pin.
These heavy metal objects could become projectiles if the strap
breaks and can cause serious injury or death.
Your vehicle comes equipped with frame-mounted front recovery hooks.
These hooks should never have a load applied to them greater than the
GVWR of your vehicle.
Before using the recovery hooks:
•Make sure all attaching points are secure and capable of withstanding
the applied load.
•Never use chains, cables or tow straps with metal hook ends.
•Only use recovery straps that have a minimum breaking strength two
to three times the GVW of the stuck vehicle.
•Make sure the recovery strap is in good condition and free of visible
cuts, tears or damage.
•Use a damper device such as a tarp, heavy blanket or piece of carpet
draped over the recovery strap to help absorb the energy in the event
the strap breaks.
•Make sure the stuck vehicle is not loaded in excess of its GVWR
specified on the certification label.
•Always align the tow vehicle and stuck vehicle in a straight line
(within 10 degrees).
•Keep bystanders to the sides of the vehicle, at a distance of at least
twice the length of the recovery strap. This helps avoid injury from
the hazard of a recovery hook or strap breaking, or a vehicle lurching
into their path.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
264
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. Off— shuts off the engine and all
accessories/locks the steering wheel
and allows key removal. Note: In
order to switch off the engine while
the vehicle is in motion, shift to
neutral and use the brakes to bring
the vehicle to a safe stop. After the
vehicle has stopped, turn the engine
off and shift into park. Then, turn
the key to the accessory or off
position.
2. Accessory— allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not running. This position also unlocks the
steering wheel.
3. On— all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key
position when driving.
4. Start— cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
begins cranking.
Note: Do not store the key in the ignition after the vehicle is turned off
and you have left the vehicle. This could cause a drain on the battery.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system.
The powertrain control system meets all Canadian interference-causing
equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field
strength of radio noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, don’t press the accelerator before
or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty
starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to
Starting the engine in this chapter.
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.
Driving
265
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding against
exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle
checked. If your vehicle is operated in a heavy snow storm or blowing
snow conditions, the engine air induction may become partially clogged
with snow and/or ice. If this occurs, the engine may experience a
significant reduction in power output. At the earliest opportunity, clear
all the snow and/or ice away from the air induction inlet. The following
starting instructions are for vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine; if
your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine, refer to Starting the
engine in your diesel supplement.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts. For more
information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating
and Safety Restraints chapter.
Driving
266
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
•Make sure the parking brake is
set.
•Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).
3. Turn the key to 3 (on) without
turning the key to 4 (start).
Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information
regarding the warning lights.
Starting the engine
1. Turn the key to 3 (on) without
turning the key to 4 (start). If there
is difficulty in turning the key,
rotate the steering wheel until the
key turns freely. This condition may
occur when:
•the front wheels are turned.
•a front wheel is against the curb.
2. Turn the key to 4 (start), then
release the key as soon as the
engine begins cranking. Your vehicle has a computer assisted cranking
system that assists in starting the engine. After releasing the key from
Driving
267
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
the 4 (start) position, the engine may continue cranking for up to
10 seconds or until the vehicle starts.
Note: Cranking may be stopped at any time by turning the key to the off
position.
3. After idling for a few seconds, release the parking brake, apply the
brake, shift into gear and drive.
Note: If the engine does not start on the first try, turn the key to the off
position, wait 10 seconds and try Step 2 again. If the engine still fails to
start, press the accelerator to the floor and try Step 2 again, keeping the
accelerator on the floor until the engine begins to accelerate above
cranking speeds; this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off
in case the engine is flooded with fuel.
Your vehicle may have remote start capability. Refer to Remote entry
system in the Locks and Security chapter.
Cold weather starting (flexible fuel vehicles only)
The starting characteristics of all grades of E
85
ethanol make it
unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C).
Consult your fuel distributor for the availability of winter grade ethanol.
As the outside temperature approaches freezing, ethanol fuel distributors
should supply winter grade ethanol (same as with unleaded gasoline). If
summer grade ethanol is used in cold weather conditions, 0°F to 32°F
(-18°C to 0°C), you may experience increased cranking times, rough idle
or hesitation until the engine has warmed up.
You may experience a decrease in peak performance when the engine is
cold when operating on E
85
ethanol.
Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time as starter
damage may occur. If the engine fails to start, turn the key to off and
wait 30 seconds before trying again.
Do not use starting fluid such as ether in the air intake system. Such
fluid could cause immediate explosive damage to the engine and possible
personal injury.
If you should experience cold weather starting problems on E
85
ethanol,
and neither an alternative brand of E
85
ethanol nor an engine block
heater is available, the addition of unleaded gasoline to your tank will
improve cold starting performance. Your vehicle is designed to operate
on E
85
ethanol alone, unleaded gasoline alone, or any mixture of the two.
See Choosing the right fuel in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information on ethanol.
Driving
268
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
If the engine fails to start using the preceding instructions (flexible
fuel vehicles only)
1. Press and hold down the accelerator 1/3 to 1/2 way to floor, then
crank the engine.
2. When the engine starts, release the key, then gradually release the
accelerator pedal as the engine speeds up. If the engine still fails to start,
repeat Step 1.
Guarding against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
this checked immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if you smell
exhaust fumes. Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take
precautions to avoid its dangerous effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and leave the engine idling for long periods of
time, we recommend that you do one of the following:
•Open the windows at least one inch (2.5 centimeters).
•Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting
and allows the heater/defroster system to respond quickly. If your vehicle
is equipped with this system, your equipment includes a heater element
which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows
the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A/C electrical
source. The engine block heater plug can be located through the center
opening of the lower front bumper assembly. The block heater system is
most effective when outdoor temperatures reach below 0°F (-18°C).
For flexible fuel vehicles, if operating with E85 ethanol, an engine block
heater must be used if ambient temperature is below 0°F (-18°C).
See Cold weather starting earlier in this chapter for more information
on starting with ethanol.
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions
could result in property damage or physical injury.
Driving
269
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use
your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged
(cheater) adapters.
Prior to using the engine block heater, follow these recommendations for
proper and safe operation:
•For your safety, use an outdoor extension cord that is product
certified by Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). Use only an extension cord that can be used
outdoors, in cold temperatures, and is clearly marked “Suitable for Use
with Outdoor Appliances.” Never use an indoor extension cord
outdoors; it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard.
•Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord, minimum.
•Use as short an extension cord as possible.
•Do not use multiple extension cords. Instead, use one extension cord
which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to
the outlet without stretching.
•Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition (not
patched or spliced). Store your extension cord indoors at
temperatures above 32°F (0°C). Outdoor conditions can deteriorate
extension cords over a period of time.
•To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged (cheater) adapters.
Also ensure that the block heater, especially the cord, is in good
condition before use.
•Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug /engine
block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order
to prevent possible shock or fire.
•Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of
all combustibles such as petroleum products, dust, rags, paper and
similar items.
•Be sure that the engine block heater, heater cord and extension cord
are solidly connected. A poor connection can cause the cord to
become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire. Be sure
to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system
has been operating for approximately a half hour.
•Finally, have the engine block heater system checked during your fall
tune-up to be sure it’s in good working order.
Driving
270
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
How to use the engine block heater
Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. To clean
them, use a dry cloth.
Depending on the type of factory installed equipment, your engine block
heater system may consume anywhere between 400 watts or 1000 watts
of power per hour. Your factory installed block heater system does not
have a thermostat; however, maximum temperature is attained after
approximately three hours of operation. Block heater operation longer
than three hours will not improve system performance and will
unnecessarily use additional electricity.
Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the
vehicle. While not in use, make sure the protective cover seals the
prongs of the engine block heater cord plug.
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Refer to Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for information on the brake
system warning light.
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS). This
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by
keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor and
brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the
brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is
done and normal brake operation resumes. These are normal
characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern.
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal. Do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces. However,
the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.
P!
BRAKE
Driving
271
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Brake assist
The brake assist system provides full braking force during panic braking
situations. It detects a rapid application of the brake pedal and uses the
ABS system to achieve maximum braking pressure. Once a panic brake
application is detected, the system will remain activated as long as the
brake pedal is pressed or ABS is engaged. The system is deactivated by
either releasing the brake pedal or coming to a complete stop. When the
system activates, noise from the ABS pump motor and brake pedal
pulsation may be observed; this is normal.
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
when the ignition is turned on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.
Even when the ABS is disabled,
normal braking is still effective. If
your BRAKE warning lamp
illuminates with the parking brake
released, have your brake system
serviced immediately by an authorized dealer.
Brake over accelerator
This vehicle is equipped with a brake over accelerator feature. In the
event the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped, applying steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal will both slow the vehicle and
reduce engine power. If you experience this condition, apply the brakes
and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Turn the engine off, shift to P
(Park) and apply the parking brake, and then inspect the accelerator
pedal for any interferences. If none are found and the condition persists,
have your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer.
ABS
P!
BRAKE
Driving
272
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Parking brake
To set the parking brake, press the
parking brake pedal down until the
pedal stops.
The BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster illuminates and
remains illuminated until the
parking brake is released.
Pull the release lever to release the
parking brake. To prevent the pedal
from releasing too quickly, place
your left foot on the service brake
pedal, then slowly pull the release
lever until the pedal slowly releases.
Make sure that the pedal is fully
released. You may want to pull the
release lever again to make sure the
parking brake is fully released.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park).
If you’re parking your vehicle on a grade or with a trailer, press and hold
the brake pedal down, then set the parking brake. There may be a little
vehicle movement as the parking brake sets to hold the vehicle’s weight.
This is normal and should be no reason for concern. If needed, press and
hold the service brake pedal down, then try reapplying the parking
brake. Chock the wheels if required. If the parking brake cannot hold the
weight of the vehicle, the parking brake may need to be serviced or the
vehicle may be overloaded.
P!
BRAKE
Driving
273
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
ENGINE ONLY TRACTION CONTROL (DUAL REAR WHEEL (DRW)
VEHICLES ONLY)
This system helps you maintain the stability and steerability of your
vehicle, especially on slippery road surfaces such as snow or ice-covered
roads and gravel roads. The system will allow your vehicle to make
better use of available traction in these conditions.
During traction control operation,
the traction control light will flash
and the engine will not “rev-up”
when you press further on the
accelerator. This is normal system
behavior and should be no reason
for concern. Also, if traction control is on when the vehicle is put into
four-wheel drive mode (if equipped), the traction control system will be
automatically disabled. Traction control operation will resume when the
vehicle is placed back into two-wheel drive mode.
WARNING: Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe
personal injury or property damage. The occurrence of a traction
control event is an indication that at least some of the tires have
exceeded their ability to grip the road; this may lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death. If you experience a severe road event, SLOW DOWN.
Switching off engine only traction control
The traction control switch is
located on the instrument panel to
the right of the climate control
system. The traction control system will automatically turn on every time
the ignition is turned off and on. The traction control system should
normally be left on.
If you should become stuck in snow or ice or on a very slippery road
surface, try switching the traction control system off. This may allow
excess wheel spin to “dig” the vehicle out and enable a successful
“rocking” maneuver.
If a system fault is detected, the TCS OFF indicator will illuminate, the
traction control button will not turn the system on or off and your
vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer.
Driving
274
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Engine only traction control (DRW only)
Button functions TCS OFF indicator TCS
Default at start-up Not illuminated Enabled
Button pressed
momentarily Illuminated Disabled
Button pressed again
after deactivation Not illuminated Enabled
Transfer case switched to
4WD
1
Illuminated Disabled
1
Engaging 4WD automatically disables TCS.
ADVANCETRAC姞WITH ROLL STABILITY CONTROL™ (RSC姞)
STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM
(SINGLE REAR WHEEL (SRW) VEHICLES ONLY)
The AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system provides the following stability
enhancement features for certain driving situations:
•Traction control system (TCS), which functions to help avoid
drive-wheel spin and loss of traction.
•Electronic stability control (ESC), which functions to help avoid skids
or lateral slides.
•Roll Stability Control™ (RSC威), which functions to help avoid a
vehicle roll-over.
WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system,
aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction and/or wheel/tire size may change the handling
characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance
of the AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system. In addition, installing any
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the
AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system. Install any aftermarket stereo
loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console, the
tunnel, and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering
with the AdvanceTrac威with RSC威sensors. Reducing the effectiveness
of the AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system could lead to an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Driving
275
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot
defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a
vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your
vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system is an indication that
at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road;
this could reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle,
potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. If your AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system
activates, SLOW DOWN.
WARNING: If a failure has been detected within the
AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system, the stability control light will
illuminate steadily. Verify that the AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system is
not manually disabled. Press the stability control button located on the
instrument panel to the right of the climate control system. If the
stability control light still illuminates steadily, have the system serviced
by an authorized dealer immediately. Operating your vehicle with
AdvanceTrac威with RSC威disabled could lead to an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
The AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system automatically enables each time the
engine is started. All features of the AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system
(TCS, ESC, and RSC威) are active and monitor the vehicle from start-up.
However, the system will only intervene if the driving situation requires it.
The AdvanceTrac威with RSC威
system includes a stability control
button located on the instrument
panel to the right of the climate
control system, a stability control
light and a stability control off light
in the instrument cluster. Both
lights will illuminate temporarily during start-up as part of a normal
system self-check. The stability control light may illuminate (flash)
during certain driving situations which cause the AdvanceTrac威with
RSC威system to operate. If the stability control light and stability control
off light illuminate steadily, have the system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately. The message center will also indicate a failure with
the AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system.
Driving
276
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Note: If the system cannot be turned off, refer to MyKey威in the Locks
and Security chapter for more information.
When AdvanceTrac威with RSC威performs a normal system self-check,
some drivers may notice a slight movement of the brake, and/or a
rumble, grunting, or grinding noise after startup and when driving off.
When an event occurs that activates AdvanceTrac威with RSC威you may
experience the following:
•A slight deceleration of the vehicle
•The stability control light will flash.
•A vibration in the pedal when your foot is on the brake pedal
•If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake, the
brake pedal may move as the systems applies higher brake forces. You
may also hear a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during
this severe condition.
•The brake pedal may feel stiffer than usual.
Traction control system (TCS)
Traction control is a driver aid feature that helps your vehicle maintain
traction of the wheels, typically when driving on slippery and/or hilly
road surfaces, by detecting and controlling wheel spin.
Excessive wheel spin is controlled in two ways, which may work
separately or in tandem: engine traction control and brake traction
control. Engine traction control works to limit drive-wheel spin by
momentarily reducing engine power. Brake traction control works to limit
wheel spin by momentarily applying the brakes to the wheel that is
slipping. Traction control is most active at low speeds.
During TCS events the stability control light in the instrument cluster
will flash.
If the TCS is activated excessively in a short period of time, the braking
portion of the system may become temporarily disabled to allow the
brakes to cool down. In this situation, TCS will use only engine power
reduction to help control the wheels from over-spinning. When the
brakes have cooled down, the system will regain all features. Anti-lock
braking, RSC威, and ESC are not affected by this condition and will
continue to function during the cool-down period.
The engine traction control and brake traction control system may be
deactivated in certain situations. See the Switching off AdvanceTrac威
with RSC威section following.
Driving
277
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Electronic stability control (ESC)
Electronic stability control (ESC) may enhance your vehicle’s directional
stability during adverse maneuvers, for example when cornering severely
or avoiding objects in the roadway. ESC operates by applying brakes to
one or more of the wheels individually and, if necessary, reducing engine
power if the system detects that the vehicle is about to skid or slide
laterally.
During ESC events, the stability control light in the instrument cluster
will flash.
Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the ESC system, which
include but are not limited to:
•Taking a turn too fast
•Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
•Driving over a patch of ice or other slippery surfaces
•Changing lanes on a snow-rutted road
•Entering a snow-free road from a snow-covered side street, or vice
versa
•Entering a paved road from a gravel road, or vice versa
•Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer (refer to Trailer
towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter).
The ESC system may be deactivated in certain situations. See the
Switching off AdvanceTrac威with RSC威section following.
Roll Stability Control™ (RSC威)
Roll Stability Control™ (RSC威) may help to maintain roll stability of the
vehicle during adverse maneuvers. RSC威operates by detecting the
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which it changes and by applying the
brakes to one or more wheels individually.
During an event that activates the Roll Stability Control™ (RSC威)the
stability control light in the instrument cluster will flash.
Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the Roll Stability
Control™ system, which include:
•Emergency lane-change
•Taking a turn too fast
•Quick maneuvering to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
The Roll Stability Control™ system may be deactivated in certain situations.
See the Switching off AdvanceTrac威with RSC威section following.
Driving
278
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Switching off AdvanceTrac威with RSC威
If the vehicle is stuck in snow, mud or sand, and seems to lose engine
power, switching off certain features of the AdvanceTrac威with RSC威
system may be beneficial because the wheels are allowed to spin. This
will restore full engine power and will enhance momentum through the
obstacle. To switch off the AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system, press the
stability control button located on the instrument panel to the right of
the climate control system. Full features of the AdvanceTrac威with RSC威
system can be restored by pressing the button again or by turning off
and restarting the engine.
If you switch off the AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system, the stability
control off light will illuminate steadily. Pressing the stability control
button again will turn off the stability control off light and reactivate the
system.
In R (Reverse), ABS and the engine traction control and brake traction
control features will continue to function; however, ESC and RSC威are
disabled.
AdvanceTrac威with RSC威Features (SRW only)
Button functions
Stability
control
light
RSC威ESC TCS
Default at start-up
Illuminated
during bulb
check
Enabled Enabled Enabled
Button pressed
momentarily
Illuminated
solid Enabled Enabled
1
Disabled
Button pressed and
held for more than
5 seconds at vehicle
speed under 35 mph
(56 km/h)
Flashes then
illuminated
solid
2
Disabled Disabled Disabled
Vehicle speed
exceeds 35 mph
(56 km/h) after
button is pressed
and held for more
than 5 seconds
Illuminated
solid Enabled Enabled
1
Disabled
Driving
279
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
AdvanceTrac威with RSC威Features (SRW only)
Button functions
Stability
control
light
RSC威ESC TCS
Button pressed again
after deactivation
Not
illuminated Enabled Enabled Enabled
Transfer case
switched to 4WD
Low
3
Illuminated Disabled Disabled Disabled
1
ESC has reduced sensitivity compared to fully active system.
2
Lamp light starts blinking for 4 seconds after entering press and hold
state.
3
Engaging 4WD Low locked automatically disables RSC, ESC and TSC.
Trailer sway control
Your vehicle may be equipped with trailer sway control. When properly
equipped, trailer sway control will use the vehicle’s AdvanceTrac威with
RSC威system to detect and help reduce trailer sway by applying brake
force at individual wheels and, if necessary, by reducing engine power.
WARNING: Trailer sway control does not prevent a trailer from
swaying, it mitigates the sway from increasing once it has
occurred. If you are experiencing trailer sway it is likely that the trailer
is improperly loaded for the correct tongue weight or the speed of the
vehicle and trailer is too high. Pull the vehicle-trailer over to a safe
location to check the trailer weight distribution and tongue load and
reduce speed to a safe level while towing. If trailer sway is
experienced, SLOW DOWN.
During trailer sway control events the stability control light in the
instrument cluster will flash momentarily. The message center will also
display TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED. In some cases when trailer
sway is detected, the vehicle speed is too high and may be above a
speed at which trailer sway will not grow continuously. This may cause
the system to activate multiple times, causing a gradual reduction in
speed.
Driving
280
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Disabling trailer sway control
Trailer sway control can be disabled during any key cycle. See trailer
sway control under the Message center in the Instrument Cluster
chapter. Note that regardless of chosen enable state, trailer sway control
will be re-enabled at each new key cycle.
WARNING: Turning off trailer sway control increases the risk of
loss of vehicle control, serious injury, or death. Ford does not
recommend disabling this feature except in situations where speed
reduction may be detrimental (e.g., hill climbing), the driver has
significant trailer towing experience, and can control trailer sway and
maintain safe operation.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
Hill descent control allows the driver to set and maintain vehicle speed
while descending steep grades in various surface conditions.
WARNING: Hill descent control cannot control descent in all
surface conditions and circumstances, such as ice or extremely
steep grades. Hill descent control is a driver assist system and cannot
substitute for good judgment by the driver. Failure to do so may result
in loss of vehicle control, crash or serious injury.
Hill descent control can maintain vehicle speeds on downhill grades
between 2 mph (3 km/h) and 12 mph (20 km/h). Above 20 mph
(32 km/h), the system remains armed, but descent speed cannot be set
or maintained.
WARNING: Hill descent control does not provide hill hold at
zero mph (0 km/h). When stopped, the parking brake must be
applied and/or the vehicle must be placed in P (Park) or it may roll
away.
Hill descent control requires a cooling down interval after a period of
sustained use. The amount of time that the feature can remain active
before cooling varies with conditions. The system will provide a warning
in the message center and a chime will sound when the system is about
to disengage for cooling. At this time, manually apply the brakes as
needed to maintain descent speed.
Driving
281
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Enabling hill descent control and setting the descent speed
1. Press and release the hill descent
button located on the instrument
panel. A light in the cluster will
illuminate and chime will sound
when this feature is activated.
2. To increase descent speed, press the accelerator pedal until the
desired speed is reached. To decrease descent speed, press the brake
pedal until the desired speed is reached.
Whether accelerating or decelerating, once the desired descent speed is
reached, remove your feet from the pedals and the chosen vehicle speed
will be maintained.
Note: Noise from the ABS pump motor may be observed during hill
descent control operation. This is a normal characteristic of the ABS and
should be no reason for concern.
Hill descent modes
•At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h): When the HDC switch is pressed
and HDC is active, the HDC telltale will flash.
•At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h): When the HDC switch is pressed
and conditions are not correct for hill descent activation, the HDC
system will be enabled, the light in the cluster will be on solid and
HILL DESCENT CONTROL READY will be displayed in the message
center.
•At speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h): When the HDC switch is pressed,
the HDC system will be enabled, the light in the cluster will not be
illuminated and FOR HILL CNTRL, 20 MPH OR LESS will be displayed
in the message center.
Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for hill
descent control messages.
STEERING
To help prevent damage to the power steering system:
•Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it
stops) for more than three to five seconds when the engine is running.
•Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level
(below the MIN mark on the reservoir).
Driving
282
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•Some noise is normal during operation. If excessive, check for low
power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your dealer.
•Heavy or uneven efforts may be caused by low power steering fluid.
Check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service
by your dealer.
•Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on
the reservoir, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
•an improperly inflated tire
•uneven tire wear
•loose or worn suspension components
•loose or worn steering components
•improper steering alignment
If any steering components are serviced or replaced, install new
fasteners (many are coated with thread adhesive or have prevailing
torque features which may not be re-used). Never re-use a bolt or nut.
Torque fasteners to specifications in Workshop Manual.
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL (ELD) (IF EQUIPPED)
The electronic locking differential (ELD) is a device housed in the rear
axle which allows both rear wheels to turn at the same speed. It provides
added traction on slippery and/or off road surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. The ELD may be locked or
unlocked by the vehicle operator and can be engaged or disengaged on
the fly. When the axle is unlocked it will function like a standard rear
axle. When the axle is locked it will not allow the rear wheels to rotate
at different speeds when turning. It is not recommended for use on good
traction surfaces such as dry pavement. Doing so may result in abnormal
driving behavior and noise while cornering and excessive tire wear.
The ELD is affected by the following conditions of your vehicle:
•On 2WD vehicles and 4WD vehicles in 2H (4X2) or 4H (4X4 High),
the ELD will not engage if the vehicle speed is above 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Driving
283
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•On 2WD vehicles and 4WD vehicles in 2H (4X2) or 4H (4X4 High),
the ELD will automatically disengage at speeds above 25 mph
(40 km/h) and will automatically reengage at speeds below 19 mph
(30 km/h).
•On 4WD vehicles in 4L (4X4 Low), the ELD can be engaged at any
speed and will not automatically disengage.
Activating the electronic locking differential (ELD)
For vehicles equipped with an
electronic shift 4WD system:
Pull the knob on the 4WD control
toward you. The indicator light
will display in the instrument
cluster.
For 2WD vehicles and vehicles
equipped with a manual shift
4WD system:
Turn the control to ON. The
indicator light will display in the
instrument cluster.
Once the light is displayed in the instrument cluster, both rear wheel
axle shafts will be locked together providing added traction.
If the indicator light in the instrument cluster turns off, one of the
following has occurred:
•The vehicle speed is too high.
•The left and right rear wheel speed difference is too high during an
engagement attempt.
•The system has malfunctioned and will be accompanied by the
CHECK LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL message in the message center.
See your authorized Ford dealer for assistance.
Note: The ELD may have difficulty disengaging either by operator
command or automatically if the driveline is under torque. If driving
conditions allow, releasing the accelerator pedal or turning the steering
wheel in the opposite direction may assist in disengagement.
Note: The ELD is designed for off-road use only and is not intended for
use on dry pavement.
Driving
284
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
PREPARING TO DRIVE
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
Utility vehicles and trucks have larger tires and increased ground
clearance, giving the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger
car.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for
cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed or abrupt maneuvers in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.
WARNING: Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity,
may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Do not overload
your vehicle and use extra precautions, such as driving at slower
speeds, avoiding abrupt steering changes and allowing for increased
stopping distance, when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. Over-loading
or loading the vehicle improperly can deteriorate handling capability
and contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover.
BRAKE-SHIFT INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the 3 (on) position and the brake pedal is not pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the on position and the brake pedal pressed, it is possible that a fuse has
blown or the vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating properly. Refer to
Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
Driving
285
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps are working properly, the
following procedure will allow you to move the gearshift lever from P (Park):
1. Apply the parking brake. Turn the ignition key to 1 (off), then remove
the key.
2. Move the steering column to the full down and full rearward position
(toward the driver’s seat).
3. Remove the gearshift lever boot.
4. Place fingers into hole where the gearshift lever boot was removed
from and pull top half of shroud up and forward to separate it from the
lower half of the shroud. There is a hinge at the forward edge of the top
shroud. Roll the top half of the shroud upward on the hinge point to
clear the hazard flasher button, then pull straight rearward toward the
driver’s seat to remove.
5. Remove the top half of the shroud.
6. Remove the three fasteners under
the column that secure the lower
shroud half to the column.
7. Pull the lock lever into the full
unlocked position and remove the
lower shroud cover by pulling the
lever handle through the slot in the
cover.
8. Apply the brake and move the gearshift lever into N (Neutral).
9. Start the vehicle.
Perform Steps 4 through 8 in reverse order, making sure to engage the
hinge pivots between the upper and lower halves of the shroud. Keep slight
pressure in the forward direction as the halves are rotated together.
Driving
286
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brake lamps are working.
WARNING: When doing this procedure, you will be taking the
vehicle out of park which means the vehicle can roll freely. To
avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always fully set the parking brake
prior to doing this procedure. Use wheel chocks if appropriate.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION
Understanding the shift positions of the 5–speed automatic
transmission (if equipped)
This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive transmission shift strategy.
Adaptive transmission shift strategy offers the optimal transmission
operation and shift quality. When the vehicle’s battery has been
disconnected for any type of service or repair, the transmission will need
to relearn the normal shift strategy parameters, much like having to reset
your radio stations when your vehicle battery has been disconnected.
The adaptive transmission shift strategy allows the transmission to
relearn these operating parameters. This learning process could take
several transmission upshifts and downshifts; during this learning
process, slightly firmer shifts may occur. After this learning process,
normal shift feel and shift scheduling will resume.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
•Start the engine
•Press the brake pedal
•Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
Driving
287
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
•Come to a complete stop
•Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R (Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul Off
D (Overdrive) with tow/haul off is the normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through five.
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul On
The tow/haul feature improves transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission gear ranges are available when
using tow/haul.
To activate tow/haul, press the
button on the end of the gearshift
lever.
The TOW HAUL indicator light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster.
Tow/haul delays upshifts to reduce
frequency of transmission shifting. Tow/haul also provides engine braking
in all forward gears when the transmission is in the D (Overdrive)
position; this engine braking will slow the vehicle and assist the driver in
controlling the vehicle when descending a grade. Depending on driving
conditions and load conditions, the transmission may downshift, slow the
vehicle and control the vehicle speed when descending a hill, without the
accelerator pedal being pressed. The amount of downshift braking
provided will vary based upon the amount the brake pedal is depressed.
Driving
288
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
To deactivate the tow/haul feature and return to normal driving mode,
press the button on the end of the gearshift lever. The TOW HAUL light
will no longer be illuminated.
When you shut-off and restart the engine, the transmission will
automatically return to normal D (Overdrive) mode (Tow/Haul OFF).
WARNING: Do not use the tow/haul feature when driving in icy
or slippery conditions as the increased engine braking can cause
the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the
possible loss of vehicle control.
3 (Third)
Transmission starts and operates in third gear only.
Used for improved traction on slippery roads. Selecting 3 (Third)
provides engine braking.
2 (Second)
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional
engine braking on downgrades.
1 (First)
•Provides maximum engine braking.
•Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
•The transmission will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; it
will downshift to a lower gear and then shift into 1 (First) when the
vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
•Allowed in D (Overdrive) or D (Drive).
•Press the accelerator to the floor.
•Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
Driving
289
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Understanding the shift positions of the 6–speed automatic
transmission (if equipped)
This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive transmission shift strategy.
Adaptive transmission shift strategy offers the optimal transmission
operation and shift quality. When the vehicle’s battery has been
disconnected for any type of service or repair, the transmission will need
to relearn the normal shift strategy parameters, much like having to reset
your radio stations when your vehicle battery has been disconnected.
The adaptive transmission shift strategy allows the transmission to
relearn these operating parameters. This learning process could take
several transmission upshifts and downshifts; during this learning
process, slightly firmer shifts may occur. After this learning process,
normal shift feel and shift scheduling will resume.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
1. Start the engine
2. Press the brake pedal
3. Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
1. Come to a complete stop
2. Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R (Reverse).
Driving
290
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul Off
D (Overdrive) with tow/haul off is the normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through six.
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul On
The tow/haul feature improves transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission gear ranges are available when
using tow/haul.
To activate tow/haul, press the
button on the end of the gearshift
lever.
The TOW HAUL indicator light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster.
Tow/haul delays upshifts to reduce frequency of transmission shifting.
Tow/haul also provides engine braking in all forward gears when the
transmission is in the D (Overdrive) position; this engine braking will
slow the vehicle and assist the driver in controlling the vehicle when
descending a grade. Depending on driving conditions and load
conditions, the transmission may downshift, slow the vehicle and control
the vehicle speed when descending a hill, without the brake pedal being
pressed. The amount of downshift braking provided will vary based upon
the amount the brake pedal is pressed.
Tow/haul may be automatically activated (without pressing the tow/haul
button). This provides engine braking to assist the vehicles braking
system when going downhill and repetitive braking is sensed. Once the
tow/haul mode has been automatically activated it will not automatically
deactivate.
Driving
291
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
To deactivate the tow/haul feature and return to normal driving mode,
press the button on the end of the gearshift lever. The tow/haul light will
no longer be illuminated.
Tow/haul will also deactivate when the vehicle is powered down for a few
minutes.
WARNING: Do not use the tow/haul feature when driving in icy
or slippery conditions as the increased engine braking can cause
the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the
possible loss of vehicle control.
M (Manual) without Overdrive
With the gearshift lever in M (Manual), the driver can change gears up
or down as desired. This is called SelectShift Automatic™ transmission
(SST) mode. By moving the gearshift lever from drive position D
(Overdrive) to M (Manual) you now have control of selecting the gear
you desire using buttons on the shift lever.
To return to normal D (Overdrive) position, move the shift lever back
from M to D.
•The transmission will operate in gears one through six.
2 (Second)
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional
engine braking on downgrades.
1 (First)
•Provides maximum engine braking.
•Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
•The transmission will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; it
will downshift to a lower gear and then shift into 1 (First) when the
vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
•Allowed in D (Overdrive).
•Press the accelerator to the floor.
•Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
Driving
292
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Understanding your SelectShift Automatic™ transmission (SST)
gearshift lever
This vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift Automatic™ transmission
(SST) gearshift lever. The SST is an automatic transmission with the
ability for the driver to change gears up or down (without a clutch) as
desired.
Use the buttons on the shifter to
lock or unlock gears and manually
select gears. Press the + button to
upshift or the – button to downshift.
With the gearshift lever in D
(Drive), press the – button to active
SST. The available and selected
gears will be indicated on the
instrument cluster.
All available gears will be displayed with the current gear indicated.
Press the – button again to lock out gears beginning with the highest
gear. Example: press the – button twice to lock out 6th and 5th gears.
Only the available gears will be displayed and the transmission will
automatically shift between the available gears. Press the + button to
unlock gears.
By moving the gearshift lever from the D (Drive) position to the M
(Manual) position you may now manually select the gear you desire.
Only the current gear will be displayed. Press the + button or the –
button to upshift or downshift. If the – button is pressed at a vehicle
speed that would cause an engine overspeed, the requested gear will
flash then disappear and the transmission will remain in the current gear.
Driving
293
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Recommended shift speeds
Upshift according to the following chart:
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy)
Shift from: Gasoline engines Diesel engines
1 – 2 15 mph (24 km/h) 12 mph (19 km/h)
2 – 3 25 mph (40 km/h) 19 mph (31 km/h)
3 – 4 40 mph (64 km/h) 26 mph (42 km/h)
4 – 5 45 mph (72 km/h) 34 mph (55 km/h)
5 – 6 50 mph (80 km/h) 46 mph (74 km/h)
In order to prevent the engine from running at too low an RPM, which
may cause it to stall, the SST will still automatically make some
downshifts if it has determined that you have not downshifted in time.
Although the SST will make some downshifts for you, it will still allow
you to downshift at any time as long as the SST determines that the
engine will not be damaged from over-revving.
The SST will not automatically upshift, even if the engine is approaching
the RPM limit. It must be shifted manually by pressing the + button.
Engine damage may occur if excessive engine revving is held
without shifting.
Hill start assist (HSA)
The hill start assist feature makes it easier to pull away when the vehicle
is on a slope without the need to use the parking brake. When the hill
start assist feature is active, the vehicle will remain stationary on the
slope for up to two seconds after you release the brake pedal. During
this time, you have time to move your foot from the brake to the
accelerator pedal and pull away. The brakes are released automatically
once the engine has developed sufficient drive to prevent the vehicle
from rolling down the slope. This is an advantage when pulling away on a
slope; for example from a car park ramp, traffic lights or when reversing
uphill into a parking space.
WARNING: The hill start assist feature does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave the vehicle, always apply the
parking brake and select first or reverse gear.
Driving
294
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Using hill start assist
The hill start assist feature is activated automatically when the vehicle is
stopped on a slope greater than five degrees. The hill start assist feature
operates with the vehicle facing downhill if reverse gear is selected. The
hill start assist feature will not operate if the parking brake is activated.
WARNING: You must remain in the vehicle once you have
activated the hill start assist feature.
Activating hill start assist
1. Press the brake pedal to bring the vehicle to a complete standstill.
Keep the brake pedal pressed.
2. If the sensors detect that the vehicle is on a slope, the hill start assist
feature will be activated automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the brake pedal, the vehicle will
remain on the slope without rolling away for approximately up to two
seconds. This hold time will automatically be extended if you are in the
process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The brakes will be released
automatically.
WARNING: If the engine is revved excessively, or if a
malfunction is detected when the hill start assist feature is
active, the hill start assist feature will be deactivated.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Driving
295
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The reverse sensing system (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of
obstacles near the rear bumper when the R (Reverse) is selected and the
vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain
angular or moving objects.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, please read and
understand the limitations of the reverse sensing system as
contained in this section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some
(generally large and fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat
surface at “parking speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the
function of the RSS; this may include reduced performance or a false
activation.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution
when in reverse and when using the RSS.
WARNING: This system is not designed to prevent contact with
small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a
warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to
avoid damaging the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller
objects, particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches,
bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the
normal detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps.
Driving
296
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
The RSS detects obstacles up to
6 feet (2 meters) from the rear
bumper with a decreased coverage
area at the outer corners of the
bumper, (refer to the figures for
approximate zone coverage areas).
As you move closer to the obstacle,
the rate of the tone increases. When
the obstacle is less than 10 inches
(25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound
continuously. If the RSS detects a
stationary or receding object further
than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the
side of the vehicle, the tone will
sound for only three seconds. Once
the system detects an object
approaching, the tone will sound
again.
While receiving a warning the radio
volume may be reduced to a
predetermined level. After the
warning goes away, the radio will return to the previous volume.
The RSS may have reduced performance or an increased chance of false
detection if the tailgate is not locked and in the upright position. If the
tailgate is down, the RSS tone may be heard intermittently or
continuously. The tone may also be heard if items in the truck bed
protrude rearward outside the bed.
The RSS automatically turns on when the gearshift lever is placed in R
(Reverse) and the ignition is on. A control in the message center allows
the driver to disable the system. Refer to Message center in the
Instrument Cluster chapter for more information.
Note: If the system cannot be turned off, refer to MyKey™ restricted
features in the Locks and Security chapter for more information.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a fully integrated electronic trailer
brake controller (TBC) and a trailer with electric trailer brakes is
connected to your vehicle, the RSS will be disabled. When the vehicle is
shifted into reverse, the message center display will remain in the Rear
Park Aid Off selection. For more information on the TBC, refer to the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
Driving
297
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free
from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the
sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will
affect the accuracy of the RSS.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
REARVIEW CAMERA SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The rearview camera system,
located on the tailgate, provides a
video image, which appears in the
rearview mirror or on the navigation
screen (if equipped), of the area
behind the vehicle. It adds
assistance to the driver while
reversing or reverse parking the
vehicle.
To use the camera system, place the transmission in R (Reverse); an
image will display on the left portion of the rearview mirror or on the
navigation screen (if equipped). The area displayed on the screen may
vary according to the vehicle orientation and/or road condition.
Driving
298
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•(1) Rear bumper
•(2) Red zone
•(3) Yellow zone
•(4) Green zone
•(5) Centerline of vehicle
Always use caution while backing.
Objects in the red zone are closest
to your vehicle and objects in the
green zone are further away. Objects
are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to
the yellow or red zones.
Use the side mirrors and rearview mirror to get better coverage on both
sides and rear of the vehicle.
Image delay if displayed through the rearview mirror:
When shifting out of R (Reverse) and into any other gear, the image in
the rearview mirror will remain on for a few seconds before it shuts off
to assist in parking or trailer hookup.
Image delay if displayed through the navigation screen:
After shifting out of R (Reverse) and into any gear other than P (Park),
the image in the navigation screen will remain until the vehicle speed
reaches 5 mph (8 km/h), only if the rear camera delay feature is on, or
until any navigation radio button is pressed.
Note: The default setting for the rear camera delay is off. Press the
“Settings” button found on the navigation screen (if equipped) to set the
rear camera delay feature to on or off.
When towing, the camera system will only see what is being towed
behind the vehicle; this might not provide adequate coverage as it
usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be
seen.
The camera lens for the camera is located on the tailgate. Keep the lens
clean so the video image remains clear and undistorted. Clean the lens
with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
Note: If the camera system image is not clear or seems distorted, it may
be covered with water droplets, snow, mud or any other substance. If
this occurs, clean the camera lens before using the camera system.
Driving
299
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: The camera system is a reverse aid supplement
device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with
the rear view mirror and the side mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the
bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera system.
WARNING: Back up as slow as possible since higher speeds
might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle.
WARNING: Do not use the camera system with the tailgate
open.
If the back end of the vehicle is hit or damaged, then check with your
authorized dealer to have your rearview camera system checked for
proper coverage and operation.
Night time and dark area use
At night time or in dark areas, the camera system relies on the reverse
lamp lighting to produce an image. Therefore it is necessary that both
reverse lamps are operating in order to get a clear image in the dark. If
either of the lamps are not operating, stop using the camera system, at
least in the dark, until the lamp(s) are replaced and functioning.
Servicing
•If the image comes on while the vehicle is not in R (Reverse), have
the system inspected by your authorized dealer.
•If the image is not clear, then check if there is anything covering the
lens such as dirt, mud, ice, snow, etc. If the image is still not clear
after cleaning, have your system inspected by your authorized dealer.
Driving
300
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation
of this type of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in
this chapter.
When four–wheel drive (4WD) is engaged, power is supplied to all four
wheels through a transfer case. 4WD can be selected when additional
driving power is desired.
4WD operation is not recommended on dry pavement. Doing so could
result in difficult disengagement of the transfer case, increased tire wear
and decreased fuel economy.
Manual Shift On Stop (MSOS) 4x4 system (if equipped)
The 4WD system is engaged or
disengaged by rotating the control
for both front wheel hub locks from
the FREE or LOCK position, then
manually engaging or disengaging
the transfer case with the
floor-mounted shifter. For increased
fuel economy in 2WD, rotate both
hub locks to the FREE position.
•For proper operation, make
sure that each hub is fully
engaged and that both hub locks are set to the same position
(both set to LOCK or both set to FREE). To engage LOCK,
turn the hub locks completely clockwise; to disengage the hubs
(FREE), turn the hub locks completely counterclockwise.
•The vehicle should not be driven in 4X4 High or 4X4 Low
modes with the hub locks set to FREE as this condition may
damage driveline system components.
•Some vehicles may be equipped with wheel ornaments that cover the
4x4 manual hub lock. These ornaments must be removed to access
the manual hub locks.
Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly (ESOF) 4x4 system (if equipped)
If equipped with the electronic shift 4WD system, and 4X4 Low is
selected while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h), the
4WD system will not perform a shift. This is normal and should be
no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4L (4X4 Low) for
proper system operation.
Driving
301
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
The ESOF 4WD system:
•provides 4x4 High engagement and disengagement while the vehicle is
moving.
•is operated by a rotary control located on the instrument panel that
allows you select 4x2, 4x4 High or 4x4 Low operation.
•uses auto-manual hub locks that can be engaged and disengaged
automatically based on the 4x4 mode selected.
•auto-manual hub locks can be
manually overridden by rotating
the hub lock control from AUTO
to LOCK if desired.
•automatic operation of the
hub locks is recommended, and
will increase fuel economy
•For proper operation, make
sure that each hub is fully
engaged and that both hub
locks are set to the same position (both set to LOCK or both
set to AUTO). To engage LOCK, turn the hub locks completely
clockwise; to engage AUTO, turn the hub locks completely
counterclockwise.
4WD system indicator lights
The indicator lights illuminate in the message center in the
reconfigurable telltale (RTT) under the following conditions. Refer to
Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
•4X2 - Momentarily illuminates
when 2H is selected on electronic
shift 4WD systems only.
•4X4 HIGH - Illuminates when 4H
(4x4 High) is engaged.
•4X4 LOW - Illuminates when 4L
(4x4 Low) is engaged.
•CHECK 4X4 – Displays when a
4x4 system fault is present
4x2
4x4
HIGH
4x4
LOW
Driving
302
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Using a Manual Shift On Stop (MSOS) 4x4 system (if equipped)
Note: High shift efforts may be encountered when attempting to
shift into and out of 4x4 modes. It is recommended to allow the
vehicle to roll at a speed below 3 mph (5 km/h) when shifting
between modes.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the 4x4 system shifts or engages.
This is normal. In order to reduce engagement noise, it is recommended
that all shifts be performed at speeds below 3 mph (5 km/h).
2H (2WD) – For general on-road driving. Sends power to the rear
wheels only should be used for street and highway driving. Provides
optimal smoothness and fuel economy at high speeds.
4H (4x4 High) – Used for extra traction such as in snow or icy roads or
in off road situations. This mode is not intended for use on dry
pavement.
N (Neutral) – Only used when towing the vehicle. No power to front or
rear wheels.
4L (4x4 Low) – Uses extra gearing to provide maximum power to all
four wheels at reduced speeds. Intended only for off road applications
such as deep sand, steep grades or pulling heavy objects.
Shifting from 2H (2WD) to 4H (4x4 High)
Engage the locking hubs by rotating
the hub lock control from FREE to
LOCK, then move the transfer case
lever from 2H (2WD) to 4H (4x4
High) at a stop or a vehicle speed
below 3 mph (5 km/h).
•For proper operation, make
sure that both indicator
arrows on the hub are aligned,
and that both hubs are set to
LOCK.
Driving
303
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•Do not shift into 4H (4x4
High) with the rear wheels
slipping.
•The vehicle should not be
driven in 4X4 High with the
hub locks disengaged as this
condition may damage
driveline system components.
Shifting from 4H (4x4 High) to 2H (2WD)
Move the transfer case lever to 2H
(2WD) at a stop or a vehicle speed
below 3 mph (5 km/h).
With the vehicle at complete stop,
disengage the locking hubs
(optional) by rotating the hub lock
control from LOCK to FREE.
•For proper operation, make
sure that both indicator arrows on the hub are aligned, and
that both hubs are set to FREE.
Shifting from 2H (2WD) or 4H (4x4 High) to 4L (4x4 Low)
1. Bring the vehicle to a stop or a speed below 3 mph (5 km/h).
2. Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
3. Move the transfer case shift lever
through N (Neutral) directly to 4L
(4x4 Low).
4. If the shift lever does not, or only
partially moves to the 4L (4x4 Low)
position, perform a shift with the
transmission in N (Neutral) and the
vehicle rolling at a speed below
3 mph (5 km/h). This will ensure the transfer case is fully engaged into
4L (4x4 Low).
Note: The vehicle should not be driven in 4X4 High with the hub locks
disengaged as this condition may damage driveline system components.
2H
4H
4L
N
2H
4H
4L
N
2H
4H
4L
N
Driving
304
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Shifting from 4L (4x4 Low) to 4H (4x4 High) or 2H (2WD)
1. Bring the vehicle to a stop or a speed below 3 mph (5 km/h).
2. Place the gearshift lever in N (Neutral).
3. Move the transfer case shift lever
through N (Neutral) directly to 4H
(4x4 High) or 2H (2WD).
4. If the transfer case will not
engage into 4H (4x4 High) or 2H
(2WD), perform a shift with the
transmission in N (Neutral) and the
vehicle rolling at a speed below
3 mph (5 km/h).
5. If shifting to 2H (2WD) with the vehicle at a complete stop, disengage
the locking hubs (optional) by rotating the hub lock control from LOCK
to FREE.
Using the N (Neutral) position
The transfer case neutral
position overrides the
transmission and puts the
vehicle in neutral regardless of
transmission gearshift lever
position. The vehicle can move
forward or backwards.
This position should only be used
when towing the vehicle.
WARNING: Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking
brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle.
2H
4H
4L
N
2H
4H
4L
N
Driving
305
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Using the electronic shift 4WD system (if equipped)
2H (2WD) - For general on-road
driving. Sends power to the rear
wheels only and should be used for
street and highway driving. Provides
optimal smoothness and fuel
economy at high speeds.
4H (4X4 HIGH) - Used for extra
traction such as in snow or icy roads or in off road situations. This
mode is not intended for use on dry pavement.
4L (4X4 LOW) - Uses extra gearing to provide maximum power to all
four wheels at reduced speeds. Intended only for off-road applications
such as deep sand, steep grades, or pulling heavy objects. 4L (4x4 low)
will not engage while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h); this is
normal and should be no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from
4L (4x4 low) for proper operation.
Shifting between 2H (4X2) and 4H (4X4 High)
Move the 4WD control between 2H (4X2) and 4H (4X4 HIGH ) at any
forward speed. The message center will display 4X4 SHIFT IN
PROGRESS during the system shift. 4X4 HIGH will display in the
message center if 4H is selected and 4X2 will momentarily display in the
message center if 2H is selected.
If SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD is displayed in the message
center during the mode shift, transfer case gear tooth blockage is
present. To alleviate this condition, place the transmission in a forward
gear and move the vehicle forward approximately 5 feet (2 meters) to
allow the transfer case to complete the mode shift.
Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator pedal while performing a
shift will improve engagement/disengagement times.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is
normal.
Note: 4X4 high mode is not intended for use on dry pavement.
Shifting to/from 4L (4X4 low)
1. Bring the vehicle to a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
2. Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
3. Move the 4WD control to the desired position.
Driving
306
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
The message center will display 4X4 SHIFT IN PROGRESS during the
shift. The message center will then display the system mode selected. If
any of the above shift conditions are not met, the shift will not occur and
the message center will display information guiding the driver through
the proper shifting procedures.
If SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD is displayed in the message
center, transfer case gear tooth blockage is present. To alleviate this
condition, place the transmission in a forward gear, move the vehicle
forward approximately 5 feet (1.5 m), and shift the transmission back to
neutral to allow the transfer case to complete the range shift.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is
normal.
Note: 4x4 low mode is not intended for use on dry pavement.
Driving off-road with truck and utility vehicles
4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a long front air dam that may become
damaged (due to reduced ground clearance) when taking your vehicle
off-road. This air dam can either be removed or a shorter air dam can be
purchased from your authorized dealer. In either case, if the air dam is
to be removed (or replaced) before going off-road, refer to the
Workshop Manual for the procedure or have your authorized dealer
perform the work for you.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not
grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as
rocks and stumps.
Driving
307
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Basic operating principles
•Do not use 4WD on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components.
4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose
surfaces.
•Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
•Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
•If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
•It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
•It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger
cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive
speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive
cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Driving
308
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
If your vehicle gets stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
If your vehicle is severely stuck, it may need to be pulled out. Front
tow/recovery hooks can be used to recover a vehicle struck in the mud
or snow. Refer to Recovery hooks in the Tires, Wheels and Loading
chapter for more information.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter for transmission
fluid temperature information.
Emergency maneuvers
•In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
•In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
Driving
309
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger
cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive
speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive
cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
•If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Parking
On some 4WD vehicles, when the transfer case is in the N (Neutral)
position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of
the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic
transmission is in P (Park). Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking brake
fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
4WD systems
4WD (when you select a 4WD mode), uses all four wheels to power the
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and
road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case. On 4WD
vehicles, the transfer case allows you to select 4WD when necessary.
Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures can be
found in the Driving chapter. Information on transfer case maintenance
Driving
310
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
can be found in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter. You
should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you
operate your vehicle.
Normal characteristics
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4x4 while
the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunk and ratcheting
sounds. This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed and the
automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for concern.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
Note: If air is released from your tires, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) indicator light may illuminate (if equipped).
Mud and water
If you must drive through high
water, drive slowly. Traction or
brake capability may be limited.
When driving through water,
determine the depth; avoid water
higher than the bottom of the hubs
(if possible) and proceed slowly. If
the ignition system gets wet, the
vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water,
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.
Driving
311
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Driving through deep water may damage the transmission.
Refer to Transmission temperature gauge in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for transmission fluid temperature information.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should
be replaced.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest
Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help
preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by
“treading lightly.”
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
Driving
312
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
When climbing a steep slope or hill,
start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a
higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the
engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to
turn around because you might roll
over. It is better to back down to a
safe location.
Apply just enough power to the
wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip,
spin or lose traction, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating. Do not
descend in neutral; instead,
manually shift to a lower gear. Your
vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply
the brakes steadily. Do not “pump”
the brakes.
Driving on snow and ice
4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do
not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Driving
313
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower
gears. In emergency stopping situations, avoid locking of the wheels. Use
a “squeeze” technique, push on the brake pedal with a steadily increasing
force which allows the wheels to brake yet continue to roll so that you
may steer in the direction you want to travel. If you lock the wheels,
release the brake pedal and repeat the squeeze technique. If your vehicle
is equipped with a Four Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), apply the
brake steadily. Do not “pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of
this chapter for additional information on the operation of the anti-lock
brake system.
WARNING: If you are driving in slippery conditions that require
tire cables, then it is critical that you drive cautiously. Keep
speeds down, allow for longer stopping distances and avoid aggressive
steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control which can
lead to serious injury or death. If the rear end of the vehicle slides
while cornering, steer in the direction of the slide until you regain
control of the vehicle.
Maintenance and modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control.
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box
cover).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
heavy off-road usage.
Driving
314
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
VEHICLE USED AS A STATIONARY POWER SOURCE
Auxiliary equipment called power take-off, or PTO, is often added to the
engine or transmission to operate utility equipment. Examples include a
wheel-lift for tow trucks, cranes, tools for construction or tire service,
and pumping fluids. PTO applications draw auxiliary horsepower from
the powertrain, often while the vehicle is stationary. In this condition,
there is limited cooling air flow through the radiator and around the
vehicle that normally occurs when a vehicle is moving. The aftermarket
PTO system installer, having the most knowledge of the final application,
is responsible for determining whether additional chassis heat protection
or powertrain cooling is required, and alerting the user to the safe and
proper operation.
Ford Super Duty Vehicles are approved for use as a stationary (including
split shaft capability) or mobile power source, within limits and operating
guidelines detailed in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book,
found at www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas, and through the Ford Truck
Body Builders Advisory Service.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of
the wheel rims (for cars) or the
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.
Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your
engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where
the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the
transmission and cause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
Driving
315
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
SNOWPLOWING
Ford recommends that the Super Duty F-Series used for snow removal
include the Snow Plow Package Option.
Installing the snowplow
Weight limits and guidelines for selecting and installing the snowplow can
be found in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book, Snowplow
section, found at www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas. A typical installation
affects the following:
•Certification to government safety laws such as occupant protection
and airbag deployment, braking, and lighting. Look for an “Alterer’s
Label” on the vehicle from the snowplow installer certifying that the
installation meets all applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS).
•The Total Accessory Reserve Capacity (TARC) is shown on the lower
right side of the vehicle’s Safety Compliance Certification Label. This
applies to Ford-completed vehicles of 10,000 lb. (4,536 kg) GVWR or
less. This is the weight of permanently-attached auxiliary equipment,
such as snowplow frame-mounting hardware, that can be added to the
vehicle and satisfy Ford compliance certification to FMVSS. Exceeding
this weight may require the auxiliary equipment installer additional
safety certification responsibility. The Front Accessory Reserve
Capacity (FARC) is added for customer convenience.
•Rear ballast weight behind the rear axle may be required to prevent
exceeding the FGAWR, and provide front-to-rear weight balance for
proper braking and steering.
•Front wheel toe may require re-adjustment to prevent premature
uneven tire wear. Specifications are found in the Ford Workshop
Manual.
•Headlight aim may require re-adjustment.
•The tire air pressures recommended for general driving are found on
the vehicle’s Safety Certification Label. The maximum cold inflation
pressure for the tire and associated load rating is imprinted on the tire
sidewall. Tire air pressure may require re-adjustment within these
pressure limits to accommodate the additional weight of the snowplow
installation.
•Federal and some local regulations require additional exterior lamps
for snowplow-equipped vehicles. Consult your authorized dealer for
additional information.
Driving
316
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Operating the vehicle with the snowplow attached
Do not use your vehicle for snow removal until it has been driven at
least 500 miles (800 km).
The attached snowplow blade restricts airflow to the radiator, and may
cause the engine to run at a higher temperature: Attention to engine
temperature is especially important when outside temperatures are
above freezing. Angle the blade to maximize airflow to the radiator and
monitor engine temperature to determine whether a left or right angle
provides the best performance.
Follow the severe duty schedule in your scheduled maintenance
information for engine oil and transmission fluid change intervals.
Snowplowing with your airbag-equipped vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with a driver and passenger airbag
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) The SRS is designed to activate in
certain frontal and offset frontal collisions when the vehicle sustains
sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
Careless or high speed driving while plowing snow which results in
sufficient vehicle decelerations can deploy the airbag. Such driving also
increases the risk of accidents.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
Never remove or defeat the “tripping mechanisms” designed into the
snow removal equipment by its manufacturer. Doing so may cause
damage to the vehicle and the snow removal equipment as well as
possible airbag deployment.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) or its fuses. See your
Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.
WARNING: Additional equipment such as snowplow equipment
may effect the performance of the airbag sensors increasing the
risk of injury. Please refer to the Body Builders Layout Book for
instructions about the appropriate installation of additional equipment.
Driving
317
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Transmission operation while plowing
Operate the vehicle with the automatic transmission gearshift lever in
the D (Overdrive) position and tow/haul off.
•Shift transfer case to 4L (4x4 Low) when plowing in small areas at
speeds below 5 mph (8 km/h).
•Shift transfer case to 4H (4x4 High) when plowing larger areas or light
snow at higher speeds. Do not exceed 15 mph (24 km/h).
•Do not shift the transmission from a forward gear to R (Reverse) until
the engine is at idle and the wheels are stopped.
•If the vehicle is stuck, shift the transmission in a steady motion
between forward and reverse gears. Do not rock the vehicle for more
than a few minutes. The transmission and tires may be damaged or
the engine can overheat.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature. Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute. The
transmission and tires may be damaged or the engine may
overheat.
Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter for transmission
fluid temperature information.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (55 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving
318
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles sold in the U.S. : Getting roadside assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
•24-hours, seven days a week
•for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your Owner manual portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
•a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit).
•battery jump start.
•lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility).
•fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of
gasoline or 5.0 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fuel
delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a
12-month period.
•winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
•towing – Ford and Lincoln eligible vehicles towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56 km) of the disablement location or to the
nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an
authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56 km) from the disablement
location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 35 miles (56 km).
Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Vehicles sold in the U.S. : Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is found in the owner’s information
portfolio in the glove compartment.
Roadside Emergencies
319
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
U.S. Ford vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest
dealership within 35 miles (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673. Customers
will be asked to submit their original receipts.
Vehicles sold in Canada : Getting roadside assistance
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1–800–665–2006.
Vehicles sold in Canada : Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In Canada, the card is found in the Warranty
Guide in the glove box.
Canadian Roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U.S.
coverage. Please refer to your Warranty Guide or visit our website at
www.ford.ca for information on Canadian services and benefits.
Canadian customers who need to obtain roadside information, call
1-800-665-2006 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
The hazard flasher is located on the
steering column, just behind the
steering wheel. The hazard flashers
will operate when the ignition is in
any position or if the key is not in
the ignition.
•Press the flasher control and all
front and rear direction signals
flash.
•Press the flasher control again to
turn them off.
Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
Roadside Emergencies
320
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF
In the event of a moderate to severe collision, this vehicle is equipped
with a fuel pump shut-off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the
engine. Not every impact will cause a shut-off.
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision due to this feature, you may
restart your vehicle by doing the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the off position and wait 10 seconds.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the on position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to re-enable fuel pump.
Note: For vehicles equipped with a diesel engine, see the Diesel
supplement for additional Fuel Pump Shut-off reset instructions.
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary repair fuel leaks
after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury.
Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected
by an authorized dealer after any collision.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
15
Roadside Emergencies
321
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
Cartridge
maxi
fuses
Fuse link
cartridge
2A Grey Grey — — —
3A Violet Violet — — —
4A Pink Pink — — —
5A Tan Tan — — —
7.5A Brown Brown — — —
10A Red Red — — —
15A Blue Blue — — —
20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue
25A Natural Natural — Natural Natural
30A Green Green Green Pink Pink
40A — — Orange Green Green
50A — — Red Red Red
60A — — Blue Yellow Yellow
70A — — Tan — Brown
80A — — Natural Black Black
Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panel is located in the
passenger’s footwell. Remove the
panel cover to access the fuses.
Roadside Emergencies
322
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
To remove the fuse panel cover, pull
the panel toward you. When the
clips of the panel disengage, let the
panel fall easily.
To remove a fuse use the fuse puller
tool provided on the fuse panel
cover.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
Always replace the cover to the passenger compartment fuse
panel before reconnecting the battery.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Roadside Emergencies
323
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
The fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Circuits
1 30A Not used (spare)
2 15A Upfitter relay #4
3 30A Not used (spare)
4 10A Interior lights, Hood lamp
5 20A Moon roof
6 5A Driver seat module
7 7.5A Driver seat switch, Driver lumbar
motor
8 10A Power mirror switch
9 10A Upfitter relay #3
10 10A Run/accessory relay, Customer
access feed
11 10A Instrument cluster
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22 33 41
42
43
44
45
34
35
36
37
23
24
25
26
27
28 38 46
39 4729
32
40
31
30
48
49
Roadside Emergencies
324
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Circuits
12 15A Interior lighting, Lighted running
board lamps
13 15A Right turn signals and brake
lamps, Right trailer tow (TT) stop
turn relay
14 15A Left turn signals and brake lamps,
Left TT stop turn relay
15 15A High-mounted stop lamps, Backup
lamps, TT backup relay
16 10A Right low beam headlamp
17 10A Left low beam headlamp
18 10A Keypad illumination, Passive
anti-theft indicator (PATS),
Powertrain control module
(PCM), Brake shift interlock
19 20A Subwoofer
20 20A Power door locks
21 10A Brake on/off switch
22 20A Horn
23 15A Not used (spare)
24 15A Steering wheel control module,
Diagnostic connector, Power fold
mirror relay, Remote keyless entry
25 15A Not used (spare)
26 5A Steering wheel control module
27 20A Amplifier
28 15A Ignition switch
29 20A SYNC威, GPS module, Radio
faceplate
30 15A Parking lamp relay, TT parking
lamp relay
Roadside Emergencies
325
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Circuits
31 5A Trailer brake controller (brake
signal), Customer access
32 15A Moon roof, Telescoping mirror
switch, Auto dimming mirrors,
Power invertor, Driver and
passenger door lock switch
illumination
33 10A Restraint control module
34 10A Not used (spare)
35 5A Select shift switch, Reverse park
aid module, Trailer brake control
module
36 10A Fuel tank select switch
37 10A PTC heater
38 10A Radio faceplate
39 15A High beam headlamps
40 10A Parking lamps (in mirrors), Roof
marker lamps
41 7.5A Passenger airbag deactivation
indicator
42 5A Not used (spare)
43 10A Wiper relay
44 10A Upfitter switches
45 5A Not used (spare)
46 10A Climate control
47 15A Fog lamps, Fog lamp indicator (in
switch)
48 30A Circuit
Breaker
Power windows switch, Power
rear sliding window switch
49 Relay Delayed accessory
Roadside Emergencies
326
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Power distribution box
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The
power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace
the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Circuits
1 Relay Blower motor
2 — Not used
3 Relay Urea heaters (diesel engine)
4 — Not used
5 Relay Rear window defroster
6 — Not used
7 50A* Rear window defroster
8 30A* Passenger seat
9 30A* Driver seat
Roadside Emergencies
327
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Circuits
10 — Not used
11 — Not used
12 — Not used
13 — Not used
14 — Not used
15 Diode Fuel pump (diesel engine)
16 — Not used
17 15A** Heated mirror
18 — Not used
19 — Not used
20 — Not used
21 — Not used
22 30A* Trailer tow electric brake
23 40A* Blower motor
24 — Not used
25 30A* Wipers
26 30A* Trailer tow park lamps
27 25A* Urea heaters (diesel engine)
28 — Buss bar
29 Relay Trailer tow park lamps
30 Relay A/C clutch
31 Relay Wipers
32 — Not used
33 15A** Vehicle power (VPWR) 1
34 15A** VPWR 2 (diesel engine)
20A** VPWR 2 (gas engine)
35 10A** VPWR 3
36 15A** VPWR 4 (diesel engine)
20A** VPWR 4 (gas engine)
37 10A** VPWR 5 (diesel engine)
Roadside Emergencies
328
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Circuits
38 Relay Powertrain control module
(PCM) (diesel engine),
Electronic control module (ECM)
(gas engine)
39 10A** 4x4 hub lock
40 15A** 4x4 electronic lock
41 — Not used
42 — Not used
43 — Not used
44 — Not used
45 10A** Run/start relay coil
46 10A** Transmission control module
(TCM) keep-alive power (diesel
engine)
47 10A** A/C clutch feed
48 Relay Run/start
49 10A** Rearview camera system
50 10A** Blower motor relay coil
51 — Not used
52 10A** PCM/ECM/TCM run/start
53 10A** 4x4 module
54 10A** Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
run/start
55 10A** Rear window defroster coil,
Battery charge coil
56 20A** Passenger compartment fuse
panel run/start feed
57 Relay Fuel pump
58 — Not used
59 — Not used
60 — Not used
61 — Not used
Roadside Emergencies
329
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Circuits
62 — Not used
63 — Not used
64 — Not used
65 — Not used
66 20A** Fuel pump
67 — Not used
68 10A** Fuel pump relay coil
69 — Not used
70 10A** Trailer tow backup lamp
71 10A** Cannister vent (gas engine)
72 10A** PCM/ECM relay coil feed
keep-alive power
73 — Not used
74 Relay Trailer tow left-hand stop/turn
75 Relay Trailer tow right-hand stop/turn
76 Relay Backup lamp
77 — Not used
78 — Not used
79 — Not used
80 — Not used
81 — Not used
82 20A* Auxiliary power point #2
83 20A* Auxiliary power point #1
84 30A* 4x4 shift motor
85 30A* Heated/cooled seats
86 25A* ABS coil feed
87 20A* Auxiliary power point #5
88 — Not used
89 40A* Starter motor
90 25A* Trailer tow battery charge
91 — Not used
Roadside Emergencies
330
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Circuits
92 20A* Auxiliary power point #4
93 20A* Auxiliary power point #3
94 25A* Upfitter #1
95 25A* Upfitter #2
96 50A* ABS pump
97 40A* Invertor
98 — Not used
99 — Not used
100 25A* Trailer tow turn signals
101 Relay Starter
102 Relay Trailer tow battery charge
103 — Not used
104 — Not used
105 — Not used
106 — Not used
107 — Not used
* Cartridge fuses ** Mini fuses
CHANGING THE TIRES
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS), the indicator light will illuminate when the spare tire is
in use. To restore the full functionality of the monitoring system, all road
wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted
on the vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with TPMS, have a flat serviced by an
authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the TPMS sensors, refer
to Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter. Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as
possible. During repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have the
authorized dealer inspect the TPMS sensor for damage.
Roadside Emergencies
331
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) and should not be used.
However, if you must use a sealant, the TPMS sensor and valve stem
on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer.
WARNING: Refer to Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for important
information. If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it
will no longer function.
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for
temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size
and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by
Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be
replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that
is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
•Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
•Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
•
Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire
•Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time
•Use commercial car washing equipment
•Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire
Roadside Emergencies
332
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
•Handling, stability and braking performance
•Comfort and noise
•Ground clearance and parking at curbs
•Winter weather driving capability
•Wet weather driving capability
It is not recommended that the vehicle be operated in 4WD modes with
a temporary emergency spare tire. If 4WD operation is necessary, do not
operate above speeds of 10 mph (16 km/h) or for distances above
50 miles (80 km).
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
•Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
•Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
•Use commercial car washing equipment
•Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to
impairment of the following:
•Handling, stability and braking performance
•Comfort and noise
•Ground clearance and parking at curbs
•Winter weather driving capability
•Wet weather driving capability
•All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)
•Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional
caution should be given to:
•Towing a trailer
•Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
•Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and
seek service as soon as possible.
Roadside Emergencies
333
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Spare tire information
Note: If your vehicle is equipped the tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS), the system indicator light will illuminate when the spare is in
use. To restore the full functionality of the TPMS system, all road wheels
equipped with the tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on
the vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with TPMS, have a flat tire serviced by an
authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the TPMS sensor; refer
to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Tires, Wheel and
Loading chapter. Replace the spare tire with the road tire as soon as
possible.
Stopping and securing the vehicle
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you
change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in
both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the tire being
changed.
Park on a level surface, activate
hazard flashers and set the parking
brake.
•Automatic transmission: Place
gearshift lever in P (Park).
•Manual or electronic shift 4x4:
Place transfer case in 4H or 4L.
Location of the spare tire and tools
If your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire, jack and associated tools,
refer to the following table for their locations:
Tool Location
Spare tire (pick-up trucks only) Under the vehicle, just forward of
the rear bumper
Jack Regular cab and Crew Cab:
Fastened to floor pan behind
rearmost seat on passenger side
SuperCab: Under rear bench seat
on passenger side
Roadside Emergencies
334
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Tool Location
Jack handle, lug wrench, lug
wrench extension (only available
on Dual Rear Wheel [DRW]
vehicles) and wheel chock (only
available on Single Rear Wheel
[SRW] vehicles equipped with a
diesel engine)
Regular cab: Fastened to floor
behind driver seat
SuperCab: Fastened to floor under
rear seat
Crew Cab: Fastened to floor
behind rear seat at driver side
Key and spare tire lock In the glove box
Removing the spare tire (with spare tire carrier only)
1. The following tools are required to remove the spare tire:
•one handle extension and two
typical extensions. To assemble,
align button with hole and slide
parts together. To disconnect,
depress button and pull apart.
•one wheel nut wrench. Slide over
square end of jack handle.
•Vehicles equipped with dual
rear wheels, insert the lug
wrench extension into the lug
wrench to reach the lug nuts.
Roadside Emergencies
335
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
2. Attach the spare tire lock key (A)
to the jack handle (B).
3. Fully insert the jack handle (with
one extension) through the bumper
hole and into the guide tube. The
key and lock will engage with a
slight push and counterclockwise
turn. Some resistance will be felt
when turning the jack handle
assembly.
4. Turn the handle counterclockwise
and lower the spare tire until you
can slide the tire rearward and the
cable is slack.
5. Remove the retainer through the center of the wheel.
If equipped with a tether, perform the following additional steps:
6. Lift the spare tire on end to
access the tether attachment.
7. Use the lug wrench to remove the
lug nut from the spare tire tether.
8. If not replacing the spare or flat
tire to the underbody storage area,
raise the wheel retainer up into the
installed position.
9. Use the attached fastener strap
(on the spare tire tether) to attach
the tether end to the winch retainer prior to raising to the installed
position.
Roadside Emergencies
336
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Tire change procedure
WARNING: When one of the rear wheels is off the ground, the
transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or
slipping off the jack, even if the transmission is in P (Park).
WARNING: To prevent the vehicle from moving when you
change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in
both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and
end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed.
WARNING: If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else
could be seriously injured.
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.
1. Turn engine off and block the
wheel that is diagonally opposite of
the flat tire using the wheel chock,
if equipped. If the vehicle is a
4x4, lock the manual hub on the
wheel.
2. Remove the jack, jack handle, lug wrench and spare tire from the
stowage locations.
3. Use the tip of the lug wrench to remove any wheel trim.
4. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn counterclockwise but do not
remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground.
Roadside Emergencies
337
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
The following steps apply to F–250/F–350 Single Rear Wheel
(SRW) vehicles only:
5. Insert the hooked end of the jack
handle into the jack and use the
handle to slide the jack under the
vehicle.
6. Position the jack according to the
following guides:
•Front (4x2)
•Front driver side (4x4)
Note: Make sure the jack fits onto
the flat area on the outboard side of
the differential.
Roadside Emergencies
338
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•Front passenger side (4x4)
Note: View shown from the rear of
the vehicle to clearly identify the
jack point. Place the jack directly
under the axle.
•Rear
Never use the front or rear
differential as a jacking point.
WARNING: To lessen the
risk of personal injury, do
not put any part of your body
under the vehicle while changing a
tire. Do not start the engine when
your vehicle is on the jack. The
jack is only meant for changing
the tire.
Roadside Emergencies
339
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
7. Turn the jack handle clockwise
until the wheel is completely off the
ground and high enough to install
the spare tire.
8. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
9. Replace the flat tire with the
spare tire, making sure the valve
stem is facing outward for all front wheels and single rear wheel vehicles.
If replacing an inboard rear tire on dual rear wheel vehicles, the valve
stem must be facing outward. If replacing the outboard wheel, the valve
stem must be facing inward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is
snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel
has been lowered.
10. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
Go to Step 19.
The following steps apply to F–350 Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) and
F–450/F–550 vehicles only:
11. Slide the notched end of the
jack handle over the release valve
and use the handle to slide the jack
under the vehicle. Make sure the
valve is closed by turning it
clockwise.
12. Position the jack according to
the following guides:
•Front (4x2): F–350 DRW
Note: Place jack directly under
I-beam.
Roadside Emergencies
340
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•Front driver side (4x4): F–350
DRW
Note: Make sure the jack fits onto
the flat area on the outboard side of
the differential housing.
•Front passenger side (4x4): F-350
DRW
Note: View shown from the rear of
the vehicle to clearly identify the
jack point.
Note: Place the jack directly under
axle and inboard of the radius arm
so that the jack clears the radius
arm.
•Front: F–450/F–550
•Rear: F-350 DRW
Roadside Emergencies
341
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•Rear: F-450/F-550
13. Insert the jack handle into the
pump linkage.
14. Use an up-and-down motion
with the jack handle to raise the
wheel completely off the ground.
Hydraulic jacks are equipped
with a pressure release valve
that prevents lifting loads which
exceed the jack’s rated capacity.
15. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
16. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem
is facing outward on all front an inboard rear wheels. If replacing the
outboard wheel, the valve stem must be facing inward. Reinstall the lug
nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug
nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
17. Lower the wheel by slowly turning the release valve
counterclockwise. Opening the release valve slowly will provide a more
controlled rate of descent.
Roadside Emergencies
342
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
The following steps apply to all vehicles:
18. Remove the jack and fully
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown. Refer to Wheel lug nut
torque specifications later in this
chapter for the proper lug nut
torque specification.
8–lug nut torque sequence
10–lug nut torque sequence
19. Stow the flat tire. Refer to Stowing the flat/spare tire if the vehicle
is equipped with a spare tire carrier.
20. Stow the jack, jack handle and lug wrench. Make sure the jack is
securely fastened so it does not rattle when driving.
21. Unblock the wheels.
Roadside Emergencies
343
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
The following step applies to F–250/F–350 Single Rear Wheel
(SRW) vehicles only:
22. When installing the wheel center
ornaments, ensure that the
ornament retention towers on the
back side of the ornament are
aligned with the studs/lug nuts. The
retention towers are designed to be
installed over the studs/nuts and
retain to the flange on the lug nut.
If the ornament retention towers are
aligned between the studs/lug nuts,
the ornament is improperly
installed. This improper installation
may appear and sound correct, but
will not keep the ornament on the
vehicle. Ornaments improperly
installed in this manner will fall off
or become loose with minimal force
or impact.
Installing dual rear wheel ornaments
1. Align the ornament with the lug
nuts.
•(1) is the clip and (2) is the
flange.
2. Hold the ornament so that all of
the retention clips are sitting on the
flange of the lug nuts.
1 2
Roadside Emergencies
344
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
3. Use your hand or rubber mallet to
tap the ornament in a star pattern.
There should be an even gap
between the ornament and the
wheel.
4. Be sure to install all the clips on the nuts over the flanges so that
there is an even gap all around and the retention clips are fully seated.
Roadside Emergencies
345
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Stowing the flat/spare tire
Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in
failure of cable or loss of spare tire.
If you are stowing a tire that requires reattaching it to the
vehicle with a tether, perform these steps first, then proceed with
the steps following.
1. Place the tire on end with the
valve stem facing toward the front
of the vehicle.
2. Place the tether into the bolt
holes in the wheel and attach the
lug nut using the lug winch.
3. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing up.
4. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer
through the wheel center. Pull on the cable to align the components at
the end of the cable.
5. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed
position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle
increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when
the tire is raised to the maximum tightness. Tighten to the best of your
ability, to the point where the ratchet/slip occurs, if possible. The spare
tire carrier will not allow you to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier
ratchets or slips with little effort, take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer for assistance at your earliest convenience.
6. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly
tightened. Try to push or pull, then turn the tire to be sure it will not
move. Loosen and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the
spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire.
7. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire
pressure (every six months, per scheduled maintenance information),
or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other
components.
8. If removed, install the spare tire lock (if equipped) into the bumper
drive tube with the spare tire lock key (if equipped) and jack handle.
Roadside Emergencies
346
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or
brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with
the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct
metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in
motion, resulting in loss of control.
On vehicles equipped with single rear wheels, retighten the lug nuts to
the specified torque at 100 miles (160 km) after any wheel disturbance
(tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
On vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels, retighten the wheel lug nuts
to the specified torque at 100 miles (160 km), and again at 500 miles
(800 km) of new vehicle operation and after any wheel disturbance (tire
rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
Bolt size Wheel lug nut torque*
ft-lb N•m
M14 x 1.5 165 224
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
It is important to follow the proper wheel mounting and lug nut torque
procedures.
On all two-piece flat wheel nuts,
apply one drop of motor oil between
the flat washer and the nut.
Roadside Emergencies
347
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Inspect the wheel pilot hole and
mounting surface prior to
installation. Remove any visible
corrosion or loose particles.
JUMP STARTING
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if
exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could
result in injury or vehicle damage.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,
eyes and clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission vehicle.
Automatic transmissions do not have push-start capability. Attempting to
push-start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may have firm soft shifts, firm shifts or both. This operation
is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation.
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
Roadside Emergencies
348
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
the assisting (boosting) battery.
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the
positive (+) cable to the positive
(+) terminal of the assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to
the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s
engine, away from the battery and
the carburetor/fuel injection system.
Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable to fuel lines, engine rocker
covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points.
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of both
engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
+
–
+
–
2
3
14
Roadside Emergencies
349
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the jumper cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
the assisting (boosting) battery.
1. Remove the jumper cable from
the ground metal surface.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from
the positive (+) terminal of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from
the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
+
–
+
–
DA
B
C
4D
1
2
3
Roadside Emergencies
350
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that the vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed
equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not
approved a slingbelt towing procedure.
On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels
on the ground and the rear wheels off the ground using a wheel lift
On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed using
flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground. However, a wheel
lift may be used to lift the rear of the vehicle so long as, depending on
vehicle configurations, the following preparations are met:
•On Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly (ESOF) vehicles, the 4x4 control is
turned to the 2WD position prior to towing.
•On manual-shift transfer case vehicles, the front wheel hub locks are
in the FREE position prior to towing.
Roadside Emergencies
351
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Towing an ESOF 4x4 vehicle with the front wheels on the ground
without disengaging the front hubs may cause damage to the automatic
transmission.
Note: Towing a 4x2 or an ESOF 4x4 vehicle with the rear wheels on the
ground for more than 50 miles (80 km) and/or in excess of 35 mph
(56 km/h) may cause damage to the automatic transmission.
Note: On Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) vehicles, an outer rear wheel must be
removed prior to using a wheel lift wrecker.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
Emergency Towing
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle (without access
to wheel dollies, car hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle) your
vehicle (regardless of transmission powertrain configuration) can be flat
towed (all wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
•Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being towed in a forward
direction.
•Place the transmission in N (Neutral). Refer to Brake-shift interlock
in the Driving chapter for specific instructions if you cannot move the
gear shift lever into N (Neutral).
•Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph (56 km/h).
•Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).
Roadside Emergencies
352
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized
dealer. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will
provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training,
equipment or both, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to
perform all warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the
warranty repair needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another
authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by
Ford.
Away from home
If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed
below to find the nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are available online at
www.fordowner.com
These are some of the items that can be found online:
•U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name, City/State, or Zip Code
•Owner Guides
•Maintenance Schedules
•Recalls
•Ford Extended Service Plans
Customer Assistance
353
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•Ford Genuine Accessories
•Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Online
www.ford.ca
Additional assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center
In order to help you serve you better, please have the following
information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center:
•Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•Your telephone number (home and business)
•The name of the authorized dealer and city where located
•The vehicle’s current odometer reading
In some states, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing
remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final
repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
Customer Assistance
354
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership of
a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE
before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose
to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act,
resort to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step
Customer Assistance
355
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
procedure outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the services
you need section, you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact
both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of
the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not
want to participate in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you may
participate in the arbitration process. An arbitration hearing will be
scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting
before an impartial person. The arbitrator will consider the testimony
provided and make a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided
within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB. You are not
bound by the decision, and may reject the decision and proceed to court
where all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute, and decision, are
admissible in the court action. Should you choose to accept the BBB
AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance
letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below,
please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked
for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be
mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB
along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the
claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800
Arlington, Virginia 22203–1833
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford
Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
Customer Assistance
356
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases
where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial
third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces.
For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP
Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
Customer Assistance
357
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Asia-Pacific Region, Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands, Central
America, the Caribbean, and Israel, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBAL INITIATIVES
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
For customers in Guam, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana
Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel
free to call our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD (3673).
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Puerto Rico, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized
dealer cannot help you, contact:
Ford International Business Development Inc.
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 11957
Caparra Heights Station
San Juan, Puerto Rico 00922-1957
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: prcac@ford.com
www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in the
Middle East, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized
dealer cannot help you, contact:
Ford Middle East
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 21470
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Telephone: +971 4 3326084
Toll-Free Number for the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia: 800 8971409
Local Telephone Number for Kuwait: 24810575
FAX: +971 4 3327299
Email: menacac@ford.com
www.me.ford.com
Customer Assistance
358
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the
above locations, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations & Global
Growth Initiatives by emailing expcac@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by contacting Helm, Incorporated using the contact information listed
previously in this section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
Customer Assistance
359
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510, or online at:
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.
Customer Assistance
360
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft威Detail Wash (ZC-3-A), which is
available from your authorized dealer.
•Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
•Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
•Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
•Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
•It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
•Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time. Use Motorcraft威Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), which is available from your authorized dealer.
•Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
•Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
•If your vehicle is equipped with running boards, do not use
rubber, plastic and vinyl protectant products on the running
board surface, as the area may become slippery.
Exterior chrome
•Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft威Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
•Use Motorcraft威Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15), available from
your authorized dealer. Apply the product as you would a wax to
clean bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a
few minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
•Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads
as they can scratch the chrome surface.
Cleaning
361
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WAXING
•Wash the vehicle first.
•Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives.
•Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
PAINT CHIPS
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
•Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
•Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
•Clean weekly with Motorcraft威Wheel and Tire Cleaner, which is
available from your authorized dealer. Heavy dirt and brake dust
accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse thoroughly
with a strong stream of water.
•Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
•Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Industrial-strength (heavy-duty) cleaners, or
cleaning chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove
brake dust and dirt, could wear away the clear coat finish over time.
•Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
•To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft威Bug and Tar Remover ,
available from your authorized dealer.
Cleaning
362
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
•Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
•Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
•Spray Motorcraft威Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all
parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean.
•Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
•Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug
well, or the area in and around these locations.
•Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
•6.2L V8 gasoline engine
Cleaning
363
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•6.8L V10 gasoline engine
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your authorized dealer.
•For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft威Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
•If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft威Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellant
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
•The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft威Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your authorized dealer.
•The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft威Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32-A) in
the U.S., or Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid [CXC-37-(A, B,
D, or F)] in Canada, available from your authorized dealer. This
washer fluid contains special solution in addition to alcohol which
Cleaning
364
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
helps to remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and
windshield from automated car wash facilities. Be sure to replace
wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly.
•Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
•Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
INSTRUMENT PANEL/INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS
(EXCEPT HARLEY-DAVIDSON)
Clean the instrument panel, interior trim areas and cluster lens with a
clean and damp, white cotton cloth, then with a clean and dry, white
cotton cloth.
•Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion
of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
•Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
•Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
•Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill on interior
surfaces. If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damage may not be
covered by your warranty.
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents
when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument
panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth.
2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean, white cotton cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution. If the spot cannot
be completely cleaned by this method, the area may be cleaned using a
commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive
interiors.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product
to a clean, white, cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled
area–allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes.
Cleaning
365
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to
clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONSOLE (HARLEY-DAVIDSON ONLY)
Your vehicle’s instrument panel and console are uniquely painted with
both high and low gloss paints that require special care. The high gloss
area is similar to that of the vehicle’s exterior; the low gloss area is
designed to help protect the driver from undesirable windshield
reflection.
High gloss paint area
In order to maintain the finish of the instrument panel and console, the
high gloss areas should be treated similar to the that of exterior paint or
glossy plastic surfaces. When cleaning the high gloss areas:
•Do not use paper towels or newspaper.
•Do not use silicone or Teflon威(PTFE)-based products.
Dust the high gloss areas with a clean, dry cloth, or use Motorcraft威
Dusting Cloth (ZC-24).
For general cleaning, use mild, soapy water and a soft, damp cloth, then
dry with a clean, dry cloth.
For removal of fine scuffs and scratches, use Scotch-Brite Microfiber
Cloth or cheese cloth along with Motorcraft威Premium Liquid Wax
(ZC-53-A). Note: Removal of deep scuffs and scratches should be
performed by an authorized dealer or an experienced repair facility.
Low gloss paint area
The low gloss area of the instrument panel’s upper dash should be
cleaned with mild, soapy water and a soft, damp cloth, then dried with a
clean, dry cloth. When cleaning the low gloss areas:
•Do not use paper towels or newspaper.
•Do not use silicone or Teflon威(PTFE)-based products.
•Do not use exterior paint waxes or sealants.
Dust the low gloss areas with a clean, dry cloth, or use Motorcraft威
Dusting Cloth (ZC-24).
Cleaning
366
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and safety belts:
•Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
•Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft威Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).
•If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft威Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14). In Canada, use
Motorcraft威Multi-Purpose Cleaner (CXC-101).
•If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
•Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the
vehicle’s seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.
LEATHER SEATS
(IF EQUIPPED, EXCEPT FOR THE KING RANCH姞EDITION)
For King Ranch威leather seats, refer to a separate section in this
chapter.
•Clean spills and stains as quickly as possible.
•For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For
more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water
solution. In Canada, use Motorcraft威Vinyl Cleaner (CXC-93). Dry the
area with a soft cloth.
•If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and
water solution, the leather may be cleaned using a commercially
available leather cleaning product designed for automotive interiors.
•To check for compatibility, first test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous part of the leather.
•Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing or
damage to the leather.
Cleaning
367
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
LEATHER SEATS FOR THE KING RANCH姞EDITION ONLY
(IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle is equipped with seating covered in premium, top-grain
leather which is extremely durable, but still requires special care and
maintenance in order to ensure longevity and comfort.
Regular cleaning and conditioning will maintain the appearance of the
leather.
Cleaning
For dirt, use a vacuum cleaner then use a clean, damp cloth or soft brush.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution.
•Clean spills as quickly as possible.
•Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the
leather as cleaners may darken the leather.
•Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard, orange juice or oil-based
products on the leather as they may permanently stain the leather.
•Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl or plastics.
Scratches
Natural Markings - Because the leather in the seat comes from genuine
steer hides, there will be evidence of naturally occurring markings, such
as small scars. These markings give character to the seating covers and
should be considered as proof of a genuine leather product.
In order to lessen the appearance of certain scratches and other wear
marks, apply conditioner on the affected area following the same
instructions as in the Conditioning section.
Conditioning
Bottles of King Ranch威Leather Conditioner are available at the King
Ranch威Saddle Shop. Visit the website at www.krsaddleshop.com,or
telephone (in the United States) 1–800–282–KING (5464). If you are
unable to obtain King Ranch威Leather Conditioner, use another premium
leather conditioner.
•Clean the surfaces using the steps outlined in the Cleaning section.
•Ensure the leather is dry then apply a nickel-sized amount of
conditioner to a clean, dry cloth.
•Rub the conditioner into leather until it disappears. Allow the
conditioner to dry and repeat the process for the entire interior. If a
film appears, wipe off film with a dry, clean cloth.
Cleaning
368
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
Note: Use care when using a power washer to clean the driveline,
especially the driveshaft and interfacing components. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage.
FORD AND LINCOLN CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your authorized dealer has many quality products available to clean your
vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products have been
specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom
designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle. Each
product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid
specifications. For best results, use the following products or products of
equivalent quality:
Motorcraft威Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft威Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft威Detail Wash (ZC-3–A)
Motorcraft威Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft威Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft威Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft威Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)
Motorcraft威Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft威Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft威Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft威Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft威Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft威Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A)
Cleaning
369
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide to
find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft威parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
•Do not work on a hot engine.
•Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
•Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
•Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes)
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
Working with the engine on
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or
personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
Maintenance and Specifications
370
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom left corner of the instrument
panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle to
release the auxiliary latch located at
the top center of the grille. Slide the
handle left to release the auxiliary
latch.
3. Lift the hood until the lift
cylinders hold it open.
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Refer to the diesel supplement for diesel engine component locations.
Maintenance and Specifications
371
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
6.2L V8 gasoline engine
1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil dipstick
3. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Engine coolant reservoir
6. Power distribution box
7. Air filter assembly
8. Power steering fluid reservoir
9. Engine oil filler cap
10. Battery
12 3 45 6
10 987
Maintenance and Specifications
372
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
6.8L V10 gasoline engine
1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
2. Battery
3. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick
4. Engine oil filler cap
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Power steering fluid reservoir
7. Brake fluid reservoir
8. Engine coolant reservoir
9. Air filter assembly
10. Power distribution box
1235678910
4
Maintenance and Specifications
373
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specifications. Do not use any
special washer fluid such as
windshield water repellent type fluid
or bug wash. They may cause
squeaking, chatter noise, streaking
and smearing. Refer to
Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below
40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure
to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or
accident.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the
vehicle. Pry open the lock cover
with your thumb (1) to release the
blade and pull the wiper blade down
toward the windshield to remove it
from the arm (2).
2. Insert the wiper arm hook into
the wiper arm (3).
3. While holding the wiper arm,
push the wiper blade up and away from the windshield.
4. Close the lock cover.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
Maintenance and Specifications
374
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield. Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil dipstick.
•6.2L/6.8L gasoline engines only;
for diesel engine information,
refer to the diesel supplement.
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again.
•If the oil level is between the two holes, the oil level is acceptable.
DO NOT ADD OIL.
•If the oil level is at or below the lower hole, add enough oil to raise
the level to within the two holes.
Maintenance and Specifications
375
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•Oil levels above the upper hole may cause engine damage. Some oil
must be removed from the engine by a service technician.
7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified
engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap
and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick.
4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
1/4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
Engine oil and filter recommendations
Look for this certification
trademark.
(6.2L/6.8L gasoline engines only. For
diesel engine information, refer to
the diesel supplement).
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the American Petroleum
Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the
current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
Maintenance and Specifications
376
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
To protect your engine and engine’s warranty, use Motorcraft威SAE
5W-20 or an equivalent SAE 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification
WSS-M2C945-A. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and
durability performance meeting all requirements for your
vehicle’s engine. Refer to Maintenance product specifications and
capacities later in this chapter for more information.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in the scheduled maintenance information.
Ford production and Motorcraft威replacement oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft威oil filter or
another with equivalent performance for your engine application.
BATTERY
WARNING: This vehicle
may be equipped with more
than one battery, removal of cable
from only one battery does not
disconnect the vehicle electrical
system. Be sure to disconnect
cables from all batteries when
disconnecting power. Failure to do
so may cause serious personal
injury or property damage.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft威maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require additional water during its life of
service.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
Maintenance and Specifications
377
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the
battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide
proper ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or
battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against
possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician
immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Maintenance and Specifications
378
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
•The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
•If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is reconnected.
•Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking the engine coolant
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine, refer to the
Maintenance and Specifications section of your Diesel Supplement.
Check the concentration and level of the engine coolant at the intervals
listed in the Scheduled Maintenance Information.
The coolant concentration should be maintained at 50%.
LEAD
RETURN
RECYCLE
Maintenance and Specifications
379
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Note: For best results, coolant concentration should be tested with a
refractometer such as Rotunda tool ROB75240 available from your
dealer. Ford does not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test
strips for measuring coolant concentrations.
Note: The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level, or between
the MIN and MAX marks, or within the COLD FILL RANGE, as listed on
the engine coolant reservoir (depending upon the application).
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may extend beyond the
FULL COLD level, or the MAX mark, or the COLD FILL RANGE.
If the level is below the FULL COLD level, at or below the MIN mark, or
below the COLD FILL RANGE, add coolant immediately per the Adding
engine coolant instructions in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant/antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot.
Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts.
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
could make it difficult to see through the windshield.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the
engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
WARNING: Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling system sealants, or unapproved
additives as they can cause damage to the engine cooling or heating
systems. This damage would not be covered under your vehicle’s warranty.
Maintenance and Specifications
380
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the engine coolant may change
color from orange to pink or light red. As long as the engine coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change does not indicate the engine
coolant has degraded nor does it require the engine coolant to be
drained, the system to be flushed, or the engine coolant to be replaced.
•DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle.
Mixing of engine coolants may harm your engine’s cooling system.
Only use engine coolant that meets the Ford specification. Generic
coolants for all makes and models may not meet the Ford
specification. The use of an improper coolant may harm engine and
cooling system components and may void the warranty. See
Capacities and Specifications for more information.
•In case of emergency, a large amount of water without engine coolant
may be added in order to reach a vehicle service location. In this
instance, the cooling system must be drained, chemically cleaned, and
refilled with prediluted engine coolant as soon as possible per the
instructions in the Workshop Manual. Water alone (without engine
coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or
freezing.
•Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants mixed with
alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol and other liquids can
cause engine damage from overheating or freezing.
•
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These can be
harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant.
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems and a non-pressurized
cap on the coolant recovery system, add prediluted engine coolant to
the FULL COLD level on the coolant recovery reservoir when the engine
is cool.
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems and a pressure relief
cap on the radiator, follow these steps to add engine coolant:
1. Turn off the engine and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the radiator.
3. Slowly turn the coolant pressure relief cap counterclockwise until
pressure begins to release.
4. Step back while the pressure releases.
5. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
Maintenance and Specifications
381
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
6. Remove the cap from the engine coolant reservoir.
7. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with prediluted engine coolant to the
FULL COLD level, or between the MIN and MAX marks, or the COLD
FILL RANGE, as listed on the engine coolant reservoir (depending upon
application).
8. Add prediluted engine coolant to the radiator until the coolant is
visible and the radiator is almost full.
9. Install the cap to the engine coolant reservoir. Tighten the cap in
order to prevent coolant loss.
10. Install the pressure relief cap to the radiator. Tighten the cap in
order to prevent coolant loss.
For vehicles which have a coolant degas system with a
pressurized cap on the coolant reservoir, follow these steps to add
engine coolant:
1. Turn off the engine and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir.
3. Slowly turn the coolant pressure relief cap counterclockwise until
pressure begins to release.
4. Step back while the pressure releases.
5. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
6. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with prediluted engine coolant to
within the FULL COLD level, or between the MIN and MAX marks, or
the COLD FILL RANGE, as listed on the engine coolant reservoir
(depending upon application).
Whenever you add coolant, check the coolant concentration. See
Checking the engine coolant in this chapter. If the concentration is not
50%, drain some coolant and adjust the concentration. It may take
several drains and additions to obtain a 50% coolant concentration.
The next few times you drive the vehicle, check the coolant level in the
coolant reservoir. If necessary, add enough prediluted engine coolant to
bring the coolant level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system. Your
cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low level of
coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage.
Maintenance and Specifications
382
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does not recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.
Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner.
Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and
disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
If your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine, refer to the
Maintenance product specifications and capacities section of your
diesel supplement.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined previously in the Adding
engine coolant section.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
•It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
•A coolant concentration of 60% will provide improved freeze point
protection. Engine coolant concentrations above 60% will decrease the
overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may
cause engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
•It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer decrease the
coolant concentration to 40%.
•A coolant concentration of 40% will provide improved overheat
protection. Engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the
corrosion/freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and
may cause engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use
prediluted engine coolant for optimum cooling system and engine
protection.
Maintenance and Specifications
383
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
What you should know about fail-safe cooling (if equipped)
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
WARNING: If fail-safe cooling activates, pull off the road as
soon as safely possible and turn the engine off. The engine may
automatically shut off while driving without further indication.
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
•The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red (hot)
area.
•The message center will indicate the engine is overheating.
•The service engine soon indicator will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
•The engine power will be limited.
•The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to
increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be restarted. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage; therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
Maintenance and Specifications
384
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Engine fluid temperature management (except 6.8L V10)
Your vehicle has been designed to pull a trailer, but because of the added
load, the vehicle’s engine may temporarily reach higher temperatures
during severe operating conditions such as ascending a long or steep
grade while pulling a trailer in hot ambient temperatures.
At this time, you may notice your engine coolant temperature gauge
needle move toward the H and the POWER REDUCED TO LOWER
TEMP message may appear on the message center.
You may notice a reduction in the vehicle’s speed caused by reduced
engine power. Your vehicle has been designed to enter this mode if
certain high temperature/high load conditions take place in order to
manage the engine’s fluid temperatures. The amount of speed reduction
will depend on the vehicle loading, towing, grade, ambient temperature,
and other factors. If this occurs, there is no need to pull off the road.
The vehicle can continue to be driven while this message is active.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of collision and injury, be
prepared that the vehicle speed may reduce and the vehicle may
not be able to accelerate with full power until the fluid temperatures
reduce.
The air conditioning may also cycle on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect overheating of the engine. When the engine coolant
temperature decreases to a more normal operating temperature, the air
conditioning will turn on once again.
If you notice any of the following:
•the engine coolant temperature gauge moves fully into the red (hot)
area
•the coolant temperature warning light illuminates
Maintenance and Specifications
385
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•the service engine soon indicator illuminates
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and place the vehicle in P
(Park).
2. Leave the engine running until the coolant temperature gauge needle
moves away from the H range. After several minutes, if this does not
happen, follow the remaining steps.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for it to cool before checking the coolant
level.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
4. If the coolant level is normal, you may restart your engine and
continue on.
5. If the coolant is low, add coolant, restart the engine and take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer. See Adding engine coolant in this
chapter for more information.
Refer to fail-safe cooling for additional information.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter (gasoline vehicles only)
that is integrated with the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or
replacement is not needed. For diesel engine information, refer to the
diesel supplement.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel
filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait
until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out and injure you or others.
Maintenance and Specifications
386
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap,
excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system
or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death
if misused or mishandled.
WARNING: Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene,
which is a cancer-causing agent.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
•Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
fueling your vehicle.
•Always turn off the vehicle before
fueling.
•Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuels such as gasoline and ethanol are highly
toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is
swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are
immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for
hours.
•Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
•Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
•Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
Maintenance and Specifications
387
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline and/or
ethanol vapors, or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In
sensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If
fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap
and water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an
adverse reaction.
•FFV fuel tanks may contain zero to 85% ethanol. Any fuel blends
containing gasoline and ethanol should be treated the same as “Fuel
Ethanol.” To identify if your vehicle is an FFV, it may be equipped
with a yellow fuel cap with the text “E85/Gasoline”, or check if there
is a label on the fuel filler door.
Pure ethanol is the alcohol which is the intoxicating agent in liquor, beer
and wine. It is distilled from the fermentation of plants such as field corn
and sugar cane. When ethanol is produced for use in motor fuels, a small
amount of gasoline is added to make it unfit for beverage use. The
resulting ethanol blend is called denatured fuel ethanol meaning that it is
denatured with 2% to 5% gasoline and is suitable for automotive use.
During the summer season, fuel ethanol may contain a maximum of 85%
denatured ethanol (Ed85) and 15% unleaded gasoline. The fuel ethanol
has a higher octane rating than unleaded regular or premium gasoline
and this allows the design of engines with greater efficiency and power.
Winter blends may contain up to 75% denatured ethanol (Ed75) and up
to 25% unleaded gasoline to enhance cold engine starts. Severely cold
weather may require additional measures for reliable starting. Refer to
Starting in the Driving chapter.
Ethanol is more chemically active than gasoline. It corrodes some metals
and causes some plastic and rubber components to swell, break down or
become brittle and crack, especially when mixed with gasoline. Special
materials and procedures have been developed for flexible fuel vehicles
and the dispensers used by ethanol fuel providers.
WARNING: Flexible fuel components and standard unleaded
gasoline fuel components are not interchangeable. If your vehicle
is not serviced in accordance with flexible fuel vehicles procedures,
damage may occur and your warranty may be invalidated.
Maintenance and Specifications
388
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and
never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never
smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can
produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is
pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.
Refueling
WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause
severe injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
•Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
•Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
•Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
•Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
•Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places;
•Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump
fuel.
•Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling.
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
•Place approved fuel container on the ground.
•DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
•Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
•DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Fuel filler cap
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise until it spins off.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
Maintenance and Specifications
389
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise until it clicks.
If the check fuel cap indicator comes on and stays on after you start the
engine, the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. Turn off the
engine, remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it.
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The vehicle warranty may
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the
correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft威fuel filler cap is not used.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel
filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait
until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out and injure you or others.
WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap,
excessive pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the
fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may
result in possible personal injury.
FFV (Flex Fuel Vehicle) fuel cap
If your vehicle is FFV capable, it will have a yellow colored fuel cap.
Choosing the right fuel
If your vehicle is a flexible fuel vehicle (FFV), use only UNLEADED
FUEL and FUEL ETHANOL (Ed75–Ed85).
If your vehicle is not a flexible fuel vehicle (FFV), then only use
UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 10%
ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85), diesel, methanol, leaded fuel or
any other fuel.
The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your
vehicle.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause
powertrain damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and repairs may not
be covered under warranty.
Maintenance and Specifications
390
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Octane recommendations
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 is
recommended. Some stations offer fuels posted as “Regular” with an
octane rating below 87, particularly in high altitude areas. Fuels with
octane levels below 87 are not recommended.
Do not be concerned if your engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However,
if it knocks heavily under most
driving conditions while you are
using fuel with the recommended
octane rating, see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage.
FFV engine (if equipped)
If your vehicle is flex fuel capable, it is designed to use Fuel Ethanol
(Ed75–Ed85), “Regular” unleaded gasoline or any mixture of the two
fuels.
Use of other fuels such as Fuel Methanol may cause powertrain
damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and your warranty may be
invalidated.
It is best not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85. If you do
switch fuels, it is recommended that you add as much fuel as
possible—at least half a tank. Do not add less than five gallons (18.9L)
when refueling. You should drive the vehicle immediately after refueling
for at least 5 miles (8 km) to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change in
ethanol concentration.
If you exclusively use E85 fuel, it is recommended to fill the fuel tank
with regular unleaded gasoline at each scheduled oil change.
Fuel quality
Unleaded gasoline engines
If you experience starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability problems
during a cold start, try a different brand of “Regular” unleaded gasoline.
FFV engines
If you experience starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability problems
during a cold start, try a different brand of E85 fuel. If the driveability
problems continue, fill the vehicle with regular unleaded gasoline and
drive vehicle normally until gasoline is used. See your authorized dealer
if the problem persists.
87
(R+M)/2 METHOD
Maintenance and Specifications
391
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. It
should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. These products have not been approved for your engine and
could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of
using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your
warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-Wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-Wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-Wide Fuel Charter.
Diesel engine (if equipped)
Refer to the diesel supplement for information regarding diesel fuel
recommendations and requirements of your diesel-powered truck.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality, per the recommendations in the Choosing the right
fuel section.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
•You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal.
•Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than
1 gallon (3.8L) may be required.
•The service engine soon indicator may come on. For more
information on the service engine soon indicator, refer to
Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Maintenance and Specifications
392
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend taking
fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate
measurement after 2,000 miles–3,000 miles (3,000 km–5,000 km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance
product specifications and capacities section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
•Turn the engine/ignition switch off prior to refueling, an error in the
reading will result if the engine is left running.
•Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
•Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.
•Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
•Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
•Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
Maintenance and Specifications
393
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
•Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
•Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
•Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
•Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
•Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
•Slow down gradually.
•Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
•Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
•Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
•You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs. Unnecessary
shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy.
Maintenance and Specifications
394
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
•Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
•Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
•Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
•Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
•Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter.
•Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in scheduled maintenance information.
Conditions
•Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
•Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
•Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
•To maximize the fuel economy, drive with the tonneau cover installed
(if equipped).
•Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
•Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
•Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
•Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
•Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
•Close windows for high speed driving.
Maintenance and Specifications
395
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you
smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your
vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
•Use only the specified fuel listed.
•Avoid running out of fuel.
•Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
•Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft威or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon indicator, charging system
warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,
smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust
system inspected and repaired immediately.
Maintenance and Specifications
396
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty
information.
On-board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the service
engine soon indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected
a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine
soon indicator to illuminate. Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler
cap in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon
indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway
driving. No additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains on, have your vehicle
serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions
detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can
result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.
Maintenance and Specifications
397
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
Some state/provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M
test if the service engine soon indicator is on or not working
properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems have not been properly
checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered not ready for I/M testing.
If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. Refer to On-board
diagnostics (OBD-II) in this chapter.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine
soon indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
ready for I/M testing; if the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by
20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle
periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will
have to be repeated.
Maintenance and Specifications
398
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
POWER STEERING FLUID
Check the power steering fluid. Refer to scheduled maintenance
information. If adding fluid is necessary, use only MERCON威ATF.
•Gasoline engine shown; diesel
engine similar. Refer to
Identifying components in the
engine compartment in the
diesel supplement.
Check the fluid level when it is at ambient temperature, 20°F–80°F
(-7°C–25°C):
1. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN
and MAX range. Do not add fluid if the level is within this range.
2. If the fluid level is low. Add fluid to bring fluid level up to be between
the MIN and MAX range.
3. Start the engine.
4. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several
times.
5. Turn the engine off.
6. Recheck the fluid level in the reservoir. Do not add fluid if the level is
between the MIN and MAX range.
7. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it is between the MIN and MAX range. Refer to
Maintenance products specifications and capacities in this chapter for
the proper fluid type. Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir.
Maintenance and Specifications
399
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
BRAKE FLUID
•Vacuum boost system
•Hydroboost system
The fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear, and will rise when the
brake components are replaced. Fluid levels between the top of the MIN
and MAX lines are within the normal operating range; there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range,
the performance of your brake system could be compromised; seek
service from your authorized dealer immediately.
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid (if equipped)
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating
temperature (approximately 20 miles [30 km]). Verify that the
transmission fluid temperature gauge, located on the instrument cluster,
is within normal range.
MIN
MAX
Maintenance and Specifications
400
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the engine running, parking brake engaged and your foot on the
brake pedal, move the gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges.
Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient
temperature.
Your vehicle is equipped with one of the following dipsticks.
Low fluid level
Type A
Type B
Do not drive the vehicle if there is no indication of fluid on the dipstick
and the ambient temperature is above 50°F (10°C).
ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD
Maintenance and Specifications
401
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Correct fluid level
For vehicles equipped with 5-speed transmissions, the fluid should be
checked at normal operating temperature 150°F-170°F (66°C-77°C) on a
level surface. For vehicles equipped with 6-speed transmissions, the fluid
should be checked at normal operating temperature 196°F-216°F
(91°C-102°C) on a level surface. The normal operating temperature can
be reached after approximately 20 miles (30 km) of driving.
Type A
Type B
High fluid level
Type A
Type B
Fluid levels above the safe range may result in transmission failure. An
overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.
ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD
ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD
Maintenance and Specifications
402
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick handle and also in the
Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this
chapter.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage.
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250 ml) increments through the filler
tube until the level is correct.
Type A
Type B
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid should be removed by a qualified
technician.
An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD
Maintenance and Specifications
403
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
TRANSFER CASE FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.
3. Add only enough fluid through
the filler opening so that the fluid
level is at the bottom of the
opening.
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to the Maintenance
product specifications and capacities section in this chapter.
AIR FILTER
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft威air filter
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft威part numbers in this chapter.
Maintenance and Specifications
404
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
The following procedure is for vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine.
If your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine, refer to the diesel
supplement.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
Changing the air filter element
1. Locate the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector on the air outlet
tube. This connector will need to be
unplugged.
2. Reposition the locking clip on the
connector (connector shown from
below for clarity), squeeze the
connector and pull it off of the air
outlet tube.
3. Clean the area around the air
tube to air cover connection to
prevent debris from entering the
system and then loosen the bolt on
the air tube clamp so the clamp is
no longer snug to the air tube. It is
not necessary to completely remove
the clamp.
4. Pull the air tube off from the air
cleaner housing.
Maintenance and Specifications
405
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
5. Release the three clamps that
secure the cover to the air filter
housing. Push the air filter cover
toward the center of the vehicle and
up slightly to release it.
6. Remove the air filter element
from the air filter housing.
7. Install a new air filter element.
8. Replace the air filter housing
cover and secure the clamps. Be
careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter
housing and cover and ensure that
the tabs on the edge are properly
aligned into the slots.
9. Slip the air tube onto the air filter
housing and tighten the air-tube
clamp bolt snugly, but do not
overtighten it.
Maintenance and Specifications
406
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
10. Reconnect the mass air flow
sensor electrical connector to the
outlet tube. Make sure the locking
tab on the connector is in the
“locked” position (connector shown
from below for clarity).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time
(30 days or more), refer to the following maintenance recommendations
to ensure your vehicle stays in good operating condition.
All motor vehicles and their components were engineered and tested for
reliable, regular driving. Long term storage under various conditions may
lead to component degradation or failure unless specific precautions are
taken to preserve the components.
General
•Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.
•Protect from sunlight, if possible.
•If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular maintenance to
protect against rust and damage.
Body
•Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing and underside of front fenders.
See the Cleaning chapter for more information.
•Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed locations.
•Touch-up raw or primed metal to prevent rust.
•Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax
to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when the vehicle is
washed. See the Cleaning chapter for more information.
Maintenance and Specifications
407
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
•Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid hinges, and latches with a light
grade oil. See the Cleaning chapter for more information.
•Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
•Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents.
Engine
•The engine oil and filter should be changed prior to storage, as used
engine oil contain contaminates that may cause engine damage.
•Start the engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
•With your foot on the brake, shift through all the gears while the
engine is running.
Fuel system
•Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff
of the fuel pump nozzle.
Note: During extended periods of vehicle storage (30 days or more),
fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation. Add a quality gas stabilizer
product to the vehicle fuel system whenever actual or expected storage
periods exceed 30 days. Follow the instructions on the additive label.
The vehicle should then be operated at idle speed to circulate the
additive throughout the fuel system.
Cooling system
•Protect against freezing temperatures.
•When removing vehicle from storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm there are no cooling system leaks, and fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
•Check and recharge as necessary. Keep connections clean.
•If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the
battery, it may be advisable to disconnect the battery cables to ensure
battery charge is maintained for quick starting.
Note: If battery cables are disconnected, it will be necessary to reset
memory features.
Maintenance and Specifications
408
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Brakes
•Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released.
Tires
•Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
•Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and pins under vehicle are
covered with grease to prevent rust.
•Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 m) every 15 days to lubricate
working parts and prevent corrosion.
Removing vehicle from storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage, do the following:
•Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build-up on
window surfaces.
•Check windshield wipers for any deterioration.
•Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage (mice/squirrel nests).
•Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage.
•Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label.
•Check brake pedal operation. Drive the vehicle 15 ft (4.5 meters) back
and forth to remove rust build-up.
•Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil and gas) to make sure there
are no leaks, and fluids are at recommended levels.
•If the battery was removed, clean the battery cable ends and inspect.
Contact your authorized dealer if you have any concerns or issues.
Maintenance and Specifications
409
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component 6.2L V8 engine 6.8L V10 engine
Air filter element FA-1883 FA-1883
Oil filter FL-820-S FL-820-S
Battery (standard) BXT-65-650 BXT-65-650
Battery (optional) BXT-65-750 BXT-65-750
Spark plugs-platinum
1
Seat filter FS-107
Windshield wiper
blade WW-2201-PF
1
For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to the
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft威or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
Maintenance and Specifications
410
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
MAINTENANCE PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES
Item Capacity Ford part name Ford part number /
Ford specification
Front axle 5.8 pints (2.8L)
Motorcraft威SAE 80W-90
Premium Rear Axle
Lubricant
XY-80W-90–QL /
WSP-M2C197–A
Spindle bearing —
High Temperature 4X4
Front Axle and Wheel
Bearing Grease
XG-11 /
WSS-M1C267-A1
Rear axle - F-250/350
(10.50 inch axle)
1
6.9 pints (3.3L)
Motorcraft威SAE
75W-140 Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140–QL /
WSL-M2C192-A
Rear axle - F-350 (Dana
M80) 8.5 pints (4.0L)
Motorcraft威SAE 75W-90
Synthetic Rear Axle
Lubricant
XY-75W90–QLS /
WSS–M2C918–A
Rear axle - F-450/550
(Dana S110/S130) 14.0 pints (6.6L)
Motorcraft威SAE
75W-140 Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140–QL /
WSL-M2C192-A
Brake fluid
Between
MIN/MAX on
brake fluid
reservoir
Motorcraft威High
Performance DOT 3
Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
PM-1–C / WSS-M6C62-A
or WSS-M6C65-A1
Engine coolant
(6.2L V8 engine)
2
21.3 quarts
(20.2L) Motorcraft威Orange
Antifreeze/Coolant
Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B (US) /
CVC-3DIL-B (Canada) /
WSS-M97B44-D2
Engine coolant
(6.8L V10 engine)
2
26.7 quarts
(25.3L)
Maintenance and Specifications
411
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Item Capacity Ford part name Ford part number /
Ford specification
Engine and fuel coolant
- diesel engine Refer to the diesel supplement.
Engine oil (includes
filter change) - 6.2L V8
and 6.8L V10 gas
engines
5
7.0 quarts (6.6L)
•Motorcraft威SAE 5W-20
Premium Synthetic
Blend Motor Oil (US)
•Motorcraft威SAE 5W-20
Full Synthetic Motor Oil
(US)
•Motorcraft威SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)
•Motorcraft威SAE 5W-20
Synthetic Motor Oil
(Canada)
•XO-5W20-QSP (US)
•XO-5W20-QFS (US)
•CXO-5W20–LSP12
(Canada)
•CXO-5W-20-LFS12
(Canada) /
WSS-M2C945-A and API
Certification Mark
Engine oil (includes
filter change) - diesel
engine
Refer to the diesel supplement.
Fuel tank (mid-ship) 28 gallons (106L) — —
Fuel tank (plastic) 35 gallons (132L) — —
Fuel tank (Aft axle) 40 gallons (151L) — —
Fuel tank - diesel
engine Refer to the diesel supplement.
Maintenance and Specifications
412
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Item Capacity Ford part name Ford part number /
Ford specification
Hinges, latches, striker
plates, fuel filler door
hinge and seat tracks
— Multi-Purpose Grease XG–4 or XL-5 /
ESB-M1C93–B
Lock cylinders — Motorcraft威Penetrating
and Lock Lubricant XL-1 / None
Transmission / parking
brake linkages and
pivots, brake pedal shift
—Motorcraft威Premium
Long-Life Grease
XG-1-C or XG-1-K /
WSD-M1C227-A
Power steering fluid
Keep fluid level
between MIN and
MAX on reservoir
Motorcraft威
MERCON威VATF
XT-5-QM /
MERCON威V
Transfer case fluid 2.0 quarts (1.9L) Motorcraft威Transfer
Case Fluid XL-12 / —
Automatic transmission
fluid
(5–speed)
3
17.5 quarts
(16.6L)
4, 6
Motorcraft威
MERCON威LV ATF
XT-10–QLV /
MERCON威LV
Automatic transmission
fluid
(6-speed)
3
18.5 quarts
(17.5L)
4, 7
16.7 quarts
(15.8L)
4, 7
Maintenance and Specifications
413
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Item Capacity Ford part name Ford part number /
Ford specification
Windshield washer fluid Fill as required
Motorcraft威Premium
Windshield Washer
Concentrate (US)
Premium Quality
Windshield Washer Fluid
(Canada)
ZC-32–A (US)
CXC-37-(A, B, D, and F)
(Canada) /
WSB-M8B16–A2 /- -
1
Add 8 oz. (236 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent meeting Ford Specification
EST-M2C118–A for complete refill of limited slip Ford axles. Ford design rear axles contain a
synthetic lubricant that does not require changing unless the axle has been submerged in water.
2
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
3
Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission fluid requirements are
indicated on the dipstick blade or the dipstick handle. Check the container to verify the fluid being
added is of the correct type. Refer to your scheduled maintenance information to determine the
correct service interval.
Automatic transmissions that require MERCON威LV should only use MERCON威LV fluid.
Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
4
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size and
if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set
by the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range.
5
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C945-A and the API Certification mark.
6
Refer to Checking automatic transmission fluid in this chapter for the correct dipstick type.
Fill to the proper capacity according to dipstick Type A.
7
Refer to Checking automatic transmission fluid in this chapter for the correct dipstick type.
Fill to the proper capacity according to dipstick Type B.
Maintenance and Specifications
414
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
ENGINE DATA
Engine 6.2L V8 engine 6.8L V10 engine
Cubic inches 378 413
Required fuel Minimum 87 octane or
Ethanol (E85)
Minimum 87 octane
Firing order 1-5–4–8–6–3–7–2 1-6-5-10-2-7-3-8-4-9
Spark plug gap 0.041–0.047 inch
(1.04–1.20 mm)
0.039–0.043 inch
(1.0–1.1 mm)
Ignition system Coil on plug Coil on plug
Compression ratio 9.8:1 9.2:1
Engine drivebelt routing
6.2L V8 engine
6.8L V10 engine with A/C
Maintenance and Specifications
415
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
6.8L V10 engine - without A/C
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Compliance Certification Label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance
Certification Label be affixed to a
vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label may be located. The Safety
Compliance Certification Label is
located on the structure by the
trailing edge of the driver’s door or
the edge of the driver’s door.
Maintenance and Specifications
416
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
located on the driver side
instrument panel.
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
Devices and their location
3. Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Maintenance and Specifications
417
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATIONS
You can find a transmission code on
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission each code
represents.
Description Code
Five-speed automatic (5R110W) T
Six-speed automatic (6R140) P
Six-speed automatic (6R140W) W
Maintenance and Specifications
418
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
FORD CUSTOM ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Ford Custom Accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer. These quality
accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive
needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and
aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory is
made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigorous
engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will repair or
replace any properly dealer-installed Ford Custom Accessories found to
be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the
warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective
accessories. The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides
you the greatest benefit:
•12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
•the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
The following is a list of several Ford Custom Accessories. Not all
accessories are available for all models. For a complete listing of the
accessories that are available for your vehicle, please contact your dealer
or visit our online store at: www.fordaccessories.com (U.S. only).
Exterior style
•Bug shields •Step bars
•Bright metallic exhaust tips •Fog lamps
•Deflectors •Custom graphics*
•Running boards •Stainless steel wheel covers*
•Splash guards
Interior style
•Floor mats •Custom seat covers*
Lifestyle
•Ash cup / smoker’s package •Racks and carriers*
•Bedliners and bedmats •Truck bed camping tent*
•Navigation* •Sportliner cargo liner*
•Tonneau covers* •Rear seat entertainment*
•Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and accessories
Accessories
419
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Peace of mind
•Keyless entry keypad •Back up alarm*
•Remote start •Cable lock*
•Vehicle security systems •Bed hooks*
•Wheel locks •Tool/Cargo boxes*
•Protective seat covers*
•Bumper and hitch mounted parking sensors*
Not all accessories are available for all models.
*Ford Licensed Accessories (FLA) are warranted by the accessory
manufacturer’s warranty. Ford Licensed Accessories are fully designed
and developed by the accessory manufacturer and have not been
designed or tested to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements.
Contact your Ford dealer for details regarding the manufacturer’s limited
warranty and/or a copy of the FLA product limited warranty offered by
the accessory manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
•When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
•The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by your authorized dealer.
•
Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use.
•To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in
the area of the driver’s side hood.
•Any non-Ford custom electrical or electronic accessories or
components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or
the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability.
Accessories
420
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS (U.S. ONLY)
More than 32 million Ford and Lincoln owners have discovered the
powerful protection of Ford ESP. It is the only extended service plan
backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides “peace of mind”
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
Up to 500+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four, new-vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask your dealer for details.
PremiumCare – Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 500
covered components, this plan is so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered!
ExtraCare – Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech
items.
BaseCare – Covers 84 components.
PowertrainCare – Covers 29 critical components.
Ford ESP is honored by all Ford and Lincoln Dealers in the U.S.
and Canada It’s the only extended service plan authorized and backed
by Ford Motor Company. That means you get:
•Reliable, quality service anywhere you go.
•Factory-trained technicians.
•Ford Authorized Parts used with every covered repair.
Rental car reimbursement
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are
eligible for rental car coverage, including Bumper-to-Bumper warranty
repairs, or manufacturer’s recalls.
Transferable coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires, you can
transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner. Whenever you’re
ready to sell your car, prospective buyers may feel better about taking a
risk on your used vehicle. Ford ESP may add resale value!
Plus, exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
•Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts.
•Out-of-fuel and lock-out assistance.
•Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car.
•Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage and
emergency transportation.
Ford Extended Service Plan
421
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor – can easily exceed the
price of your Ford ESP Service Contract. With Ford ESP, you minimize
your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs.
Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle!
Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that
routinely wear out.
The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about affording
your vehicle maintenance. It covers regular checkups, routine
inspections, preventive care and replacement of items that require
periodic attention for normal “wear”:
•Wiper blades •Brake pads and linings
•Spark plugs (except
California) •Shock absorbers
•Clutch disc •Belts and hoses
Contact your selling Ford or Lincoln dealership today so they can
customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving lifestyle
and budget.
Interest free finance options available
Take advantage of our installment payment plan, just a 10% down
payment will provide you with an affordable no interest, no-fee payment
opportunity.
Protect Yourself From the Rising Cost of Vehicle Repairs With a
Ford Extended Service Plan
To learn more, call our Ford ESP specialists at 800–367–3377, and don’t
forget to ask about our interest free payment program, allowing you all
the security and benefits Ford ESP has to offer while paying over time.
Your pre-approved with no credit checks, no hassels!
Or, mail your name, address, city, state and zip code to:
Ford ESP
P.O. Box 8072
Royal Oak, MI 48068–9933
Ford Extended Service Plan
422
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford
Extended Service Plan (ESP). Ford ESP is the only service contract
backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited. Depending on the
plan you purchase, Ford ESP provides benefits such as:
•Rental reimbursement
•Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items
•Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty Coverage expires
•Roadside Assistance benefits
There are several Ford ESP plans available in various time, distance and
deductible combinations. Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing and rental.
When you purchase Ford ESP, you receive added peace-of-mind
protection throughout Canada and the United States, provided by a
network of participating Ford Motor Company dealers.
For more information, visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or
www.ford.ca to find the Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for you.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada and the United States are
not eligible for Ford ESP coverage.
Ford Extended Service Plan
423
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
The following information pertains to 6.2L V8 and 6.8L V10 gasoline
engines only. Scheduled maintenance for the diesel engine can be found
in the diesel supplement.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following this schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and may also
help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or trade it.
It is your responsibility to see that all scheduled maintenance is performed
and that the materials used meet Ford engineering specifications as
identified in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter. Failure to
perform scheduled maintenance specific in this guide will invalidate
warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of maintenance. Be sure
receipts for completed maintenance are kept with the vehicle and
confirmation of the work performed is always recorded in this guide.
Your dealer has factory-trained technicians who can perform the required
maintenance using genuine Ford parts. They are committed to meeting
your service needs and to assuring your continuing satisfaction.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that will pay dividends in the form of
improved reliability, durability and resale value. To maintain the proper
performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems, it is imperative
that scheduled maintenance be completed at the designated intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex
performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using
different specifications and performance features. That’s why it’s important
to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for various
parts and component systems based upon engineering testing. Ford Motor
Company relies upon this testing to determine the most appropriate
mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at the
lowest overall cost to you and recommends against maintenance schedules
that deviate from the scheduled maintenance information.
Ford strongly recommends the use of genuine Ford replacement parts.
Parts other than Ford, Motorcraft威or Ford-authorized remanufactured
parts that are used for maintenance replacement or for the service of
components affecting emission control must be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability. It is the
Scheduled Maintenance
424
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
owner’s responsibility to determine the equivalency of such parts. Please
consult your Warranty Guide for complete warranty information.
Chemicals or additives not approved by Ford are not required for factory
recommended maintenance. In fact, Ford Motor Company recommends
against the use of such additive products unless specifically
recommended by Ford for a particular application.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic
and, by itself, does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid
needs to be changed. However, discolored fluids that also show signs of
overheating and/or foreign material contamination should be inspected
immediately by a qualified expert such as the factory-trained technicians
at your dealership. Your vehicle’s oils and fluids should be changed at the
specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable
way to change fluid for many vehicle sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid
that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system, or using
a Ford-approved flushing chemical.
Genuine Ford Parts and Service
When planning your maintenance services, consider your dealership for
all your vehicle’s needs.
There are a lot of reasons why visiting your dealership for all your
service needs is a great way to help keep your vehicle running great.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make
your service visit more convenient. How’s that for quality service?
Factory-trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive factory-sponsored
certification training to help them become experts on the operation of
your vehicle. Ask your dealership about the training and certification
their technicians have received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft姞Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford and Motorcraft威branded remanufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s
specifications, and we stand behind them. Parts installed at your
dealership carry a nationwide, 12 month/12,000 mile (20,000 km) parts
and labor limited warranty. Your dealer can give you details.
Scheduled Maintenance
425
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Value Shopping for Your Vehicle’s Maintenance Needs
Your dealership recognizes the competitive landscape of maintenance and
light repair automotive services. With factory-trained technicians, and
one-stop service from routine maintenance like oil changes and tire
rotations to repairs like brake service, check out the value your dealers
can offer.
Owner checks and services
Certain basic maintenance checks and inspections should be performed
by the owner or a service technician at the intervals indicated. Service
information and supporting specifications are provided in this owner’s
guide.
Any adverse condition should be brought to the attention of your dealer
or qualified service technician as soon as possible for the proper service
advice. The owner maintenance service checks are generally not covered
by warranties so you may be charged for labor, parts or fluids used.
Engine oil/coolant change intervals
Engine oil (6.2L/6.8L)* 6 months or 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
(whichever comes first)
Engine coolant, initial
change
6 years or 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
(whichever comes first)
Engine coolant, after
initial change
Every 3 years or 45,000 miles (72,000 km)
*If your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine, refer to the diesel
supplement for engine oil/coolant change schedules
Check every month
Engine oil level
Function of all interior and exterior lights
Tires for wear and proper pressure, including spare
Windshield washer fluid level
Check every six months
Battery connections; clean if necessary
Body and door drain holes for obstructions; clean if necessary
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength
Door weatherstrips for wear; lubricate if necessary
Hinges/latches/outside locks for proper operation; lubricate if necessary
Scheduled Maintenance
426
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Check every six months
Parking brake for proper operation
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag, safety belt) for operation
Washer spray/wiper operation; clean or replace blades as necessary
Multi-point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right, it is important to have the
systems on your vehicle checked regularly. This can help identify
potential issues and prevent major problems. Ford Motor Company
recommends the following multi-point inspection be performed at every
scheduled maintenance interval to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
Multi-point inspection – Recommended each visit
Accessory drive belt(s) Half-shaft dust boots (if equipped)
Battery performance Horn operation
Clutch operation (if equipped) Radiator, cooler, heater and A/C hoses
Engine air filter Suspension component for leaks or
damage
Exhaust system Steering and linkage
Exterior lamps and hazard
warning system operation
Tires for wear and proper pressure,
including spare
Fluid levels*; fill if necessary Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
For oil and fluid leaks Washer spray and wiper operation
*
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, manual and automatic transmission
(with an underhood dipstick), power steering (if equipped) and window
washer
Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the
multi-point vehicle inspection. It’s a comprehensive way to perform a
thorough inspection of your vehicle. It’s your checklist that gives you
immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle. You’ll know
what’s been checked, what’s okay, as well as those things that may
require future or immediate attention. The multi-point vehicle inspection
is one more way to keep your vehicle running great!
Scheduled Maintenance
427
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AND LOG
The following section contains the “Normal Schedule”. This schedule is
presented at specific mileage (kilometer) intervals with exceptions noted.
Scheduled Maintenance
428
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
6.2L and 6.8L engines
Miles (x 1,000)* 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75
Kilometers (x 1,000)* 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120
Months* 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60
Change engine oil and filter • •••••••••
Rotate tires**, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth • •••••••••
Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear,
looseness or drag • •••••••••
Perform multi-point inspection (recommended) • •••••••••
Inspect automatic transmission fluid level (if equipped with
dipstick); consult dealer for requirements •••••
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and
parking brake •••••
Inspect engine cooling system concentration and hoses •••••
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields •••••
Inspect front axle and U-joints; lubricate if equipped with grease
fittings (4WD vehicles) •••••
Inspect half-shaft boots (if equipped) •••••
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends,
driveshaft and U-joints; lubricate if equipped with grease fittings •••••
Torque rear U-bolts (Transit Connect) •••••
Inspect cabin air filter (if equipped) • ••••
* Whichever comes first
**If equipped with dual rear wheels, rotate front wheels when specified, rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted
Scheduled maintenance for the diesel engine can be found in the diesel supplement
Scheduled Maintenance
429
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
6.2L and 6.8L engines
Miles (x 1,000)* 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120 127.5 135 142.5 150
Kilometers (x 1,000)* 132 144 156 168 180 192 204 216 228 240
Months* 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
Change engine oil and filter ••••••••••
Rotate tires**, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth ••••••••••
Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal noise,
wear, looseness or drag ••••••••••
Perform multi-point inspection (recommended) ••••••••••
Inspect automatic transmission fluid level (if equipped with
dipstick); consult dealer for requirements •••••
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses
and parking brake •••••
Inspect engine cooling system concentration and hoses •••••
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields •••••
Inspect front axle and U-joints; lubricate if equipped with
grease fittings (4WD vehicles) •••••
Inspect half-shaft boots (if equipped) •••••
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends,
driveshaft and U-joints; lubricate if equipped with grease
fittings
•••••
Torque rear U-bolts (Transit Connect) •••••
Inspect cabin air filter (if equipped) •••••
* Whichever comes first
**If equipped with dual rear wheels, rotate front wheels when specified, rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted
Scheduled maintenance for the diesel engine can be found in the diesel supplement
Scheduled Maintenance
430
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
6.2L and 6.8L engines
Every 15,000 miles
(24,000 km)
Replace cabin air filter (if equipped)
Every 30,000 miles
(48,000 km)
Replace climate-controlled seat filter (if
equipped)
Replace engine air filter
Every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter on
5–speed TorqShift威transmission; consult dealer
for requirements
Replace front wheel bearing grease/grease seal if
non-sealed bearings are used (2WD vehicles)
Every 97,500 miles
(156,000 km)
Replace spark plugs
Every 105,000 miles
(168,000 km)
Change engine coolant
1
Change manual transmission fluid (except
Escape)
Change rear axle fluid (Dana axles)
Inspect accessory drive belt(s)
2
Every 150,000 miles
(240,000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter
(except 5–speed TorqShift威transmission) (filter
not required on 6F35, 6F50, DPS6 and AWF-21
transmissions); consult dealer for requirements
Change front axle fluid (4WD vehicles)
Change rear axle fluid (RWD vehicles)
Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles)
Replace accessory drive belt(s) if not replaced
within the last 100,000 miles (160,000 km)
Replace front wheel bearings and seals if
non-sealed bearings are used (2WD vehicles)
1
Initial replacement at 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 72 months; every
45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 36 months thereafter
2
Perform a follow-up inspection at 120,000 miles (192,000 km)
Scheduled Maintenance
431
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance Schedule Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance
432
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance
433
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance
434
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
The following information pertains to 6.2L V8 and 6.8L V10 gasoline
engines only. Scheduled maintenance for the diesel engine can be found
in the diesel supplement.
If you operate your vehicle primarily in one of the more demanding
conditions listed below, you will need to have some items maintained
more frequently. If you only occasionally operate your vehicle under
these conditions, it is not necessary to perform the additional
maintenance. For specific recommendations, see your dealership service
advisor or technician.
Towing a trailer or using a camper or car-top carrier
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Inspect and lubricate U-joints
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions
Every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km)
Inspect wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag
Rotate tires*, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth
Every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) or
6 months
Change engine oil and filter
Inspect and lubricate U-joints
Every 30,000 miles
(48,000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid (except
6R80 and TorqShift威transmissions)
Replace front wheel bearing grease/grease seals if
non-sealed bearings are used (2WD vehicles)
Every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km)
Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles)
*If equipped with dual rear wheels, rotate front wheels when specified,
rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted
Scheduled Maintenance
435
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Extensive idling and/or low-speed driving for long distances as in
heavy commercial use (i.e. delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Replace cabin air filter (if equipped)
Replace engine air filter
Every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km)
Inspect brake system
Inspect wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag
Lubricate control arm and steering ball joints if
equipped with grease fittings
Rotate tires*, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth
Every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) or
6 months
Inspect and lubricate U-joints
Every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km), 6 months
or 200 engine hours
Change engine oil and filter
Every 30,000 miles
(48,000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid (except 6R80
and TorqShift威transmissions)
Replace front wheel bearing grease/grease seals if
non-sealed bearings are used (2WD vehicles)
Every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km)
Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles)
Replace spark plugs
*If equipped with dual rear wheels, rotate front wheels when specified,
rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted
Operating in dusty conditions such as unpaved or dusty roads
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Replace cabin air filter (if equipped)
Replace engine air filter
Every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km)
Inspect the wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag
Rotate tires*, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth
Every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) or
6 months
Change engine oil and filter
Inspect and lubricate U-joints
Scheduled Maintenance
436
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Operating in dusty conditions such as unpaved or dusty roads
Every 30,000 miles
(48,000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid (except 6R80
and TorqShift威transmissions)
Replace front wheel bearing grease/grease seals if
non-sealed bearings are used (2WD vehicles)
Every 50,000 miles
(80,000 km)
Change rear axle fluid (F-450/550 only)
Every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km)
Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles)
*If equipped with dual rear wheels, rotate front wheels when specified,
rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted
Off-road operation
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints and U-joints;
lubricate if equipped with grease fittings
Replace cabin air filter (if equipped)
Replace engine air filter
Every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) or
6 months
Change engine oil and filter
Inspect wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag
Rotate tires*, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth
Every 30,000 miles
(48,000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid (except 6R80
and TorqShift威transmissions)
Replace front wheel bearing grease/grease seals if
non-sealed bearings are used (2WD vehicles)
Every 50,000 miles
(80,000 km)
Change rear axle fluid (F-450/550 only)
Every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km)
Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles)
*If equipped with dual rear wheels, rotate front wheels when specified,
rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted
Exclusive use of E85 (Flex Fuel Vehicles only)
Every oil change
interval
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full
with regular unleaded fuel
Scheduled Maintenance
437
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Special Operating Condition Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance
438
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance
439
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
EXCEPTIONS
There are several exceptions to the Normal Schedule. They are listed
below:
Normal vehicle axle maintenance: Rear axles and power take-off
(PTO) units with synthetic fluid and light-duty trucks equipped with
Ford-design axles are lubricated for life; do not check or change fluid
unless a leak is suspected, service is required or the assembly has been
submerged in water. During long periods of trailer towing with outside
temperatures above 70°F (21°C) and at wide-open throttle for long
periods above 45 mph (72 km/h), non-synthetic rear axle fluids should
be changed every 3,000 miles (4,800 km) or three months, whichever
comes first. This interval can be waived if the axle is filled with 75W140
synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford specification WSL-M2C192-A, part
number F1TZ-19580-B or equivalent. Add friction modifier XL-3
(EST-M2C118-A) or equivalent for complete refill of Traction-Lok rear
axles (refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in
the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for details).
Police/Taxi/Livery vehicle axle maintenance: Change rear axle fluid
every 100,000 miles (160,000 km). Rear axle fluid change may be waived
if the axle was filled with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford
specification WSL-M2C192-A, part number FITZ-19580-B or equivalent.
Add four ounces (118 mL) of additive friction modifier XL-3
(EST-M2C118-A) or equivalent for complete refill of Traction-Lok rear
axles. The axle fluid should be changed anytime the axle has been
submerged in water
California fuel filter replacement: If the vehicle is registered in
California, the California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission
warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however, urges you to have all
recommended maintenance services performed at the specified intervals
and to record all vehicle service.
Class A Motorhome: Change brake fluid every two years.
Hot climate oil change intervals: Vehicles operating in the Middle
East, North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates
using an American Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline
Engines (Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal oil
change interval is 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
If the available API “SM” or “SN” oils are not available, then the oil
change service interval is 3,000 mile (4,800 km).
Scheduled Maintenance
440
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Edge/MKX AWD only – vehicles operating off-road in sand during high
ambient temperatures must replace the AWD PTU (All-wheel drive
Power Transfer Unit) lube every 20,000 miles (32,000 km).
Engine air filter & cabin air filter replacement: Engine air filter and
cabin air filter life is dependent on exposure to dusty and dirty
conditions. Vehicles operated in these conditions will require frequent
inspection and replacement of the engine air filter and cabin air filter.
ENGINE COOLANT CHANGE RECORD
Initial change Six years or 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
(whichever comes first)
After initial change Every three years or 45,000 miles (72,000 km)
Engine Coolant Change Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance
441
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
A
Accessory delay ........................104
AdvanceTrac ..............................275
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ........................180, 184, 186
and child safety seats ............181
description ..............180, 184, 186
disposal ....................................194
driver airbag ............182, 185, 187
indicator light .........................189
operation .................182, 185, 187
passenger airbag .....182, 185, 187
passenger deactivation
switch ......................................190
side airbag ...............................184
Air cleaner filter .......404–405, 410
Air conditioning ....................78, 81
manual heating and air
conditioning system .................78
Air filter .....................................410
Ambulance packages ....................8
Antifreeze
(see Engine coolant) ................379
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ..............................271
Anti-theft system ..............149, 151
arming the system ..........150–151
disarming a triggered
system .....................................152
triggering .................................152
Audio system (see Radio) ...60, 62
Automatic transmission ............290
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................287
fluid, adding ............................400
fluid, checking ........................400
fluid, refill capacities ..............411
Selectshift (SST) ....................293
Auxiliary Input Jack ...................69
Auxiliary powerpoint ................101
Axle
refill capacities ........................411
B
Battery .......................................377
acid, treating emergencies .....377
jumping a disabled battery ....348
maintenance-free ....................377
replacement, specifications ...410
servicing ..................................377
Bed extender ............................126
Belt-Minder威.............................176
Booster seats .............................212
Brakes ........................................271
anti-lock ...................................271
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................272
fluid, checking and adding ....400
fluid, refill capacities ..............411
parking ....................................273
shift interlock ..........................285
trailer .......................................256
Bulbs ............................................92
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....411
Cassette tape player ...................60
Cell phone use ............................11
Changing a tire .........................331
Child safety seats ......................199
attaching with tether straps ..206
in front seat ....................200, 206
in rear seat ......................200, 206
Index
442
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
LATCH .....................................206
recommendations ...................197
Child safety seats -
booster seats .............................212
Cleaning your vehicle
engine compartment ..............363
instrument panel ............365–366
interior .....................................367
plastic parts ............................364
safety belts ..............................367
washing ....................................361
waxing .....................................362
wheels ......................................362
wiper blades ............................364
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ......78, 81
Clock ......................................61, 63
Compass, electronic
set zone adjustment .................27
Console ......................................100
overhead ..................................100
Controls
power seat ...............................159
steering column ......................112
Coolant ......................................379
checking and adding ..............379
refill capacities ................383, 411
Cruise control
(see Speed control) ..................110
Customer Assistance ................319
Ford accessories for your
vehicle .....................................369
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..................................421, 423
Getting assistance outside
the U.S. and Canada ..............357
Getting roadside assistance ...319
Getting the service you
need .........................................353
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................359
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................357
D
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................89
Defrost
rear window and rearview
mirrors .......................................81
windshield .................................81
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................400
engine oil .................................375
Driving under special
conditions ..................295, 309, 312
sand .........................................311
snow and ice ...........................313
through water .................311, 315
E
Electronic message center ...22, 39
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................348
Emergency Flashers .................320
Emission control system ..........396
Engine ........................................415
cleaning ...................................363
coolant .....................................379
diesel ...........................................7
fail-safe cooling .......................384
idle speed control ...................377
refill capacities ........................411
service points ..................371–373
Engine block heater .................269
Index
443
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Engine oil ..................................375
checking and adding ..............375
dipstick ....................................375
filter, specifications ........376, 410
recommendations ...................376
refill capacities ........................411
Event data recording ....................9
Exhaust fumes ..........................269
F
Fail safe cooling ........................384
Fleet MyKey programming ......129
Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) ....386
Floor mats .........................122–123
Fluid capacities .........................411
Fog lamps ....................................88
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles .......301
driving off road .......................307
electronic shift ................301, 306
indicator light .........................302
lever operated shift ................303
manual locking hubs ..............301
preparing to drive your
vehicle .....................................285
Fuel ............................................386
calculating fuel
economy ............................25, 393
cap ...........................................389
capacity ...................................411
choosing the right fuel ...........390
detergent in fuel .....................392
filling your vehicle
with fuel ..................386, 389, 393
filter, specifications ................386
fuel pump shut-off ..................321
improving fuel economy ........393
octane rating ...................391, 415
quality ......................................391
running out of fuel .................392
safety information relating
to automotive fuels ................386
Fuel - flex fuel vehicle
(FFV) .........................386, 390–391
Fuses ..................................321–322
G
Garage door opener ..................116
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............389
Gas mileage
(see Fuel economy) .................393
Gauges .........................................21
H
Hazard flashers .........................320
Headlamps ...................................87
aiming ........................................90
autolamp system .......................87
daytime running lights .............89
flash to pass ..............................88
high beam .................................88
replacing bulbs .........................94
turning on and off ....................87
Heating
heating and air conditioning
system .................................78, 81
Hill descent mode .....................281
Hill start assist ..........................294
Hood ..........................................371
I
Ignition ...............................265, 415
Illuminated visor mirror .............99
Index
444
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
Infant seats
(see Safety seats) .....................199
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................398
Instrument panel
cleaning ...........................365–366
cluster ........................................14
lighting up panel and
interior .......................................89
J
Jack ............................................331
positioning ...............................331
storage .....................................331
Jump-starting your vehicle ......348
K
Keyless entry system
autolock ...................................137
keypad .....................................148
locking and unlocking doors ..149
programming entry code .......148
Keys ...................................129, 150
positions of the ignition .........265
L
Lamps
autolamp system .......................87
daytime running light ...............89
fog lamps ...................................88
headlamps .................................87
headlamps, flash to pass ..........88
instrument panel, dimming .....89
interior lamps ...........................92
replacing bulbs ...................94–97
LATCH anchors .........................206
Lights, warning and indicator ....14
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........272
Loading instructions .................251
Load limits .................................244
Locks
autolock ...................................137
childproof ................................141
doors ........................................137
Lug nuts ....................................347
Lumbar support, seats .....160–161
M
Manual transmission
fluid capacities ........................411
Message center ...............22–23, 39
english/metric button ...............27
system check button ................27
warning messages ...............29, 48
Mirrors ...............................105–106
automatic dimming rearview
mirror ......................................105
fold away .........................107–109
heated ........................................81
programmable memory ..........143
side view mirrors (power) .....106
signal .......................................109
Moon roof ..................................115
Motorcraft威parts ......................410
MyKey ........................................129
N
Navigation system .......................77
O
Octane rating ............................391
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................375
Index
445
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
P
Parental MyKey
programming .............................129
Parking brake ............................273
Parts
(see Motorcraft威parts) ...........410
Pedals (see Power adjustable
foot pedals) ...............................110
Power adjustable foot pedals ...110
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................327
Power door locks ......................137
Power mirrors ...........................106
Powerpoint ................................101
Power steering ..........................282
fluid, checking and adding ....399
fluid, refill capacity ................411
Power Windows .........................103
Preparing to drive your
vehicle ........................................285
R
Radio ......................................60, 62
Rear-view camera system .........298
Recommendations for
attaching safety restraints
for children ................................197
Relays ........................................321
Remote entry system .......141–142
illuminated entry ....................145
locking/unlocking doors .........142
Remote start ...........................146
replacement/additional
transmitters .............................145
replacing the batteries ...........144
Remote start .............................146
Remote start climate
operation .....................................85
Reverse sensing system ...........296
Roadside assistance ..................319
S
Safety belts
(see Safety restraints) ...........168,
170, 172, 174–175
Safety Canopy ...................185–186
Safety defects, reporting ..359–360
Safety restraints ...............168, 170,
172, 174–175
Belt-Minder威...........................176
extension assembly ................175
for adults .................170, 172, 174
for children .............................195
warning light and chime ........176
Safety restraints -
LATCH anchors .........................206
Safety seats for children ..........199
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................416
Satellite Radio Information ........74
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Normal Scheduled
Maintenance and Log .............428
Seats ..........................................153
child safety seats ....................199
cleaning ...................................368
climate control ..................81, 162
easy access/easyout feature ..164
memory seat ...................143, 163
SecuriCode keyless entry
system ........................................147
Index
446
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
SecuriLock passive anti-theft
system ................................149–150
Servicing your vehicle ..............370
Setting the clock ...................61, 63
Snowplowing .................7, 316–317
SOS Post Crash Alert ...............189
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................410, 415
Special notice ................................8
ambulance conversions ..............8
diesel-powered vehicles .............7
four-wheel drive vehicles .......318
utility-type vehicles ....................7
Speed control ............................110
Starting a flex fuel vehicle .......268
Starting your vehicle ........265–268
jump starting ..........................348
Steering wheel
controls ....................................112
tilting .........................................99
SYNC威..........................................77
T
Tailgate ......................................123
Tilt steering wheel ......................99
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
Tires, Wheels and Loading ....237
Tires ...........................219–220, 331
alignment ................................229
care ..........................................225
changing ..................331, 334, 337
checking the pressure ............224
inflating ...................................221
label .........................................236
replacing ..................................227
rotating ....................................230
safety practices .......................229
sidewall information ...............232
snow tires and chains ............243
spare tire .................................332
terminology .............................220
tire grades ...............................220
treadwear ........................219, 226
Towing .......................................252
recreational towing .................263
Trailer Brake
Controller-Integrated ..............256
trailer towing ..........................252
wrecker ....................................351
Traction control ........................274
Trailer Brake
Controller-Integrated ................256
Trailer sway control ..................281
Transfer case
fluid checking .........................404
Transmission .............................287
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....285
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................400
fluid, refill capacities ..............411
Turn signal ..................................91
U
Universal garage door opener ..116
Upfitter controls .......................114
USB port ......................................71
V
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................417
Vehicle loading ..........................244
Ventilating your vehicle ...........269
Index
447
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)
W
Warning lights (see Lights) .......14
Washer fluid ..............................374
Water, Driving through .............315
Windows
power .......................................103
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................98
checking and adding fluid .....374
replacing wiper blades ...........374
Wrecker towing .........................351
Index
448
2012 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide, 4th Printing
USA (fus)

Navigation menu